| Hakemisto | |||||
 | VisôrAtivitâts | + | Un strument par tignî di voli lis risorsis di sisteme come CPU e memorie doprade. |
 | Gjestôr di inviament | + | Un strument par instalâ un menù di inviament intal Master Boot Record (MBR) di une unitât. |
 | Mape caratars | + | Une aplicazion che e mostre la mape dai caratars Unicode. |
 | CodyCam | + | Un strument par mandâ in maniere regolâr lis imagjins di une webcam suntun servidôr. |
 | Debugger | + | Un debugger grafic. |
 | DeskCalc | + | Une calcoladorie. |
 | Scandai dal disc | + | Un editôr esadecimâl pai file e pai dispositîfs. |
 | DiskUsage | + | Un strument par visualizâ la memorie doprade dal disc. |
 | Gjestion disc | + | Un imprest pal partizionament dal disc fis. |
 | Espansôr | + | Un strument par estrai i archivis comuns. |
 | HaikuDepot | + | Un strument par cjatâ, discjariâ, instalâ, inzornâ e disinstalâ i pachets (aplicazions) |
 | Icon-O-Matic | + | Une aplicazion par creâ lis iconis vetoriâls di Haiku. |
 | Instaladôr | + | Un strument par instalâ Haiku suntune partizion. |
 | Magnify | + | Une vision ingrandide de aree tor ator dal pontadôr dal mouse. |
 | + | Un client e-mail. | |
 | MediaPlayer | + | Un riprodutôr par ducj i file audio/video supuartâts. |
 | MidiPlayer | + | Un riprodutôr pai file MIDI. |
 | InstaladôrPachetsVecjos | + | Instaladôr pai pachets di BeOS intal formât PKG. |
 | People | + | Un gjestôr dai contats. |
 | Puar Om | + | Un sempliç servidôr web. |
 | Cature di schermi | + | Un strument par fâ istantaniis dal schermi. |
 | MostreImagjin | + | Un sempliç visualizadôr di imagjins. |
 | SoftwareUpdater | + | Un strument par inzornâ i pachets software e il stes Haiku. |
 | Regjistradôr di suns | + | Un strument par regjistrâ audio de linie di jentrade o di un microfon. [ancjemò al mancje] |
 | StyledEdit | + | Un sempliç editôr di test. |
 | Terminâl | + | Al permet di doprâ la shell bash. |
 | TextSearch | + | Un strument di ricercje pai file di test. |
 | TV | + | Un visualizadôr pes TV analogjichis. [ancjemò al mancje] |
 | WebPositive | + | Un navigadôr web natîf |
+
+Aplicazions a rie di comant di Haiku
+In diplui ai struments de rie di comant normâi, che si àn cu la shell bash o che a coventin par jessi conformi al standard POSIX, e je cualchi aplicazion, a rie di comant, specifiche par Haiku che e vâl la pene di nomenâ. Chescj comants a son dispès utii par finalitâts di scripting, bute un voli ancje sul argoment Bash e Scripting.
+ | Liste di dutis lis aplicazions de rie di comant | |
| Aplicazions de rie di comant specifichis par Haiku |
+
+Aplicazions incorporadis
+In diplui dai programs listâts parsore, che a son ducj mantignûts dal progjet Haiku, e je cualchi aplicazion incorporade essenziâl intun sisteme Haiku standard. Erôrs e richiestis di funzionalitâts par chei programs a scugnin jessi inviâts a chês personis in particolâr che ju mantegnin.
+ | BePDF | + | Un visualizadôr di PDF. |
 | Pe | + | Un editôr di test avanzât cu la colorazion de sintassi e tant altri. |
 | Vision | + | Un client IRC. |
 | WonderBrush | + | Program grafic di YellowBite. |
-
+
Furlan
+
Bahasa Indonesia
+
Català
+
Deutsch
+
English
+
Español
+
Français
+
Italiano
+
Magyar
+
Polski
+
Português
+
Português (Brazil)
+
Română
+
Slovenčina
+
Suomi
+
Svenska
+
中文 ［中文］
+
Русский
+
Українська
+
日本語
+
VisôrAtivitâts
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/ActivityMonitor | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/ActivityMonitor settings |
Tu puedis tignî di voli lis risorsis di sisteme inviant il VisôrAtivitâts e ativant i varis elements che ti interessin. +
+
+Fasint clic diestri sul barcon si pues decidi la visualizazion des variis risorsis:
+Memorie doprade/Cache, Spazi memorie di scambi, CPU doprade, Rêt Ricezion/Inviament, Erôrs di Pagjine, Semafars, Puartis, Thread, Complès, Aplicazions in esecuzion, Dimension notis gresis/test, Grops Multimediâi.
Sot dal grafic e je une liende (che si pues platâ dal menù contestuâl). Tu puedis cambiâ i colôrs e chel dal fonts dal grafic strissinant e molant il colôr di cualsisei seletôr di colôrs, p.e. di Icon-O-Matic.
+Tu puedis zontâ plui viodudis dal menù se si jemple masse.
+Il menù al vierç un panel par stabilî l'interval di inzornament.
+Ogni viodude e à la sô mantie pal Replicant e duncje e pues jessi fissade, par esempli, sul Scritori.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
BePDF
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/BePDF/BePDF | |
| Documentazion: | /boot/system/apps/BePDF/docs/* | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/BePDF |
BePDF al è un visualizadôr di PDF che si invie in maniere veloce. In di plui a visualizâ, al supuarte il cjapâ notis e i segnelibris definîts dal utent pai PDF che no son cifrâts. Pal moment al è voltât dal dut in 20 lenghis e si puedin zontâ plui lenghis in maniere facile, par mieç di file di test.
+La documentazion e je disponibile come HTML o PDF. La ultime si pues vierzi ancje dal menù .
+-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
BootManager (Gjestôr di inviament)
+| Deskbar: | Nissune vôs, di norme inviât dal menù dal Instaladôr | |
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/BootManager | |
| Impostazions: | nissune i backup dal MBR a son salvâts in maniere predefinite su ~/config/settings/bootman/ |
Se no tu zontis la partizion di Haiku a un gjestôr di inviament esistent come GRUB, Gjestôr di inviament al pues instalâ un piçul menù di inviament tal Master Boot Record (MBR) che al semee a chel chi:
+
+Gjestôr di inviament ti vuide intal procès di instalazion dal menù di inviament.
+
+
+Sielte de unitât di destinazion
+
+Il gjestôr di inviament al partìs cuntune liste di dutis lis unitâts disponibilis che tu puedis sielzi come destinazion. Se al esist za un menù di inviament su chê unitât, il boton al devente atîf, vuidanti te semplice procedure par ripristinâ il backup dal MBR precedent e duncje gjavant il menù di inviament. In câs contrari, sielç par continuâ.
+
+
+Fâ il backup dal Master Boot Record (MBR)
+Intal câs che al ledi stuart alc o tu desideredis gjavâ di gnûf il menù di inviament, il Master Boot Record (MBR) al è cumò salvât. Al è clâr che chest al è un passaç une vore impuartant, fâs in mût di jessi sigûr che nol vegni sorescrit par erôr cualchi altri backup di MBR, come pr esempli di cualchi espsriment precedent resint!
+
+
+Juste selezione une destinazion pal file di backup "MBR" o lasse il paercors predefinît. Dopo vê fat clic su tu varâs une conferme se il backup al è lât a bon fin.
+
+
+Configurâ il menù di inviament
+
+
+Dopo ti si presente une liste di dutis lis partizions su pe unitât di destinazion. Metint lis crosutis tu decidarâs cualis vôs vê tal menù di inviament, i ricuadris di test ti permetin di cambiâ il non a une vôs.
+Dopo di chel, tu sielzis dal menù a tendine cuale partizion e à di jessi inviade in maniere predefinide e stabilî un timp di spiete cul cursôr che al sta sot. Achì, "Daurman" al saltarà dal dut il menù di inviament, "Mai" al fermarà il sisteme al menù di inviament. Tu puedis passâ parsore ae impostazion dal timp di spiete tegnint fracât ALT intant che si sta inviant il sisteme.
+
+
+Scrivi il menù di inviament
+
+
+Prime di scrivi il menù di inviament sul MBR, ti varâs une sintesi de tô configurazion e dopo une ultime pussibilitât di interompi la operazion. Nuie pôre però, fintant che tu tegnis il backup dal MBR al sigûr, tu puedis simpri tornâ a prime des modifichis. Se lis robis si ruvinin dal dut, al è simpri pussibil inviâ un CD di instalazion di Haiku o une clavute USB e tornâ a scrivi il backup MBR cun Gjestôr di inviament.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Mape caratars
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/CharacterMap | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings |
Mape caratars ti mostrarà il codiç UTF-8 di ogni simbul, letare, numar o segn supuartât dal caratar.
+
+Ae çampe tu âs i blocs standardizâts, adun cuntune comode funzion di filtri. In maniere opzionâl, tu puedis sielzi ancje dal menù . A drete al mostre i caratars efetîfs in chei blocs, doprant il gjenar di caratar specificât intal menù . Sot tu puedis cambiâ la dimension dal caratar. E sot di chel, i valôrs dal caratar che al sta sot dal pontadôr dal mouse mostrâts in esadecimâl, decimâl e notazion UTF-8.
+Tu puedis strissinâ e molâ un caratar dret de mape dai caratars intun editôr di tescj opûr fâ clic diestri suntun caratar par fâ (ALT C) o (SHIFT ALT C). Tal esempli al risulte € opûr \xe2\x82\xac.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Aplicazions a rie di comant specifichis par Haiku
+| Posizion: | /boot/system/bin/ +/boot/system/non-packaged/bin/ ~/config/bin/ ~/config/non-packaged/bin/ |
Dutis lis aplicazions a rie di comant distribuidis cun Haiku a son in /boot/system/bin/. Ancje lis tôs o lis aplicazions instaladis in zonte a vignaran fûr lì, o in ~/config/bin/, cuant che a vegnin instaladis di un pachet .hpkg. In alternative tu puedis metilis in /boot/system/non-packaged/bin/ o ~/config/non-packaged/bin/. Dutis lis posizions a fasin part de variabile PATH e duncje a vegnin cjatadis in automatic.
+La liste chi sot no je esaustive di dutis lis aplicazions a rie di comant specifichis di Haiku, e serf dome a evidenziâ cualchidune des plui utilis, juste par dâti une cerce. No sta vê pôre di esplorâ di bessôl ce che al sta intes cartelis bin/. Eseguint une aplicazion cul parametri --help al mostrarà l'ûs dal comant e dutis lis sôs varis opzions.
+Corelâts ai atribûts: listattr, catattr, addattr, rmattr, copyattr
+Chescj comants a son doprâts par mostrâ, lei, zontâ e gjavâ atribûts dai file. Visiti che chescj meta-dâts a son pal moment disponibii dome sui volums formatâts in BFS. Spostant i file suntun altri filesystem ducj i atribûts a laran pierdûts!
+Ducj chescj comants a son descrits intal argoment Atribûts tal Terminâl.
+Corelâts ae tabele: lsindex, mkindex, reindex, rmindex
+Cun chescj comants tu listis, fasis, tornis a meti in tabele e gjavis i atribûts ae tabele di BFS. Ogni volum al à la sô tabele, visital cuant che tu copiis i file di un volum a chel altri.
+Chescj comants a son descrits intal argoment Tabele.
+Corelâts ae gjestion dai pachets: package, pkgman
+Il comant package al ven doprât par gjestî i pachets HPKG. Bute un voli al articul Instalazion des aplicazions par imparâ lis basis. Di solit il strument haikuporter al ven doprât par creâ in automatic i pachets di ce che o clamin ricetis (recipes).
+pkgman al ven doprât par cirî, instalâ, inzornâ e disinstalâ pachets. I dipuesits dai pachets a puedin jessi zontâts, scartâts e inzornâ la liste dai lôr pachets. Un speciâl gjenar di inzornament al è invocât cul parametri full-sync: al è plui agressîf e, se al covente, al degrade o al gjave i pachets.
+Par vê plui detais suntun parametri, zonte "--help", p.e. pkgman search --help
+Utii comants pal scripting
+Chi a son cualchi strument a rie di comant che a son utii soredut pal scripting (viôt ancje l'argoment Bash e Scripting).
+alert | + | alert al evoche il tipic barcon di alerte cuntune icone predefinide, test esplicatîf e fin a trê botons. Al tornarà il titul dal boton fracât e un stât di jessude (tacant cun 0). Par esempli, chest al è fat de rie: +alert --idea "FantasticApp(tm) installed successfully! \ +Would you like a link to it?" "On Desktop" "In Deskbar" "No thanks"+
|
filepanel | + | filepanel al mostre un panel par salvâ o cjariâ file e al permet al utent di sielzi un file o une posizion. Come valôr tornât tu varâs il file sielt o il percors de cartele sielte. A son disponibii diviers parametris, par esempli stabilî une cartele iniziâl, un titul pal barcon, un non predefinîtpar salvâ o restrizions sui gjenars di file. Chest al è un esempli di +filepanel -s -t "Save your logfile" -d ~/config/settings -n Fantastic.log+
|
hey | + | hey al è un piçul strument di jutori che al invie BMessages aes aplicazions e al stampe la lôr rispueste. Al pues jessi doprât pal scripting des aplicazions, p.e. "control rimot" di un program di un script o de rie di comant. Il so ûs al è un tic complicât... Il post tal blog di Humdinger al zove come une buine introduzion e, gracie ae BeOS Bible di Scot Hacker, e je une lezion su hey di Chris Herborth, une vore plui complete. |
notify | + | notify al mostre un panel di notifiche cuntun messaç. A son varis parametris che a son descrits cuant che tu clamis notify --help. Une notifiche e pues ancje jessi doprade par mostrâ l'avanzament di cualchi azion. Cuant che si lu fâs, al è imppuartant configurâ un messageID e doprâlu simpri cuant che si inzorne l'avanzament (un numar a virgule mobile tra 0.0 e 1.0 che al ven scrit come percentuâl). In câs contrari tu viodarâs diviers panei di notifiche se l'inzornament al è plui veloç dal timp di durade de notifiche stabilît. notify --type progress --group "--group" --title "--title" --icon /boot/home/bebook.hvif \ +--messageID MyMessageID --progress .75 "Keep waiting"+
|
query | + | query e je la version a rie di comant dal panel Cjate. Di fat, une maniere veloce par gjenerâ il tiermin di ricercje e je chê di costruî une interogazion intal panel Cjate, passâ a , zontâ lis doplis virgulutis (") denant e daûr e tacâ dute la stringhe dopo dal to comant query intal Terminâl o tal to script. + |
waitfor | + | waitfor e je une maniere ninine par spietâ che e partissi o che e finissi une particolâr aplicazion o thread. + |
+Altris comants
+
+checkfs | + | checkfs al è un strument impuartant par controlâ eventuâi erôrs sul to filesystem. Al baste zontâ un non di volum come /Haiku o un percors di dispositîf e lui al passarà par ogni file par corezi incoerencis, dulà che al è pussibil. + |
desklink | + | desklink al pues instalâ une icone par cualsisei file, cartele, interogazion o aplicazion inte guantiere Deskbar. Al ufrìs ancje la opzion par furnî un menù contestuâl cuant che si fâs clic diestri suntune icone par eseguî azions speciâls. Come esempli, prove chest par zontâ la aplicazion de rie di comant screenshot cun varis opzions (la "\" inte prime rie e je dome par vê la rie di interuzion tal Terminâl): +desklink "cmd=Active window (2s):/bin/screenshot --window --border --delay 2" \ +"cmd=Remove replicant:desklink --remove=screenshot" /bin/screenshot ++
|
diskimage | + | diskimage ti permet di regjistrâ un file regolâr come dispositîf disc. Par sempli, tu puedis regjistrâ une imagjin anyboot di Haiku, montâle in Tracker e lì copiâ, modificâ o gjavâ file prime di doprâle come sorzint intal Instaladôr. + |
launch_roster | + | Il launch_daemon al fâs partî ogni sorte di servizi e aplicazion al inviament dal sisteme. Par cualchidun al è stât domandât di tornâ a inviâju se a fossin jessûts. Se chest no ti va ben – forsit ti plasarès provâ une version modificade di Tracker, par esempli – dopre launch_roster par fermâ cun stop il tornâ a inviâ de aplicazion prime di fâlu jessî. In maniere simile, tu puedis fâlu partî di gnûf cun start o otignî informazions cun info in merit.c Il parametri log al stampe un regjistri di ducj i events leâts al launch_daemon. launch_roster stop x-vnd.be-tskb |
mountvolume | + | mountvolume al ven preferît di tancj par montâ discs e partizions locâi, parcè che il so ûs al è ce tant sempliç: al baste clamâlu cul non de partizion e il zûc al è fat. Prove --help par vê plui opzions. +mount al pues ancje montâ discs rimots doprant un filesystem di rêt, come NFS4. Tu specifichis il filesystem doprât cul parametri -t e la posizion rimote cul parametri -p . Come parametri di filesystem tu puedi doprâ dut ce che tu cjatis in /system/add-ons/kernel/file_system (e lis gjerarchiis dai file corispondents sot ~/config o "non-packaged", che ben si intint). Tu âs ancje di creâ une cartele come pont di montaç. Chi al è un esempli: +mkdir -p /DiskStation +mount -t nfs4 -p "192.168.178.3:volume1" /DiskStation |
open | + | open al è un piçul strument une vore comut. Cun chel tu vierzis cualsisei file cu la sô aplicazion preferide, o inviâ une specifiche aplicazion par mieç de sô firme, cence savê la sô esate posizion. Al funzione ancje cui URL e adiriture cu lis cartelis "virtuâls" . pe cartele atuâl e .. par chê superiôr, vierzint la cartele in Tracker. + |
ramdisk | + | Un ramdisk al è come un disc fis dome che al zire inte memorie ram dal computer. Chest lu rint une vore veloç ma ancje volatil, parcè che il so contingût si sfante cuant che tu distudis il computer, o al colasse o e salte la curint. ramdisk create -s 1gb +mkfs -q -t bfs /dev/disk/virtual/ram/0/raw RAMses +mountvolume RAMses+ Note: cuant che si cree un ramdisk, il comant ramdisk al stampe il percors di chel apene creât. Se tu creis diviers discs, il percors /dev/disk/virtual/ram/0/raw al cambiarà! +Par conservâ il contignût, infûr che a capitedin calamitâts come un blackout e robis dal gjenar, un ramdisk al pues jessi configurât par lei/scriviune imagjin sul disc fis. Par chel, tu scugnis indicâ un file, de dimension desiderade, che al vignarà let ogni volte che tu inviis il to ramdisk, e scrit cuant che tu lu dismontis. Par creâ un file imagjin "RAMimage" di 500MiB e formatâlu, fâs cussì: +dd if=/dev/zero of=RAMimage bs=500M count=1 +mkfs -q -t bfs /dev/disk/virtual/ram/0/raw RAMimage+ Di cumò indenant, tu inviis il ramdisk cussì: +ramdisk create RAMimage +mountvolume RAMimage+ Al è une vore impuartant dismontâ simpri in maniere nete il to ramdisk, sedi dal Tracker opûr cun unmount /RAMimage, in câs contrari lis modifichis no vignaran scritis su pal file imagjin! + |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
CodyCam
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/CodyCam | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/codycam |
CodyCam ti permet di creâ imagjins a un specific interval di timp par mieç di une webcam tacade o cualsisei altri dispositîf video in jentrade. Daspò lis salve vie FTP.
+
+Ae çampe sot de anteprime, tu stabilissis il non dal file che al vignarà metût te seconde part dal non, te prime part al sarà un numar in cressite par ogni scat fat. Sot tu decidis il formât e la velocitât dai scats.
+A diestre tu sielzis FTP o sFTP (se SSH al è disponibil) e tu inserissis i dâts necessaris par salvâ lis imagjins sul servidôr.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Debugger
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Debugger | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Debugger settings +~/config/settings/Debugger/ |
Debugger e je une aplicazion che l'utent comun nol à di doprâ masse. E je orientade ai disvilupadôrs che a indaghin sui erôrs dai programs. Cualchi volte i erôrs a risultin in colàs e in chê volte i utents a vegnin in contat cul Debugger. Cuant che un program al colasse, tu cjatarâs chest messaç di alerte :
+
+Al ufrìs cuatri opzions par dâ cuintri al colàs:
+-
+
al netarà dut dopo il colàs de aplicazion, ma plui di cussì nol fasarà nuie altri.
+al fasarà partî il Debugger par investigâ plui in profonditât.
+al cree un rapuart di debug che al ven salvât come file di test sul Scritori e al pues jessi inviât vie e-mail al disvilupadôr de aplicazion che e je colassade opûr zontade a un cartelin al so bugtracker, se disponibil.
+Il rapuart di debug al conten informazions sul to hardware (gjenar di CPU e memorie doprade e vie indenant), la version esate di Haiku e dutis lis informazions disponibilis sul stât dal sisteme che a puedin jessi significativis pal colàs.
+al cree un pussibil enormi file dulà che al ven tirât ju il stât dal sisteme. Al è miôr zontâ prime un rapuart di debug regolâr cuant che si invie une segnalazion di erôr e dome dopo furnî il file cul stât de memorie, se domandât.
+
La azion predefinide di cuant che al sucêt un colàs e pues jessi configurade cuntun file di test ~/config/settings/system/debug_server/settings.
+Il file al cjape un formât di stîl di driver_settings come chi daurman:
default_action user
+
+executable_actions {
+ app1 log
+ /path/app2* debug
+}
+I valôrs valits par une default_action a son:
+| user | Domande al utent la azion. | |
| kill | Termine cidin cidin il complès colassât. | |
| debug | Zonte il debugger al complès colassât. | |
| log / report | Salve un rapuart sul colàs e termine il complès. | |
| core | Salve un (pussibilmentri une vore grant) file cul stât de memorie e termine il complès. |
Se nissune default_action e ven specificade, si doprarà "user".
+La sot-sezion executable_actions e conten valôrs individuâi che a passin parsore a chei predefinîts. Chescj a cjapin la forme parsore, dulà che lis riis individuâls a puedin jessi dome un non di un complès, o un percors, cui caratars mate.
++
Nol à sens descrivi l'ûs dal Debugger atuâl in cheste vuide che e je indreçade aes necessitâts dal utent comun di Haiku. Par completece, chi al è il barcon che al vignarà fûr se si sielç la opzion te alerte parsore:
+
+Butant di corse il voli tu viodarâs che cuant che tu tacarâs a tafagnâ parsore un tic tu ti rindarâs cont che il Debugger e je une des plui complicadis e sofisticadis aplicazions par Haiku. Se tu sês un disvilupadôr e tu sês abituât ai debugger grafics su altris plateformis, tantis funzionalitâts ti saran familiârs.
+Chi sot a son un pôcs di colegaments che a puedin pandi un pocje di lûs su lis complessitâts dal debugger di Haiku. Se tu âs une domande specifiche, tu podaressis considerâ la idee di publicâle su la mailing list di disvilup. Se tu cjatis risorsis plui utilis, par plasê segnale un erôr cun chê informazion.
+| Debugger Reference Manual | Cheste e je la sorzint plui aprofondide su ce mût lavorâ cul Debugger. | |
| Blogposts | A son un pôcs di articui sul Debugger, pal plui di Rene Gollent daspò vê implementât une gnove funzionalitât. | |
| BeGeistert 026 video | Un video de riunion di BeGeistert dal 2012, dulà che Ingo Weinhold al dimostre il stât dal Debugger di chê volte e al mostre altris struments interessants come il profiladôr par cjatâ fûr i cuei di butilie. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
DeskCalc
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/DeskCalc | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/DeskCalc_settings |
DeskCalc e je une semplice calcoladorie che dut câs e à cualchi funzionalitât ninine che in prime batude no si viôt.
+
+-
+
DeskCalc al capìs plui di ce che la sô botonere e sugjerìs.
+In diplui ai operadôrs , -, *, /, %, ^ e lis costantis pi e e, chestis funzions matematichis a son supuartadis:
+!, acos, asin, atan, atan2, ∛, tar(ceil), cos, cosh, ^(exp), star.(floor), log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, √, tan, tanh.
+
+Il clic diestri al ufrìs chestis opzions:
++
Al ative in automatic il bloc dai numars de tastiere cuant che si invie DeskCalc. Passe tra "rad" e "deg" come unitât pes misuris angolârs. ALT 0 Une modalitât di visualizazion minimâl che e plate la botonere. ALT 1 L'aspiet standard di DeskCalc. ALT 2 Mostre botons adizionâi par calcui avanzâts.
+Cuant che si cjacare di input utent, DeskCalc al è vonde tolerant:
+/, :, \ a son ducj interpretâts come operadôrs di division,
+*, x a son simbui valits pe moltiplicazion.
+Sta ancje antent che . e , a son ducj i doi considerâts virgulis, che al significhe che no tu âs di doprâju come separadôr pai miârs.
+Tu puedis cambiâ dimension de calcoladorie tant che tu vûs e dopo metilu come Replicant sul Scritori cul "strissine e mole" dal simbul intal angul in bas a diestre. Controle di vê ativât tal Deskbar.
+Ancje la botonere e pues jessi colorade cul "strissine e mole" di cualsisei colôr, p.e. di Icon-O-Matic.
+Tu puedis spostâ sù o jù intune cronologjie dai calcui passâts cun ↑ e ↓.
+You can select DeskCalc's contents and drag & drop it into any application. Or you drop it into a Tracker window or onto the Desktop and a text file with that clipping is created there.
+Even better, the reverse is also possible:
+Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag & dropping them back into DeskCalc.
+Or you drag & drop a calculation directly out of an email onto DeskCalc.
+DeskCalc al pues jessi doprât tal Terminâl. Al baste meti la espression tra doplis virgulutis, come in chest esmpli:
+~> DeskCalc "sin(45)*(cos(12)+3.45)" +3.65365546732025461817951947270058
+Fâs câs: doprât tal Terminâl, DeskCalc al doprarà simpri i radiants come unitât pes funzions trigonometrichis.
+
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Scandai dal disc
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/DiskProbe | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/DiskProbe_data |
Scandai dal disc al è un editôr esadecimâl par visualizâ e alterâ i dâts di un file o su un dispositîf a nivel di byte. Al è un strument une vore di bas-nivel e al à duncje il potenziâl par fâ dams gruès se no si sta atents!
+Cuant che tu inviis Scandai dal disc ti vignarà domandât prin di dut il file o il dispositîf dulà lavorâ. Dopo di chel ti si presente cun cheste interface:
+
La viodude principâl e mostre simpri un bloc di dâts, la sô dimension e pues jessi justadecun . Ae çampe al sta il spostament (offset) dal inizi dal bloc, tal mieç i dâts come valôrs esadecimâi e a diestre il stes ma come simbul ASCII.
+Tu puedis spostâti di un bloc a chel altri cul cursôr de sbare parsore o cun ALT ← e ALT → e par passâ tra la colone esadecimâl e chê ASCII cun TAB.
nol mostrarà dome la selezion cu la codifiche endian diferente (e in esadecimâl o decimâl, stabilît di ), ma ancje al interpretarà la selezion tant che un spostament di bloc che a chel tu puedis saltâi indaûr. Al vignarà mostrât in grîs se la posizion e je fûr dal file/dispositîf.
+Cheste e je une funzionalitât utile soredut cuant che si cjale i filesystem, viodût che dispès a contegnin pontadôrs a altris blocs.
Se il file che tu stâs scandaiant al inclût atribût, il menù dai al pues jessi doprât par vierzi cualsisei di chei intun gnûf barcon di Scandai dal disc. Chi al è l'atribût SYS:PACKAGE de aplicazion Informazions su Haiku : +
In base al gjenar di atribût, tu varâs une schede di modifiche divierse in bande al simpri presint Editôr dâts grês. Par esempli, a son editôrs par stringhis e gjenars MIME opûr un visualizadôr di icone pal atribût de icone vetoriâl.
+-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
DiskUsage (Utilizazion dal disc)
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/DiskUsage | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/DiskUsage |
DiskUsage al mostre in maniere grafiche ce mût che al ven doprât il spazi sul to volum.
+Un strument util par rispuindi ae domande: "Dulà isal lât dut il spazi dal gno disc fis?".
Apene dopo vêlu inviât, DiskUsage al mostre dome un barcon vueit, cun tantis schedis parsore tancj e son i volums montâts. Tu varâs di sielzi chel che ti interesse e fâ clic su par tacâ a scrusignâ tal disc. Pai discs grancj al podarès tirâle a dilunc... Intant che tu spietis, tu puedis passâ a une altre schede e tacâ a esplorâ chel volum o iniziâ il procès di scansion ancje lì.
+Nol è conseât fâ partî tancj procès di scansion contemporaniis sul stes disc fisic, par vie che il ripetût spostament des testinis de unitât al varà l'efiet di sprolungjâ il timp di spiete.
I cerclis concentrics a rapresentin nivei diferents te gjerarchie dal filesystem. Chi parsore, il cercli tal mieç al rapresente la cartele /boot/home/ . Ogni segment dal anel subite fûr chel cercli al è un file o une cartele sot di /boot/home/. Ogni segment ancjemò plui fûr ti puarte a un nivel ancjemò plui profont te gjerarchie dai file. Tu podaressis vê bisugne di ridimensionâ il barcon par sestâ lis cartelis une vore profondis.
+-
+
- Se la rapresentazion grafiche di un file o di une cartele e sta jenfri 2° (cirche) di un cercli, al ven escludût de visualizazion. +
- Il numar di file che al ven segnât par une cartele al inclût ancje i file tes sot-cartelis. Une cartele e conte come un file. +
- DiskUsage al ignore i colegaments simbolics. +
Come che tu spostis il mouse parsore di un segment, lis informazions su chel file o cartele a vegnin fûr te sbare di stât in bas.
+Fâ clic diestri suntun segment al ufrìs un menù contestuâl cun , (cul Tracker), une altre aplicazion adate o chê precise cartele.
+Fâ clic di çampe suntun segment al rint chel file/cartele il cercli centrâl.
+Fâ clic di çampe sul cercli centrâl ti fâs tornâ sù di un nivel.
Tu puedis strissinâ i file e lis cartelis di DiskUsage suntune altre aplicazion o sul Scritori o altris barcons dal Tracker par copiâlis. Al contrari, molant volums e cartelis sul barcon di DiskUsage tu ingrandirâs subite a chel nivel, fasintju deventâ il gnûf cercli centrâl.
+Tu puedis ancje doprâ la zonte (add-on) dal Tracker dal menù contestuâl di cualsise cartele par inviâ DiskUsage cun chê particolâr posizion.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
DriveSetup
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/DriveSetup | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/DriveSetup |
DriveSetup is a tool to create, delete and format partitions. At this time it can't resize or move existing partitions, so that you'll either need an unpartitioned volume (perhaps an external USB drive or another harddisk) or do the initial setup with a tool like the GParted LiveCD to provide the space for another partition.
+
+At the top is a graphical representation of all partitions inside the device chosen in the list below it. Each device, by default, can hold a maximum of 4 primary partitions. This limit can be removed by making one of those an extended partition, which in turn can hold theoretically an unlimited number of logical partitions (practical limitations depend on, for example, other OSes installed).
+You may have to expand such a list with the +/- widget that appears in that case in front of that device to see the details of every logical partition.
Colors and icons provide some more information about the available volumes and partitions.
+Besides the familiar icons for harddisks, CD drives and USB sticks etc., there are a few that indicate a their mount mode:
 | + | The /boot partition |
 | + | An encrypted partition |
 | + | A partition shared through SMB/NFS etc. |
 | + | A partition that was mounted read-only |
 | + | A mounted image file (see also the diskimage command) |
When mounted, a colored bar shows the used space of a partition. The color depends on the kind of partition:
+| A BFS formatted partition | ||
| A non-BFS formatted partition | ||
| A read-only partition | ||
| An encrypted partition |
You can select a partition and choose various commands from the context or menu, like /, or to .
+You can also or completely a partition.
+
+
+Initializing a disk
+If you don't plan to use just one of the partitions of a larger disk, but the entire drive as one partition, e.g. a USB stick or a Compact Flash card, you'll have to initialize the disk first.
+You do this by selecting the raw disk from list of devices and choose a partition map from the menu. The is the right choice for classical booting via a BIOS.
+
+
+Creating a new partition
+When you found unformatted space on a drive, like the above <empty>, you can create a new partition in this space with (ALT C).
+
+You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.
+The checkbox is only available if you have created a primary partition instead of just another logical partition within an extended one. You'll have to tick that checkbox if you plan to use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.
+Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be formatted with a filesystem.
+
+
+Formatting a partition
+Only unmounted partitions can be formatted by choosing a filesystem from the sub-menu of . The (BFS) is mandatory for a Haiku boot partition and recommended for data partitions to be used with Haiku. Only BFS formatted partitions can be queried and fully support Haiku's file attributes.
+
+Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. The blocksize is the space in bytes that a file will allocate at minimum. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
+If the future data on your partition won't need any querying, you can uncheck to save a bit of overhead for managing the index.
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Expander
+| Deskbar: | No entry, normally launched via double-clicking a supported file. | |
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Expander | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Expander_Settings |
Expander is a small tool to quickly unpack the most common archives, among them zip, gzip, bzip2, rar and tar.gz.
+Just double-click an archive to see this simple interface:
| ALT O | will open a file dialog to find an archive to unpack. | |
| ALT D | will open a file dialog to set the destination. | |
| ALT E | will start the unpacking. It can be aborted with ALT K. |
You can toggle the display of the file listing by un/checking or pressing ALT L.
++You can't select individual files to expand or add/remove files from the archive.
or ALT S opens a preference panel that offers some useful settings to adjust Expander's behavior.
+The options are all self-explanatory:
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
| The Filter + The List + The Info Area + Tools and Show menus + Creating a User Account + Rating and Commenting + |
HaikuDepot
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/HaikuDepot | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/HaikuDepot/main_settings +~/config/cache/HaikuDepot/ - Cached icons, screenshots, descriptions etc. |
HaikuDepot is the central application when it comes to managing your software packages. With it you can browse and search through package repositories and install, update and uninstall packages. By default, HaikuDepot starts up with a list of "Featured packages", software that's deemed interesting to many users.
+
+When the checkbox is deactivated, all available packages are shown and the display changes to smaller icons and more information arranged in columns:
+
+
+
+The Filter
+At the top we find a few means to filter the list of available packages below:
+-
+
The pop-up menu lets you limit the list to individual categories like "Audio" or "Games".
+The text field filters the list to those packages that have all the entered (space-delimited) strings in their name or description.
+The checkbox to can be activated to further filter the results in the set category or of the entered search terms.
+The menu of the menu bar determines which repos are being queried. "Local" packages are the ones that were installed from somewhere other than an online repo; maybe from a USB thumb drive or downloaded from some website or a package that you've built yourself.
+
+The List
+Like in any Tracker window, you can choose from a context menu which columns to display by right-clicking the column heading. A left-click sorts the list according to that column. Of course, you can rearrange the columns by dragging them to a new position.
+The status column of a package can have one of several states:
+-
+
: The package is currently installed and ready to be used.
+: The package exists in that repository and can be downloaded and installed. If there are any dependencies on other packages, you'll be informed of that while installing and get the choice of downloading/installing all that's necessary.
+: Pending is shown for a package that is queued for download/installation. While a package is downloaded, the progress is shown as percentage.
+: There's a newer version than your installed one available.
+
You can grab the dotted line between the packages list and the info area to vertically resize the packages list.
+ +
+The Info Area
+At the bottom is an area that displays information on the package that is currently selected in the list above it.
+To the right of package name, author, rating and version is a button, that – depending on the current state of the package – lets you , or it. If a package is already installed, you'll find an additional button there to the application.
Below are four tabs: About, Ratings, Changelog and Contents.
+-
+
+
The first tab has a detailed description of the package, as well as screenshots and a contact address and URL of the team that maintains the packaged software, if available. Clicking the screenshot thumbnail will open it full-size in a new window
++
The second tab shows ratings and comments of users, if available.
+
+To the left is a statistic, showing the number of stars (1 to 5) the package got from how many users.
+In the middle are user comments with their nickname, the number of stars they gave the package and which version of the package they were rating or commenting on. You'll find more on how to rate a package yourself further down.
+ +
++
Here you find a detailed history of all the versions of the package that have been released so far, if the maintainer of the package provides that information.
++
The last tab shows all the files and folders a package contains. This only works for already downloaded packages.
+
+Tools and Show menu
+In the menu at the top of the window, you'll find an item to . This will request an up-to-date list of all available packages from the repositories.
+The second item is to . It opens the Repositories preferences, to add/remove or disable and enable repositories.
+ opens the SoftwareUpdater to search and install updated packages.
Under you can choose to also display and in the packages list. For the normal user those are of no interest and would only clutter the list. They are important, however, for people who need the libraries, headers etc. of a package to develop and compile programs depending on them.
+Of more interest are the options to only show and .
+ +
+Creating a User Account
+To be able to rate a package, you need a user account at the Haiku Depot Server that serves all the packages and keeps track of ratings and user comments. You can create an account within the HaikuDepot application by clicking on the menu in the far right of the menu bar that shows your current status: . Choosing opens a window with two tabs; one to enter your user name and password (once you have those) to log in, and the other to create a new account:
+
+To create an account you need to:
+- use an all lower-case user name without special characters +
- use a password that's at least 8 characters long with at least 2 capitals and 2 numbers +
- provide a valid email address (if you want a new password sent to you in case you forgot it) +
- solve the captcha
After logging in, the top-right menu of the HaikuDepot window will now say , showing your user name. The menu now offers you to or .
+ +
+Rating and Commenting
+After you've created a user account and are logged in, you can rate a package and leave a comment, if you want. Just hover the mouse over the rating stars in the info area of a package and they turn into a button. Click it to open the rating window:
+
+Here you move the mouse over the stars to light them up and choose your rating, you can also choose from a number of levels to judge the stability of the application and pick the language of your optional comment. To make a comment meaningful, you should have worked with the application you're about to rate for a while to become familiar with its features, bugs and quirks. And don't write the next great American novel... keep it short, sweet and polite. :)
+After you click the data is transmitted to the server. You may have to go to the menu to before you can see your changes.
At any time, you can come back and edit your comment and re-rate it. You can also hide your rating from other users by deactivating the checkbox .
+-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
| BeOS bitmap vs. Haiku vector icons + Icons are attributes + Creating icons with Icon-O-Matic + Path + Shape + Style + Transformer + Saving an icon + Tips & Tricks |
Icon-O-Matic
+
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Icon-O-Matic | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Icon-O-Matic |
Before we come to the actual creating of icons in Icon-O-Matic, a few words on Haiku's icons in general.
+ +
+
+BeOS bitmap vs. Haiku vector icons
+Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
+Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
| Bitmap | SVG | HVIF |
  |  | |
| 1,024 byte + 256 byte | 7,192 byte | 768 byte |
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
+This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
+| 16x16 | 32x32 | 64x64 | 128x128 | |
| Bitmap | + |
+  |
+  |
+  |
| Vector | + |
+  |
+  |
+  |
+
+Icons are attributes
+Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType add-on on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
+
+
+Creating icons with Icon-O-Matic
+Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
+Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
+For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
+
+To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the view.
+ + +
+
+Path
+A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure the path is selected in the path list.
+ +Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+ +
+
+To get from "A" to "B", you have to transform some points from corner-points to curve-points. That's done by holding ALT while clicking on a point and dragging out the handles. This results in a symmetrical Bezier: the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click & drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
+Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
To move a point, simply click & drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
+To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
+Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+ |
+  |
+  |
+  |
+  |
+  |
+
| Move point(s) | +Insert point | +Add point | +Delete point CTRL |
+ Corner↔Bezier ALT |
+ Select points SHIFT |
+
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+| ALT A | Selects all points of the current path. | |
| T | Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down. | |
| Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other. | ||
| Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points. | ||
| DEL | Deletes selected points. |
Path Menu
+The menu offers a few obvious entries to and or to or a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
+ +| If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead. | ||
| Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points. | ||
| ALT R | Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪. | |
| ALT SHIFT R | Does the same in the other direction. |
Path Properties
+at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a and if it's or not.
+ + +
+
+Shape
+A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
+A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
+ +
+
+When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+ |
+  |
+  |
+ |
+
| Move | +Resize | +Rotate | +Move rotation point |
+
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag & drop their entry to a different position in the list.
+ +Shape Menu
+The menu offers the before mentioned possibility to and to or a shape. Then, there is:
+| Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape. | ||
| When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used to set the points at precise pixel borders. +If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state. |
Shape Properties
+Besides a , the view for a shape has these options:
+ +| Minimum Level of Detail | ||
| Maximum Level of Detail |
Level of Detail (LOD)
+| 16x16 | 32x32 | 64x64 |
 |
+  |
+  |
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
+With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its and above its .
+So, if you set a shape's to 0.0 and the to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
+The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
+For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
| OK | Not OK! | ||||
| Shape 1 | Min LOD | 0.00 | Min LOD | 0.00 | |
| Max LOD | 0.74 | Max LOD | 0.75 | ||
| Shape 2 | Min LOD | 0.75 | Min LOD | 0.75 | |
| Max LOD | 4.00 | Max LOD | 4.00 | ||
+
+Style
+A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
+Besides the predefined colors under , you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
+You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag & dropping it into the list of styles.
+If you go for a gradient, you set the type (, , , ) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag & drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
+Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
+ +Style Menu
+The menu offers the usual entries to , or a style and to .
+ +Style Properties
+The is the only of a style.
+ + +
+
+Transformer
+A shape can have Transformers which change its appearance. The effects, however, are more subtle than a truck turning into a battle robot...
+ +Transformer Add Menu
+| Adds an outline to a shape. | ||
| Strokes the path of a shape instead of filling it with a style. |
Depending on the kind of Transformer, you'll get a different set of properties.
+ +Transformer Properties
+Besides a and the actual for the transformer, the view has these (depending on its type slightly differing) options:
+| Stroke only. Defines the end caps of a line: , or . | ||
| Contour only. Determines if the contour is to the inside or outside the path. | ||
| Defines how lines are joined at a point: , or . | ||
| Only when the above is set to "Miter" this setting influences the looks of the miter joint. |
+
+Saving an icon
+There's your usual menu bar at the top, , , . The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
+will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
+ +opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+| HVIF | Haiku Vector Icon Format | |
| HVIF RDef | Saves as resource used by programmers | |
| HVIF source code | Saves as source code used by programmers | |
| SVG | Saves as SVG | |
| PNG | Saves as a 64px sized PNG | |
| PNG set | Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs | |
| BEOS:ICON attribute | Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly | |
| META:ICON attribute | Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data |
+
+Tips & Tricks
+A few things you should keep in mind when working with Icon-O-Matic and some general tips for its usage:
+-
+
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, shadows and the Haiku color palette.
+You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
+Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
+Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
+There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag & drop or copy & paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
+If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
+You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click & drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click & drag while holding SPACE.
+
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Installer
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Installer | |
| Impostazions: | none |
The Installer is used to copy Haiku onto another volume.
+Upon launch it displays a start window with important information. It's not a mindless EULA you're used to click away in the blink of an eye, it states:
-
+
This is beta-quality software. Make backups or suffer the consequences!
+The Installer needs a prepared partition. You can use DriveSetup to create and format a partition, but cannot yet resize existing partitions. For that you'll have to use a GParted LiveCD or a similar tool for now.
+- Haiku can be added manually to the bootmanager GRUB. How that is done exactly is available as an online guide. +
Once you acknowledged with , you're presented with the main window:
+
+In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.
+The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.
Clicking the little expander widget will Show optional packages, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.
+You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on to open DriveSetup and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.
+starts the installation procedure, which basically copies the /home/ and /system/ folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.
+ +
+Tools
+At the end of the installation procedure, the partition is automatically made bootable. However, it can happen that some other operating system or partitioning tool (accidentally) overwrites the boot sector of your Haiku volume. In this case, boot your installation CD and start the Installer. Select your Haiku boot partition from the menu and select from the menu to make it bootable again.
+The other item in the menu is used to that puts a menu in the boot sector to choose what operating system to boot. See topic BootManager for more information.
+ You don't need to run the BootManager if you already use a bootmanager like GRUB, in which case you have to add Haiku manually (see above), or Haiku runs exclusively on your machine.
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
List of all commandline applications
+| Posizion: | /boot/system/bin/ ~/config/bin/ ~/config/non-packaged/bin/ |
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in /boot/system/bin/. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps will appear in ~/config/bin/ when installed from a .hpkg package. Otherwise you can put them into ~/config/non-packaged/bin/. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
+Here's a list of all commandline applications that are shipped with Haiku. Each with only a short description of what it does, for more detailed information on its usage execute the command with the parameter --help.
Index: A – E :: F – J :: K – O :: P – S :: T – Z
+| CortexAddOnHost | Starts service to monitor audio and video media add-ons in use. | |
| FirstBootPrompt | Language and keymap setup. | |
| [ | Returns true/false after comparing items. | |
| ||
| addattr | Writes an attribute to a file, taking the type into account and converting the values accordingly. (Haiku specific) | |
| alert | Shows a message box. (Haiku specific) | |
| arp | Manipulates the system ARP cache. | |
| awk | See gawk. | |
| base64 | Base64 encode or decode to standard output. | |
| basename | Strips directory and optionally suffix from a /path/to/filename string. | |
| bash | Bourne-again shell. | |
| bc | An arbitrary precision calculator language. | |
| beep | Rings a bell. | |
| bunzip2 | See bzip2. | |
| bzip2 | File compressor. | |
| c++ | C++-Compiler. | |
| cat | Concatenates files and prints to standard output. | |
| catattr | Prints out the contents of an attribute of a file. (Haiku specific) | |
| cc | C-Compiler. | |
| checkfs | Checks and repairs the file system. (Haiku specific) | |
| checkitout | Checks out sources simply with their repository's URL. | |
| chgrp | Changes group ownership of files. | |
| chmod | Changes permissions of files. | |
| chop | Splits a file into smaller files. | |
| chown | Changes the owner of files. | |
| chroot | Runs a command within a specified root directory. | |
| cksum | Prints out CRC checksum and byte count of files. | |
| clear | Clears the terminal window. | |
| cmp | Compares files byte by byte. | |
| collectcatkeys | [Leftover from the move of locale-kit.] | |
| comm | Compares sorted files line by line. | |
| consoled | Console daemon. | |
| copyattr | Copies all or a subset of attributes from one or more files to another or new file. (Haiku specific) | |
| cp | Copies files and directories. | |
| csplit | Split a file into pieces separated by a specified pattern. | |
| ctags | Generates an index file for a variety of language objects found in files. | |
| cut | Prints out sections from each line of a file. | |
| date | Displays or sets the current time and date. | |
| dc | Desk calculator language. | |
| dd | Copies raw data, converting and formatting according operands. | |
| desklink | Installs items in Deskbar. (Haiku specific) | |
| diskimage | Registers a file as disk device that can then be mounted. (Haiku specific) | |
| df | Reports free and used space of mounted volumes. | |
| diff | Compares files line by line. | |
| diff3 | Compares three files line by line. | |
| dircolors | Color setup for ls. | |
| dirname | Strips the filename from a /path/to/filename string. | |
| draggers | Shows/sets the dragger state of Replicants. | |
| driveinfo | Shows hardware information. | |
| dstcheck | Shows a message box used when switching to/from daylight saving time. | |
| du | Summarizes disk usage of each file, recursively for directories. | |
| dumpcatalog | [Leftover from the move of locale-kit.] | |
| echo | Displays a line of text. | |
| egrep | See grep. | |
| eject | Ejects removable media. | |
| env | Runs a program in a modified environment. | |
| error | Prints clear text error messages for given error numbers. | |
| expand | Converts tabs to spaces. | |
| expr | Prints the value of an expression. | |
F | ||
| factor | Prints the prime factors of integer numbers. | |
| false | Does nothing, indicates "unsuccessful" and returns the value "1". | |
| fdinfo | Shows info about the used file descriptors in the system. | |
| ffm | Sets focus follows mouse. | |
| fgrep | See grep. | |
| filepanel | Displays a load/save file panel. (Haiku specific) | |
| find | Searches for files in a directory hierarchy. | |
| finddir | Finds special directories defined by the system. | |
| fmt | Reformats the paragraphs of a file. | |
| fold | Wraps input lines of a file. | |
| fortune | Prints a random, hopefully interesting, adage. | |
| freetype-config | Shows FreeType compilation and linking information. | |
| fstrim | Send a TRIM command to an SSD drive. | |
| ftp | File transfer program. | |
| ftpd | FTP daemon. | |
| funzip | Extracts the first item of an archive to standard output. | |
| fwcontrol | FireWire control program. | |
| gawk | Pattern scanning and processing language. | |
| getarch | Shows the environment's compiler version. | |
| grep | Search for a pattern. | |
| groups | Prints group memberships for each username. | |
| gunzip | See gzip. | |
| gzexe | De/Compresses executables. | |
| gzip | De/Compresses files. | |
| hd | Hexdump. | |
| head | Prints the first lines of a file. | |
| hey | A small tool for scripting GUI apps. | |
| hostname | Prints or sets the hostname of the system. | |
| id | Prints user and group information. | |
| ifconfig | Configures a network interface. | |
| install | Copies files to a destination without disrupting the running system. | |
| install-wifi-firmwares.sh | Installs firmware for various wireless network cards. | |
| installsound | Installs a new sound event in the Sounds preferences panel. | |
| iroster | Lists input devices. | |
| isvolume | Gets information about a mounted volume. | |
| join | For each pair of input lines with identical join fields, write a line to standard output. | |
| ||
| kernel_debugger | Enters the kernel debugger. | |
| keymap | Loads or saves a keymap. | |
| kill | Sends a signal to quit a process. | |
| launch_roster | Controls the launch_daemon, e.g. stop and restart services. (Haiku specific) | |
| less | Views a file. | |
| lessecho | Echos its arguments and expands metacharacters, such as * and ? in filenames. | |
| lesskey | Specifies key binding for less. | |
| link | Creates a link to a file. | |
| linkcatkeys | [Leftover from the move of locale-kit.] | |
| listarea | Lists area info for all currently running teams. | |
| listattr | Lists the attributes of a file. (Haiku specific) | |
| listdev | Lists all hardware devices. | |
| listimage | Lists image info for all currently running teams. | |
| listport | Lists all open ports in the system organized by team. | |
| listres | Lists resources of files. | |
| listsem | Lists the semaphores allocated by the specified team. | |
| listusb | Lists USB devices. | |
| ln | Creates a link to a file. | |
| locale | Shows the set preferred language, its LC_CTYPE and the preferred formatting. | |
| locate | Locates a file. | |
| logger | Sends a message to the system log. | |
| login | Starts a session on the system. | |
| logname | Prints the name of the current user. | |
| ls | Lists directory content. | |
| lsindex | Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition. (Haiku specific) | |
| mail2mbox | Converts BeOS e-mail files to Unix mailbox files. | |
| make | GNU make utility. | |
| makebootable | Makes the specified BFS partitions/devices bootable by writing boot code into the first two sectors. | |
| mbox2mail | Converts Unix mailbox files to BeOS e-mail files. | |
| md5sum | Prints or checks MD5 checksums. | |
| media_client | "media_client play" plays back audio files. | |
| message | Prints a flattened BMessage file. | |
| mimeset | Sets MIME type of a file. | |
| mkdepend | Makefile dependency generator. | |
| mkdir | Creates a directory. | |
| mkdos | Initializes FAT partitions. | |
| mkfifo | Creates named pipes. | |
| mkfs | Creates a file system. | |
| mkindex | Creates a new index for an attribute. (Haiku specific) | |
| mktemp | Safely creates a temporary file or directory. | |
| modifiers | Prints currently (un)pressed modifier keys. | |
| more | See less. | |
| mount | Mounts a file system. | |
| mount_nfs | Mounts a NFS partition. | |
| mountvolume | Mounts a volume by name. | |
| mv | Moves/renames a file. | |
| nano | The default text editor in the Terminal, a clone of 'Pico'. | |
| netstat | Prints network connections, routing tables, interface statistics, masquerade connections and multicast memberships. | |
| nl | Prints each file with line numbers added. | |
| nohup | Runs a command ignoring hangup signals. | |
| nproc | Prints the number of available processing units. | |
| od | Writes an unambiguous representation of a file. | |
| open | Launches an application/document from the shell. (Haiku specific) | |
| ||
| package | Creates, inspects, or extracts a Haiku package. | |
| package_repo | Creates or inspects a Haiku package repository file. | |
| passwd | Changes the user password. | |
| paste | Prints lines consisting of the sequentially corresponding lines from each file, separated by tabs. | |
| patch | Applies a diff file to an original. | |
| pathchk | Diagnoses invalid or unportable file names. | |
| pc | Programmer's calculator. | |
| ping | Sends ICMP-echo-request to network host. | |
| pkg-config | Analyzes and configures a Haiku package. | |
| pkgman | Manages packages and package repositories. | |
| play | Plays tracks from CD. | |
| pr | Paginates or columnates files for printing. | |
| printenv | Prints the value of an environment variable. | |
| printf | Formats and prints data. | |
| prio | Changes priority of a process. | |
| profile | Profiles threads. | |
| ps | Lists running processes. | |
| ptx | Outputs a permuted index, including context, of the words in the input files. | |
| pwd | Prints current directory. | |
| query | A shell utility emulating Tracker's "Find by formula" functionality. (Haiku specific) | |
| quit | Quits an application. | |
| ramdisk | Creates a ramdisk. (Haiku specific) | |
| rc | Resource compiler. | |
| readlink | Prints the path to the destination of a symbolic link. | |
| reindex | Puts attributes of existing files into newly created indexes. (Haiku specific) | |
| release | Releases a semaphore. | |
| renice | Alters the priority of a running process. | |
| rm | Removes files and directories. | |
| rmattr | Removes an attribute from a file. (Haiku specific) | |
| rmdir | Removes directories. | |
| rmindex | Removes the index for an attribute. (Haiku specific) | |
| roster | Prints information about running teams. | |
| route | Lists and manipulates network routes. | |
| safemode | Checks if the system is running in safemode. | |
| screen_blanker | Starts the screen blanker. | |
| screenmode | Show/sets the screen mode. | |
| sdiff | Shows or merges differences of two files side-by-side. | |
| seq | Prints a sequence of numbers. | |
| setarch | Sets the environment to a specific compiler version. | |
| setdecor | Shows/sets the decorator. | |
| settype | Sets the MIME type, signature and preferred application of a file. | |
| setversion | Shows the version of a file. | |
| setvolume | Sets the system sound volume. | |
| sh | See bash. | |
| sha1sum | Prints or checks SHA1 checksums. | |
| shar | Creates shell archives. | |
| shred | Overwrites a file repeatedly. | |
| shuf | Prints a random permutation of the input lines. | |
| shutdown | Shuts down the computer. | |
| sleep | Pauses for a specified number of seconds. | |
| sort | Prints a sorted concatenation of all files. | |
| spamdbm | Classifies e-mail messages as spam or genuine. | |
| split | Outputs fixed-size pieces of input files to files with prefixes. | |
| stat | Displays file or file system status. | |
| strace | Traces the syscalls of a thread or a team. | |
| stty | Shows/sets terminal characteristics. | |
| su | Changes the effective user id and group. | |
| sum | Prints checksum and block counts for each file. | |
| sync | Forces changed blocks to disk, updates the superblock. | |
| sysinfo | Shows system info. | |
| ||
| tac | Concatenates and prints files, last line first. | |
| tail | Prints the last ten lines of a file. | |
| tcpdump | Dumps traffic of a network. | |
| tcptester | [deprecated] | |
| tee | Writes or appends data from standard input to a file. | |
| telnet | User interface to the telnet protocol. | |
| telnetd | Telnet daemon. | |
| test | Returns true/false after comparing items. | |
| timeout | Starts a command and kills it if it's still running after a specified number of seconds. | |
| top | Displays running threads and CPU usage. | |
| touch | Changes a file's timestamp. | |
| tput | Initializes a terminal or query terminfo database. | |
| tr | Translates, squeezes and/or deletes characters from standard input. | |
| traceroute | Prints the route packets take through a network. | |
| translate | Uses DataTranslators to convert file formats. | |
| trash | Sends files to trash or restores them. | |
| true | Does nothing, indicates "success" and returns the value "0". | |
| truncate | Shrinks or extends the size of a file. | |
| tsort | Does a topological sorting. | |
| tty | Prints the file name of the terminal connected to standard input. | |
| uname | Prints out system information. | |
| unchop | Recreates a file previously split with chop. | |
| unexpand | Converts spaces to tabs. | |
| uniq | Filters adjacent matching lines from input, writing to output. | |
| unlink | Calls the unlink function to remove the specified file. | |
| unmount | Unmounts a volume. | |
| unrar | Expands a rar archive. | |
| unshar | Expands a shar archive. | |
| untrash | See trash. | |
| unzip | Expands a zip archive. | |
| unzipsfx | Used to make existing zip archives self-extracting. | |
| updatedb | Updates a localization database. | |
| uptime | Prints date and time, as well as the time elapsed since the system was started. | |
| urlwrapper | Wraps URL MIME types around command line or other apps that don't handle them directly. | |
| useradd | Creates a new user. | |
| uudecode | Decodes a uuencoded file. | |
| uuencode | Uuencodes a file so it can be mailed to a remote system. | |
| vdir | Lists information about files. | |
| version | Returns the version of a file. | |
| vmstat | Prints information about the virtual memory system. | |
| waitfor | Waits until a certain thread appears. (Haiku specific) | |
| watch | Executes a program periodically. | |
| wc | Prints the number of paragraphs, words and characters (bytes) of a file. | |
| wget | Tool for downloading via HTTP, HTTPS or FTP. | |
| which | Locates a command. | |
| whoami | Prints user name associated with the current effective user ID. | |
| xargs | Builds and executes command lines from standard input. | |
| xres | Lists and manipulates resources. | |
| yes | Prints out a string repeatedly until killed. | |
| zcat | See gzip. | |
| zcmp | See zdiff. | |
| zdiff | Compares compressed files. | |
| zforce | Forces a '.gz' extension on gzip files. | |
| zgrep | Scan through possibly compressed files for a regular expression. | |
| zip | Adds or replaces items in a zip archive. | |
| zipcloak | Encrypts all unencrypted items in a zip archive. | |
| zipgrep | Scans the given zip items for a string or pattern. | |
| zipinfo | See unzip. | |
| zipnote | Prints the comments in a zip archive. | |
| zipsplit | Splits a zip archive into smaller pieces. | |
| zmore | Like more but operates on the uncompressed contents of any compressed file. | |
| znew | Recompresses .Z files into .gz (gzip) archives. | |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Magnify
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Magnify | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Magnify_prefs |
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
+At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "64 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 64x32 pixel rectangle around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
+Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
+You can move the red outline with ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALT H. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
+They can also be moved with ← / → / ↑ / ↓. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with ALT ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+Clicking on the pop-up menu or right-clicking into the pixel grid gives you a number of options:
+| ALT S | Saves the current display as a PNG image. | ||
| ALT C | Copies the current display to the clipboard. | ||
| ALT T | Shows additional information. | ||
| ALT H | Adds a crosshair you can drag around. | ||
| ALT SHIFT H | Removes the last added crosshair. | ||
| ALT G | Shows a grid overlay. | ||
| ALT F | Stops updating the magnification area. | ||
| ALT I | Keeps updating the magnification area, but doesn't follow the mouse pointer any more. | ||
| ALT / | Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window. | ||
| ALT - | Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer. | ||
| ALT + | Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer. | ||
| ALT , | Lowers magnification. | ||
| ALT . | Increases magnification. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
| Reading messages + Creating new messages + Preferences |
Mail
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Mail | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Mail/ +~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links/ - Objects put here appear in the mailbox' context menu +~/config/settings/Mail/signatures/ - Location to store signatures +~/config/settings/Mail/status/ - Location to store custom statuses |
Mail is Haiku's default viewer and editor of emails. It has nothing to do with the actual fetching and sending of mails, which is done by the mail_daemon and can be configured via the E-mail preferences.
+This page is a general overview of the application Mail. For more information how email in Haiku works, refer to the Workshop on managing email.
+
+
+Reading messages
+You double-click an email file to open it in Mail. The interface is quite simple:
+
+A menu and optional tool bar on top, with an area of the interesting attributes of a mail (to, from, subject, date) below that, and then the actual body of the mail. If the mail appears with strange characters or empty, try to change the from the pop-up menu.
+If there are files attached to an email, they are listed at the end of the message. A right-click on one opens a context menu to or . You can also drag & drop directly to the Desktop or another Tracker window.
+Most of the menu and tool bar items are pretty self-explaining, so we'll concentrate just on the highlights.
+
+File
+When you close the window of a new mail, its status is normally switched from "New" to "Read". But you can set other statuses as well, by choosing from the submenu. There you'll also find the option to create your own custom statuses, which are saved under ~/config/settings/Mail/status/.
+
+Edit
+Here you'll find an item to open Mail's (see below) and a shortcut to manage your , which will open the E-mail preference panel.
+
+View
+You'll only seldomly need these two items, if at all:
+| ALT H | Shows the complete header of a mail, in case you need to track down the path of your mail, for example. | ||
| Displays a mail in its raw state, i.e. with all its control characters and without Mail's coloring of quotes or URLs, for example.. |
+Message
+The different options to reply to a mail may need a bit of explanation.
+| ALT R | The standard reply to the server that has sent the mail to you. NOTE: In case of a mailing list post, this normally replies back to the mailing list, not just the person that wrote the post! | ||
| OPT ALT R | This on the other hand, sends directly and only to the person listed in the "From" attribute. | ||
| SHIFT ALT R | Replies to the original sender plus all other (cc'ed) recipients of the original mail. |
The items to , and are again pretty self-explaining.
+When you've opened an email from a Tracker or query result window, and will move to the previous/next email in the list.
+collects all email addresses from the header and the actual email body in a submenu. Choosing an address will open the People application in order to complete and save the contact information.
+
+Queries
+This menu holds queries that show all mails related to the currently open mail. Selecting , or opens a query that lists all corresponding mails:
+
+
+
+
+Creating new messages
+A new email is created by invoking the menu or the corresponding icon from the tool bar of an open email. Or you just start the Mail application or choose from the context menu of the mailbox icon in the Deskbar.
+
+The window is pretty similar to the one when reading mails. The menu and tool bar items are slightly different and the text boxes have to be filled with the recipient's email address, subject and so on, of course.
+ is short for the anachronistic term "carbon copy" and results in copies of your mail being sent to the listed people. The difference to just listing a buch of addresses in the "To" field is, that you don't directly address the cc'ed people, thereby signaling that you probably don't expect an answer of them.
+ means "blind carbon copy" which does practically the same as "Cc", but hides the recipients from each other.
You can enter several recipients by separating their addresses with a comma. +, , and are pop-up menus. They contain all email addresses on your system found by a query for People files. Their "Group" attribute will sort them in corresponding submenus.
+Again, we'll focus on the more interesting features in the menus.
+
+File
+With you can store your work so far and come back to it later. To load it again, choose it from the submenu that will list the result of a query for all mails with the status "Draft".
+
+Edit
+and or their respective shortcuts ALT / - are used to add/remove a level of quoting by adjusting the number of ">" symbols in front of quoted lines. Just select some text in all the lines you want un/quoted and invoke the menu item.
+ +
+
+currently only offers corrections of English texts by marking wrong or unknown words red and showing them in italic. +Right-clicking such a word opens a context menu offering suggestions to correct the word or to it to the accepted vocabulary.
+Then, there are again the items to open Mail's (see below) and a shortcut to managing your , which will open the E-mail preference panel.
+
+Message
+With you can add predefined texts to the end of your mail. From its submenu you can choose a specific or one.
+ +
+
+You create new or edit existing signatures with , which will open a window where you enter the text itself and the title of your new sig. There, in the menu, you find items to a specific signature or or the currently loaded one, Signatures should be saved in ~/config/settings/Mail/signatures.
+Use and to add/remove files as attachments. You can also drag & drop files from a Tracker window. Be careful though to drop those in the header section (To/From/Subject area at the top) or they'll get pasted into the email body if they are text files.
+ +
+
+File attachments are listed below the header section. You can remove a file by invoking a context menu or by selecting it and pressing DEL.
+ +
+Queries
+This doesn't work yet, but is intended to hold queries that would show all mail related to the currently open mail, like all to the same recipient or same subject/thread.
+ +
+
+Preferences
+
+Mail's preferences come in two parts:
+
+User interface
+| Options to show labels under the icons or hide the tool bar completely. | ||
| Sets the type of font used for the email text. | ||
| Sets the font size. | ||
| Colors different levels of quotation. | ||
| Turns the spell checker on/off on startup. | ||
| If you close an email with the Status "New", you can have it automatically marked as "Read". |
+Mailing
+| If you have several email accounts, this specifies which to use by default when creating a new message. | ||
| When you reply to a mail, you can either always set in the pop-up menu above, or use the , which will send the mail from the same account that received the original message. | ||
This is inserted before the quoted text in your reply. You can use various variables from the pop-up menu next to the text field. Example: "Hello %n!\n\nOn %d you wrote:\n" produces this:
+Hello Dr. Hawking! + +On Mon, 18 Jan 1998 02:55:16 +0800 you wrote: +> so thanks again for the inspiration concerning the cosmological constant. +> ...and the rest of the quoted text following... | ||
| Adds a signature automatically to the end of the mail. | ||
| Sets the default encoding. | ||
| If your mail contains characters that can't be encoded with the currently set encoding method, you can turn on being warned about that. That gives you the opportunity to change the encoding before sending. Otherwise unencodable characters are replaced by rectangle symbols. | ||
| Inserts line-breaks every 76 characters which makes mails easier to read. | ||
| You can choose to send BFS' attributes of a file alongside the attachments. This is nice for other Haiku users, as they'll get a "complete" file (think artist, album, title attributes of MP3 files), but may cause confusion (or even suspicion) with others, who will wonder what the additional "BeOS Attributes" attachment might be... +Should you opt not to send attributes with your attachments, remember zip up your files before you send them or you'll strip away BFS attributes. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
MediaPlayer
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/MediaPlayer | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/MediaPlayer |
MediaPlayer is the default player for all audio and video files. Thanks to it's ffmpeg backend, a plethora of widely used formats are supported. Its simple interface has all the controls you'd expect:
+
+The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.
+Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.
Audio and video playback
+Since there aren't any specific features for for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.
+
+Available to all media is the (ALT I). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.
+Most of the often used commands from the menus are also available from a right-click context menu on the video area. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+Under you'll find options to zoom the window to various levels or force the aspect ratio to some standard values. Leaving the aspect ration to the default should work best for correctly encoded files.
MediaPlayer supports subtitles in SRT format. To have them show up under , their filenames have to be identical to their video file, with a suffixed language name and ".srt" instead of the video's extension. For example:
+MyMovie.avi +MyMovie.Deutsch.srt +MyMovie.English.srt +MyMovie.Français.srt+
Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the submenu. The submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.
+You can toggle the mode (ALT ENTER or F or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with (ALT H or a double right-click) or have it's window (ALT A).
+ +Playlists
+(ALT P) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.
+
+You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the menu you can or (DEL) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with (ALT T).
+Of course, you can a playlist and later it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.
+ +Settings
+There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:
+
+The first batch, , is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
+Next are different .
+You can opt to , which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.
+You can (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode.
+ if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.
+Then there are settings for and . They can be shown at the , which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or , which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at , at less confusing or quietly .
+ +Keyboard controls
+MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.
+| Z | Skip to previous track | |
| X | Play | |
| C | Pause | |
| V | Stop | |
| B | Skip to next track |
These keys are assigned to the functions of the control buttons. They are always the bottom left letter keys on the keyboard, i.e. they are used independently of your current keymapping. The above keys correspond to a standard US-american keymap.
+| ← / → | Seek backwards/forwards | |
| SHIFT ← / → | Jump backwards/forwards 10 seconds | |
| ALT ← / → | Jump backwards/forwards 30 seconds | |
| ↓ / ↑ | Decrease/Increase volume | |
| ALT ↓ / ↑ | Skip to next/previous Track | |
| Spacebar | Toggle play/pause | |
| ALT ENTER | Toggle full-screen mode (also done by double left-clicking the video area or pressing F or TAB) | |
| ALT SHIFT 0 / 1 / 2 / 3 | Changes aspect ratio to (how the video was encoded), (maps the pixels of the video 1:1 to the screen), , |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
MidiPlayer
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/MidiPlayer | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/MidiPlayerSettings |
As the name suggests, MidiPlayer is used to playback MIDI music files. MIDI files are special, as they don't contain the actual digitized and in some way encoded music, but only a description of it: Hold this note for that long with this volume and use instrument X for it.
+While this keeps file sizes pretty small, it also follows that depending on the instrument library (the so-called "SoundFont") the results can differ hugely. Also, these SoundFonts tend to be quite large, increasingly so with the number and quality of the instrument samples.
Haiku releases include a small but relatively high quality SoundFont. People who use MIDI more seriously often already have very high quality or custom SoundFonts.
+To use other SoundFonts (that don't come installable via HaikuDepot as a HPKG), just copy the .sf file to e.g. ~/config/non-packaged/data/synth/. You can select the active SoundFont in the Media preferences under .
+MidiPlayer's interface is very simple. Just double-click or drag & drop a midi file and playback starts. You control the volume with the slider and add reverb effects from the pop-up menu. Activating the scope will show a visualization in form of an oscilloscope running at the top.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
LegacyPackageInstaller
+| Deskbar: | No entry, normally launched via +double-clicking a supported file. | |
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/LegacyPackageInstaller | |
| Impostazions: | none |
LegacyPackageInstaller is an installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. It provides an easy-to-use GUI that helps in fast package installation in Haiku.
+It is being executed automatically when you try to open files with .pkg extension.
+
+The main window gives access to two configurations:
+-
+
- type of installation (depending on the developer there might be more than one (standard) installation option). +
- Installation location (only entire partitions/hard disks can be chosen, not custom paths) +
After clicking Install the extraction and installation process will begin.
+
+At this point warnings and errors can appear saying which libraries and dependencies are missing in order to run the program. It might be required to install these packages before attempting to install desired program.
+When the installation is complete, package should appear in the Deskbar applications menu.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Pe
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Pe/Pe | |
| Documentazion: | /boot/system/apps/Pe/Documentation/index.html | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/pe/* |
Pe is a sophisticated editor, with its syntax highlighting targeted mainly at programmers and HTML writers. Originally created by Maarten Hekkelmann, it's been open sourced and maintained by Haiku developers. A bugtracker and more information is available at the Pe project page.
+Find out more about Pe's features in its local documentation.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
People
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/People | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/People_data |
People is a simple contact database using the attributes of Haiku's filesystem to store addresses and other contact information. Every contact is saved as one Person file with its data in separate attributes. All are indexed and therefore searchable with a query.
+ +
+
+The Group attribute at the bottom allows assigning a person to one or more groups. Useful for "mass mailing" a number of people who, for example, work on a specific project. The pop-up menu offers all currently existing groups. If a person belongs to more than one group, the group names are delimited with a ",".
+ +These Person files are usually all saved in /boot/home/people/. To get a list of all your contacts, just open your people folder and display all attributes of interest. If you choose to organize your Person files in different folders, just use a query to display them all in one window.
+ +
+
+You can treat these files like any other: You can sort according to attributes (even a second sorting order by holding SHIFT while clicking) and of course delete, duplicate or rename Person files. Even the contact information can be edited directly: Clicking on an attribute (or ALT E) to edit works just like renaming a file. Once you're in edit mode, TAB and SHIFT TAB will jump from column to column.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
PoorMan
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/PoorMan | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/PoorMan Settings |
PoorMan is a nice little webserver that's extremely easy to set up. Naturally it doesn't offer any advanced features like other heavy duty server software, it's after all only a poor man's webserver.
+Upon its first launch, PoorMan asks for the folder that is about to be served to the web. If you go with the , a new folder /boot/home/public_html is created for you. As a start page a HTML file named by default index.html has to be present there.
+PoorMan presents itself with a simple console that logs its activity. Then, there's status information if the server is running, which folder is being served, and a hit counter. Settings are changed with : +
+
The settings panel is divided into three tabs:
+In you can select another folder to serve, enter another start page and have the option to send a file listing if the start page isn't present.
+ lets you de/activate logging to the console or optionally to a separate logfile.
+The tab holds the setting for the maximum simultaneous connections.
The menu items of the console window are all self-explanatory. With them you can e.g. save (parts) of the console output, clear the console or logging file and start/stop the server or clear the hit counter.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Screenshot
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Screenshot +/bin/screenshot | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/screenshot |
Screenshots are taken by either starting the Screenshot application or by pressing the PRINT key,
+
In the Screenshot panel you can toggle between taking the whole screen or just the active window and decide if the window border and mouse pointer should be included. You can also enter a delay before a screenshot is taken.
+Below that you set the name, format and location for the screenshot that will be used when you click . Instead of saving the file to disk you can also decide to to be able to paste the shot directly into another application, or take a .
+All settings are remembered the next time you take a screenshot, enabling these convenient keyboard shortcuts:
+| Takes a screenshot with zero delay and launches the Screenshot panel. | ||
| SHIFT PRINT | Takes a screenshot silently (without opening the panel), while still respecting the last used settings. | |
| CTRL PRINT | Also takes a screenshot silently with the saved settings, but instead of saving it as a file, it's just copied to the clipboard. |
+
+Taking a screenshot from Terminal
+There's a special screenshot application to be used from Terminal or a script.
+screenshot --help shows the familiar options as parameters:
~> screenshot --help + +screenshot [OPTIONS] [FILE] Creates a bitmap of the current screen + +FILE is the optional output path / filename used in silent mode. An exisiting +file with the same name will be overwritten without warning. If FILE is not +given the screenshot will be saved to a file with the default filename in the +user's home directory. + +OPTIONS + -m, --mouse-pointer Include the mouse pointer + -b, --border Include the window border + -w, --window Capture the active window instead of the entire screen + -d, --delay=seconds Take screenshot after the specified delay [in seconds] + -s, --silent Saves the screenshot without showing the application + window + -f, --format=image Give the image format you like to save as + [bmp], [gif], [jpg], [png], [ppm], [tga], [tif] + -c, --clipboard Copies the screenshot to the system clipboard without + showing the application window + +Note: OPTION -b, --border takes only effect when used with -w, --window ++ +
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
ShowImage
+| Deskbar: | No entry, normally launched via +double-clicking a supported file. | |
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/ShowImage | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings |
ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through DataTranslators. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebP images became available, for example.
+ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.
Viewing
+
+The menu offers to start a of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a from 2 to 20 seconds.
+Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):
+ shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.
+ shrinks the image back into the window frame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.
+ and move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.
Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:
+ applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.
+ will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.
Then there's a mode with an option to which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.
+Lastly, will show/hide the graphical controls:
+
+From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out.
+Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+Browsing
+
+After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
+There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
+Looking at the menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like and let you navigate those pages.
+Editing
+
+The menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.
+will open the Backgrounds preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.
+Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to from the menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding CTRL while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.
+ or ESC will remove the selection box.
The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.
+Saving and converting
+To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal item from the menu, select the format and choose a file name.
+Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.
+This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
+To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
+Keyboard shortcuts
+Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:
+| ← / ↑ | Previous image | |
| → / ↓ | Next image | |
| DEL | Move to Trash | |
| + | Zoom in | |
| - | Zoom out | |
| 0 | Original size (100% zoom) | |
| 1 | Fit to window | |
| ALT ENTER | Toggle full screen mode (also via doubleclick) | |
| CTRL | While holding CTRL you can create a selection frame without explicitly switching to selection mode. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
SoftwareUpdater
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/SoftwareUpdater | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/SoftwareUpdater_settings |
SoftwareUpdater checks all active repositories (see the Repositories preferences) for updates to the installed packages, including system updates to Haiku itself. It downloads and installs the available updates in one go.
+
+After launching, SoftwareUpdater checks for updates to packages and displays them in a list with their new version and a short description. You can opt to to include the name of the repository for each package and show both the old and new package versions.
+will start the download of all the packages and their subsequent installation.
+Depending on the packages that were updated, you may have to reboot Haiku to actually complete the update process. Updated applications usually only need to be restarted, while changes to Haiku itself may require a reboot of the system to take effect.
+-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
SoundRecorder
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/SoundRecorder | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/??? |
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
StyledEdit
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/StyledEdit | |
| Impostazions: | none |
StyledEdit is Haiku's simple text editor. Although it saves files in plain text format, additional attributes are written in order to have limited formatting capabilities when viewed with StyledEdit.
+
+If you're interested, this is what those additional attributes look like when examined in Terminal with listattr:
+~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt +File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt + Type Size Name +----------- --------- ------------------------------- + Int-32 4 "be:encoding" +MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE" + Int-32 4 "wrap" + Int-32 4 "alignment" + Raw Data 1048 "styles" + +1071 bytes total in attributes.+
As you can see, all the formatting options from StyledEdit's menu are present: line wrapping (on/off) and alignment (left/center/right), each in one attribute. Styles (font, size, color) of each letter mangled into another.
+In any case, it's a nice idea having the possibility of colored text in different fonts and sizes while still being a normal text file. A ReadMe.txt, for example, is therefore readable in a shell on any platform and still has a bit of style when viewed via double-click from Haiku.
+Actually using StyledEdit is so simple, we'll skip explaining every mundane menu item. Just write down your text then select the words you'd like to format and apply font, size and color from the menu. Line wrapping and alignment from the menu only work on the whole file.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Terminal
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Terminal | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Terminal +~/config/settings/profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/settings/etc/profile +~/config/settings/inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc |
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
+Please refer to the topic on Scripting for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell and also have a look at Haiku's commandline applications. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.
+ +
+
+Windows and tabs
+You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALT N from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with ALT T.
+
++
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
+By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
+Via the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to , or, like double-clicking, .
+A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the menu. ALT ENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
+All the settings you change directly through the menu, like , , or are only kept for the current session. If you want to make permanent changes, you have to apply them in the panel.
+ +
+Settings
+opens a panel to configure the standard settings of a Terminal.
+
++
Most of the offered settings speak for themselves.
+Hover your mouse over the "formulas" for naming tab and window titles to get tooltips for the available variables.
+You can choose pre-defined color schema like or or create a one by selecting which color you want to change (, , etc.) and then use the color picker below.
A few more options follow: you can have a and choose to . The latter setting avoids the sometimes rather unsightly rendering of bold fonts in the Terminal.
+Activate the checkbox to and you'll be warned when trying to close a Terminal window while an app is still being executed.
| let's you save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you opened the settings panel. | ||
| al puarte dut ai valôrs predefinîts. |
+
+Keyboard shortcuts
+You'll find a list of useful shortcuts in Shortcuts and key combinations.
+Another nice feature that is more a key & mouse combination: When holding ALT a path or URL under the mouse pointer gets highlighted. A left-click opens the file/folder or website. A right-click opens a context menu to either or . Imagine you're in /MyData/source/haiku/ and have the path generated/objects/haiku/x86_gcc2/release/apps/stylededit/StyledEdit under the mouse pointer, the latter menu item will result in the combined, absolute path <deep breath>:
/MyData/source/haiku/generated/objects/haiku/x86_gcc2/release/apps/stylededit/StyledEdit.
If you hold down ALT SHIFT, only the path from beginning to where your mouse pointer sits will be highlighted.
+By the way, right-clicking into the Terminal window will insert the clipboard. In combination with copying parts of highlighted paths, this can be used for speedy navigation of deep folder hierarchies.
+ +
+
+Bash customization
+Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: profile and inputrc
+Both files can be created in the /boot/home/config/settings/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/settings/etc/.
profile
+The profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
+The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
+-
+
- Customize your Terminal prompt +
- More prompt customizations +
- Enhancing bash +
- Custom keyboard shortcuts +
There are more, have a look.
+ +inputrc
+The inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
+ +
+
+Hints for working with the Terminal
+Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:
++
Inserts the location of the file, same as drag & dropping with the left mouse button. Changes to the folder of the dragged file. Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal. Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal. Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+You can open any file with its preferred application with the command open [filename]. This also works with the representation of the current (".") and parent ("..") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:
+open .
+
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
TextSearch
+| Deskbar: | No entry, normally launched via Tracker Add-on | |
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/TextSearch | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/TextSearch |
TextSearch looks for a string in text files. Typically it is invoked from Tracker's Add-on context menu on the selection of files or folders you want to search.
+ +
+
+You enter a search string in the text box on top and hit RETURN or click to start. If is checked, the hits are automatically expanded to show the lines of the file containing the search string.
+ +Only a few words on some of the otherwise self-explaining menu items:
+File menu | ||||
| ALT N | Opens a new window where you can enter another string and search through the same files/folders. + | |||
| ALT F | Lets you choose a new set of files and folders to search through. | |||
Action menu | ||||
| ALT T | Removes all entries from the list that are not currently selected. | |||
| ALT O | Opens the currently selected files with their preferred application (same as a double-click). If it's a text editor supporting it (like Pe), you can jump to the exact line the search string was found. | |||
| ALT K | Opens the location of the currently selected files in Tracker. | |||
| ALT B | Copies the current selection to the clipboard. | |||
Settings menu | ||||
| This is useful when working in a "unixy" environment, where often administrative files are hidden inside ".folders/". Source versioning systems like SVN and CVS are examples of applications using this and are also widely used in Haiku. | ||||
| TextSearch uses the command line tool grep. For it, special characters like '"*\$?! and spaces have to be escaped with a \. Deactivating this setting means you have to do this yourself, but in exchange grants you the power of regular expressions. | ||||
| TextSearch is currently only useful for finding strings in plain text files. Deactivating this setting will have it look through any kind of file anyway. | ||||
History menu | ||||
| Contains recently used search strings. | ||||
Encoding menu | ||||
| Lets you choose different character encodings if needed. | ||||
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
TV
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/TV | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/??? |
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
|
+ Keyboard shortcuts + Built-in commands |
Vision
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Vision/Vision | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Vision/* |
Vision is an IRC client originally developed for the BeOS. More documentation and a bug tracker are available at the Vision homepage.
++The most frequented channel is the English speaking #haiku at irc.freenode.net.
Some advice, especially if you're new to IRC:
+-
+
Search the web for "IRC etiquette" to learn about the do's and don'ts of chatting. Without much searching, I found Getting help on IRC by Christoph Haas to be quite helpful.
+By registering your nickname you make sure nobody can pull any shenanigans and you gain the trust of the residents. See Freenode's FAQ on that matter.
+Set up a sound in Haiku's Sounds preferences to be notified if someone mentions your nickname. People don't always watch their IRC client screen. Putting the nickname of the person you're talking to at the beginning of what you're about to post increases your chance to be noticed. Similar to the Terminal, Vision supports tab-completion for nicknames, i.e. if you enter the starting letters of a nickname and press the tab key, Vision completes it with the first name that matches.
+
+
+
+
+Keyboard shortcuts
+Vision provides a few handy keyboard shortcuts:
+| TAB | Tab-completion like in Terminal: After entering a few letters of a nickname, hitting TAB completes to the first matching nickname. | |
| ↑ / ↓ | When the input control has focus, this will cycle through your recently entered text. | |
| ALT ↑ / ↓ | Activates the window that appears above / below the currently active (selected) one in the "Window list" | |
| SHIFT ALT ↑ / ↓ | Similar to ALT ↑ / ↓, but with a twist. Instead of activating the window immedietly above / below the current one, it looks ahead. If there are any windows with higher status bits then the current window, it jumps to those. It jumps to the highest found status bit first. + +To understand this, you must know that Vision color codes windows in the list with different "status bits" depending on how its contents have changed since it last had focus: +
|
+
+Built-in commands
+Here's a list of built-in commands, taken with permission from Vision's website.
+The syntax:
+| /COMMAND | the command | |
| <required> | a required parameter | |
| [optional] | an optional parameter | |
| | | a logical OR | |
| ... | more parameters possible |
-
+
+Opens Vision's About window.
+
+
+Opens www.acronymfinder.com with your current html handler. (Note: If the file-handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
+
+Sets away status on current network. If no away reason is specified, it is set to 'BRB'. (be right back)
+
+
+Sets your status to 'back' on current network.
+
+
+Clears the contents of the current text buffer.
+
+
+Executes the specified ctcp command on a channel or nick.
+
+
+Opens a private dcc chat session with the specified nick.
+
+
+Sends a file to <nick>. If no file is specified, a File panel will open.
+
+
+De-ops or de-voices <nick(s)>.
+
+
+Like a private /ME, only <nick> can see it.
+
+
+Resolves the given IP or domain name.
+
+
+Quits Vision.
+
+
+Same as /AWAY [away-reason], but applies to all connected networks.
+
+
+Same as /BACK, but on applies to all connected networks.
+
+
+Opens www.google.com with your current html handler. (Note: If the file-handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
+
+Invites <nick> to the <channel>.
+
+
+Joins the <channel>. Provide a [channel-key] if necessary.
+
+
+Kicks <nick> from current channel. If [reason] is not specified, it will be set to the reason specified in Preferences.
+
+
+IRC operator command to disconnect a user from the network.
+
+
+Opens a new view which lists all the channels on the current network. [except hidden channels]
+
+
+Displays the channel modes of the current channel.
+
+
+Same as , but on current channel.
+
+
+Same as , but on current channel.
+
+
+Displays: * {YourNickname} <text>.
+
+
+Sets mode for <nick(s)> on <channel>.
+e.g.
+or
+
+
+Sets the mode of <channel>. (Note: Commata just for optical separation.)
+e.g.
+
+
+Sends a <message> to <nick>.
+
+
+Displays all channels and all nicks of the network in the network window. (Careful with this one)
+
+
+Displays nick(s) in <channel>.
+
+
+Changes your nick to <newnick>.
+
+
+Sends a notice to <nick> with the given <message>.
+
+
+Adds <nick(s)> to your notify list.
+
+
+Executes the given <app>. If more than one application is provided, they will be executed in a pipe.
+e.g. opens a new Terminal, and afterwards StyledEdit
+or displays the contents of your ~/Downloads/ directory in the current window (Attention!)
+
+
+Ops or voices to <nick(s)>.
+
+
+Leaves current channel or network.
+
+
+Pings the <nick> and returns the ping-time. Equivalent to .
+
+
+Opens a query window on <nick>, optionally along with a [message].
+
+
+Quits current network. If [custom-quit-message] is not specified, the default set in Preferences will be used.
+
+
+Sends a raw IRC command.
+
+
+Will reconnect you to the current network if the 47 automatic reconnection attempts have failed.
+
+
+Causes current thread to sleep for the specified time ; for future scripting use.
+
+
+IRC operator command to disconnect a server.
+
+
+Returns local time of <nick>. Equivalent to
+
+
+Displays the topic of the current channel or, if provided, of <channel>.
+
+
+Sets the topic of <channel> to <new-channel-topic>.
+
+
+Same as , but on current channel.
+
+
+Removes <nick(s)> from your notify list.
+
+
+Displays the systems uptime. If [-l] is specified, the uptime will be echoed locally, and not sent to the network.
+
+
+Returns the client-version of <nicks> IRC-client. Equivalent to .
+
+
+Opens <url> with your current html handler. (Note: If the handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
+
+Opens www.m-w.com (Merriam Webster) with your current html handler. (Note: If the handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
+
+Displays the Vision uptime. If [-l] is specified, the uptime will be echoed locally, and not sent to the network.
+
+
+IRC operator command that sends a wallops message (visible to those with umode w active).
+
+
+Returns whois information of <nick>.
+
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
WebPositive
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/WebPositive | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Configuration files, cookies, cache and browsing history | |
| ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - All bookmarks as single files |
WebPositive, or Web+ for short, is Haiku's native web browser. One part of its name is a tip of the hat to BeOS' simple NetPositive, the other points to its modern foundation: the WebKit. This open source HTML rendering library is at the heart of other mainstream browsers as well, like Safari of Mac OS X and Google's Chrome. By using the ever evolving WebKit, Web+ will be able to keep up with new web technologies.
+
+WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.
+Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.
+Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.
+At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.
Settings
+From the menu you can open a panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.
+
+The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a , what's used as a , what is used for stuff you get from the net.
+Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.
+Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.
+Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.
In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.
+The last tab is used to configure a proxy server.
+Browsing
+If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.
+-
+
+New tabs are created with the + button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the < > scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The ∨ button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.
+Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background. Holding SHIFT while middle-clicking, opens it in the foreground.
+From the menu you can and of a page. There's also an option to , leaving all images with their original size.
+If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.
+
+While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with ↑ or ↓. ENTER will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.
+Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.
+Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.
+shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.
+
Bookmarks
+WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with .
+
+You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's menu, then select a file, press ALT E and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with TAB.
You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.
By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.
+Activating in Tracker's preferences, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more ↑ or ↓ to move the selection and pressing ENTER opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.
For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...
+Downloads
+opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:
+
+Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you and a download, or the file, or its entry from the list. The and buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.
+Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".
+Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.
Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with DiskProbe and have a look at its META:url attribute.
+Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.
Keyboard shortcuts
+Here are some useful keyboard shortcuts:
+| ALT T | Opens a new tab. | |
| ALT W | Closes the current tab. | |
| ALT N | Opens a new window. | |
| SHIFT ALT W | Closes the current window. | |
| ALT ENTER | Toggles full screen mode. | |
| ALT R or F5 | Refreshes the current page. | |
| ALT H | Opens the home page. | |
| ALT D | Shows/hides the Downloads window. | |
| ALT F | Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with ESC). | |
| ALT B | Bookmarks the current page. | |
| ALT M | Manage bookmarks, opening the Bookmarks folder. | |
| ALT ← | Previous page in the history. | |
| ALT → | Next page in the history. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
WonderBrush
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/WonderBrush/WonderBrush | |
| Documentazion: | /boot/system/apps/WonderBrush/Documentation en | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/WonderBrush |
WonderBrush is an editor for bitmap and vector graphics. Find more information and workshops at the YellowBites website and in the local documentation.
+ +Atribûts
+ +I atribûts a son cjamps di dâts che a apartegnin a un file ma no son part di chel file, p.e. no vegnin calcolâts te dimension dal file e a puedin jessi copiâts o cambiâts cence tocjâ il file. Il sisteme al dopre chescj atribûts par archiviâ p.e. la dimension dal file, il gjenar di file o la date de ultime modifiche. Chest al è simil a altris sistemis operatîfs e i lôr filesystem.
+La diference e je che tu puedis zontâ cualsisei gjenar di atribût a cualsisei file e mostrâju o rindiju modificabii intun barcon dal Tracker. Tu âs dome di definî il gjenar di atribût che tu desideris zontâ a un gjenar di file (p.e. stringhe, intîr o ore) e dâi un non e une descrizion.
+Il file di bessôl nol à nancje bisugne di contignûts. Bute un voli a chescj file di People par esempli:
+
++
Come che tu puedis viodi, chescj a son ducj file di dimension 0 cun atribûts zontâts, l'atribût E-mail di "John Nox" al è modificât di dentri di Tracker.
+Se tu metis in tabele i atribûts — come che People, Email o i file audio a son in maniere predefinide — si puedin ancje cirî cul sisteme di interogazion veloç di Haiku.
+ +
+
+I atribûts tal Tracker
+I atribûts a son visualizâts in maniere simile a une base di dâts o a un sfuei di calcul. Doprant Tracker tu puedis sielzi cuâl atribût visualizâ (colonis) e ordenâ la liste di file (riis) di conseguence.
+Par fâ chest, vierç un barcon di Tracker, fâs clic sul menù , e selezione i atribûts che tu desideris visualizâ. In alternative, fâs semplicementri clic diestri suntune intestazion di colone e segne i elements intal menù contestuâl. Tu puedis rangjâ lis colonis cuntun semplic "strissine e mole" de intestazion de colone. Spostant une colone fûr dal barcon, al è un metodi veloç par gjavâ vie lis colonis che no ti coventin.
+Fâs dopli clic su pe linie tra doi atribûts inte intestazion par ridimensionâ in automatic une colone ae so largjece otimâl.
+Fâs clic suntune intestazion di colone par comutâ l'ordin di assendent a dissendent. Tu puedis stabilî un ordin secondari fracant il tast MAIUSC intant che tu fasis clic suntune intestazion di colone. Tu puedis ordenâ i tiei file di People par aziende e dentri di chel ordin par non dal contat, par esempli. Viôt la cature di schermi parsore par vê un esempli. L'ordin secondari al è segnât cuntun indicadôr colorât plui clâr in bande de intestazion.
+Modificâ chescj atribûts al è sempliç come cambiâ un non a un file: fâs clic suntune vôs o frache ALT E e spostiti tra i atribûts cun TAB e SHIFT TAB. ESC al fâs jessî de modalitât modifiche cence salvâ i cambiaments.
+ +
+
+I attributes tal Terminal
+Se tu preferissis doprâ la rie di comant o tu planifichis di lavorâ cun tancj file doprant i script, a esistin diviers comants par controlâ i atribûts dal Terminâl.
+
+
+listattr
+listattr al liste i atribûts di un file, ma nol mostre i contignûts dai atribûts.
+ûs: listattr 'nonfile' ['nonfile' ...]+
De nestre cature di schermi parsore:
+~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters +File: Clara Botters + Type Size Name +----------- --------- ------------------------------- +MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE" + Text 14 "META:name" + Text 6 "META:nickname" + Text 1 "META:company" + + Text 18 "META:address" + Text 8 "META:city" + Text 1 "META:state" + Text 1 "META:zip" + Text 1 "META:country" + + Text 1 "META:hphone" + Text 13 "META:wphone" + Text 1 "META:fax" + Text 19 "META:email" + Text 1 "META:url" + + Text 5 "META:group" + Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le" + +131 bytes total in attributes.+
In diplui a ducj i atribûts "META:*" che a tegnin lis informazions dal contat, a son doi atribûts che a son gjestîts dal sisteme:
+-
+
BEOS:TYPE al ten il gjenar di file come une stringhe MIME, achì "application/x-person". Lui al determine la icone predefinide e la aplicazion che e vierç il file, cuant che par esempli tu i fasis dopli clic.
+"_trk/pinfo_le" al è l'atribût che cun chel Tracker al ten iniments la posizion de icone di un file.
+
+catattr
+catattr al mostre i contignûts di un specific atribût di un file.
+ûs: catattr [--raw|-r] non_atrib file1 [file2...]+
Di gnûf cul nestri esempli:
+~/people ->catattr META:city Clara\ Botters +Clara Botters : string : Whelton+ +
+
+addattr
+addattr al zonte un atribût a un file e/o lu jemple cuntun valôr.
+ûs: addattr [-t gjenar] atrib valôr file1 [file2...] + opûr: addattr [-f valôr-dal-file] [-t gjenar] atrib file1 [file2...] + + Gjenar al è un tra: + string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, icon, raw + o un valôr numeric (p.e. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...) + Il predefinît al è "string"+
Alore, disin che la nestre cjare Clara e à cjatât un lavôr cu la multinazionâl Barkelbaer Inc., tu tu jemplis l'atribût "Aziende", un volte vueit, cun chel dât (che al è di gjenar "string" vâl a dî stringhe):
+~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters+ +
+
+rmattr
+rmattr al gjave dal dut un atribût di un file.
+ +ûs: rmattr [-p] atrib nonfile1 [nonfile2...] + 'atrib' al è il non di un atribût dal file + Se '-p' al è specificât, 'atrib' al è considerât come un model.+
Ancje se al at pratic al baste no jemplâ l'atribût "Fax", tu puedi gjavâlu dal dut dal file di Clara scrivint:
+~/people ->rmattr META:fax Clara\ Botters+ +
+
+copyattr
+copyattr al copie i atribûts di un o plui file suntun altri. Par impostazion predefinide, il contignût efetîf dal file nol è copiât.
+Ûs: copyattr <opzions> <sorzint> [ ... ] <destinazion>+ +
Se tu desideris copiâ i atribûts e i dâts dal file stes, tu puedis zontâ la opzion "-d" o "--data".
+ +Plui informazions su chescj comants e lis lôr opzions a puedin jessi cjatadis scrivint il non dal comant cun daûr "-h" o "--help".
+ +-
+
Furlan
+
Bahasa Indonesia
+
Català
+
Deutsch
+
English
+
Español
+
Français
+
Italiano
+
Magyar
+
Polski
+
Português
+
Português (Brazil)
+
Română
+
Slovenčina
+
Suomi
+
Svenska
+
中文 ［中文］
+
Русский
+
Українська
+
日本語
+
Bash e Scripting
+ +Il "Scripting" e je la tecniche par rindi automatichis lis proceduris, scrivint adun i comants salvant dut su file di test, clamâts "script". Ogni volte che si eseguìs un script, i comants a vegnin elaborâts un daûr di chel altri come se a vignissin inserîts a man intal Terminâl.
+I Script a puedin variâ de semplice esecuzion di pôcs comants intun specific ordin a sofisticâts tocs di codiç che al risolf compits complicâts.
+
+Bash
+Viodût che i script a fasin naturalmentri afidament su la shell che ju interprete, tu âs prime di familiarizâ cu la BASH che e ven doprade di Haiku. A son tantis risorsis in rêt viodût che e je une shell tant doprade. Un biel document al è chel di Johan Jansson: Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
+Il Bash Reference Manual (PDF, 720 KiB) e je une risorse ninine par jentrâ tai detais.
+
+La bibie dal Scripting
+Dopo vê imparât cualchi nozion di base su ce mût lavorâ te shell, e je ore di fâti rilassâ intal mont dal scripting. Di gnûf, tu cjatarâs cuintâi di lezions e materiâi di riferiment in rêt e intes negozis di libris. Une ce tant biele introduzion, che in pratiche e je fate su misure par Haiku, e je chê disponibile in rêt: Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900 KiB) de BeOS Bible di Scot Hacker.
+ +
+Script in Haiku
+Haiku timp indaûr al veve dai script par inviâsi e par distudâsi. Vuê, al lôr puest, al dopre il launch_daemon. Dut câs, l'utent al pues ancjemò aumentâ chest procès cun cierts propris script. +Se no esistin za, tu varâs di creâ di bessôl i file che a coventin. In câs contrari, al baste zontâ i tiei comants dulà che tal procès tu ju desideris eseguîts.
+ +
+
+Il UserBootscript
+/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserBootscript al vignarà eseguît dopo che il sisteme al varà finît i siei procès di inviament. Par esempli, tu puedis inviâ un ciert numar di programs che a vignaran fats partî in automatic a ogni inviament di sisteme:
+# Start LaunchBox +/boot/system/apps/LaunchBox & + +# Start Workspaces Applet +/boot/system/apps/Workspaces &+
Visiti di finî un comant cuntun "&" par inviâlu come procès in sotfont, o il script si fermarà fintremai che il comant nol varà finît di lavorâ (in chest câs: la aplicazion inviade e je stade sierade).
+ +Une semplice alternative par inviâ aplicazions al inviament, rispiet a ce che o ven mostrât chi parsore, e je chê di meti i lôr colegaments inte cartele /boot/home/config/settings/boot/launch. Chest al pues jessi fat semplicementri fasint clic diestri su la aplicazion che tu desideris vê inviade in automatic, e lâ su e daspò navigâ fin te cartele che o ven nomenât chi parsore.
+ +
+Il UserShutdownScript - ancjemò nol funzione
+/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserShutdownScript al vignarà eseguît come prin pas intal procès di distudament. Se il script al torne un stât di jessude diviers di zero, il distudament al vignarà interot.
+ +
+
+Il UserShutdownFinishScript - ancjemò nol funzione
+/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript al è eseguît come ultin pas tal procès di distudament. Fâs câs che la plui part dal sisteme al è stât terminât cuant che chest script al ven eseguît.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Il Boot Loader
+ +Lis opzions dal Boot Loader di Haiku a puedin judâ cuant che si à a ce fâ un problemis di hardware opûr cuant che si à plui instalazions di Haiku e si desidere sielzi cuale instalazion di Haiku fâ partî (par esempli un CD di instalazion o une clavute USB). Al è ancje utile se si à instalât un component software che al impedìs di inviâ Haiku e duncje di gjavâlu, viôt la Risoluzion dai problemis chi sot.
+Par jentrâ tes Opzions dal Boot Loader, tu âs di tignî fracât il tast MAIUSC prime che al tachi il procès di inviament di Haiku. Se al è instalât un gjestôr di inviament, tu puedis tacâ a tignî fracât MAIUSC prime di invocâ la vôs dal menù par Haiku. Se Haiku al è l'unic sisteme operatîf inte machine, tu puedis tacâ a fracâ il tast bielzà cuant che tu viodis i messaçs di inviament dal BIOS.
+
+
+Opzions dal Boot Loader
+Une volte lì, ti si presentin cuatri menù:
+| Select boot volume | Sielç cuâl stât/instalazion di Haiku fâ partî (viôt la Risoluzion dai problemis chi sot). | |
| Select safe mode options | A son diviersis opzions di provâ tal câs di un probleme hardware o se il sisteme al devente instabil o no si pues inviâ par vie di un compuartament sbaliât di un component zontât. Cuant che si sposte la sbare di selezion suntune opzion, e ven fûr une curte spiegazion in bas tal schermi. | |
|
+
| ||
| Select debug options | Chi tu cjatarâs diviersis opzions che a judin cul debug o a vê detais par fâ une segnalazion di erôr. Di gnûf, une curte spiegazion par ogni opzion e ven mostrade in bas. | |
|
+
| ||
| Se al è ativât, un tornâ a inviâ a cjalt daspà un colàs, al mostre chestis opzions adizionâls: | ||
|
| ||
| Select screen resolution | Ti permet di sfuarçâ une cierte risoluzion di sisteme e profonditât di colôr. |
+
+Risoluzion dai problemis
+Se Haiku al refude di inviâsi sul vuestri hardware dal inizi, prove a stabilî opzions diferentissot di . Considere la idee di inviâ une segnalazion di erôr in ogni câs.
+Di chê altre bande, se Haiku al tache a dâ problemis dome dopo vê instalât cualchi software, specialmentri driver hardware, tu âs diviersis opzions par vê di gnûf Haiku funzionant cussì di podê disinstalâ il pachet incriminât:
+-
+
Ativant si impedirà ae plui part dai servidôrs, demonis e il UserBootscript di jessi inviâts.
+Ativant si impedirà l'ûs di cualsisei zonte (add-on) (driver, tradutôrs, e vie indenant) che tu âs instalât inte gjerarchie utent sot de tô cartele Home.
+Se ativant al risolf i tiei problemis cessant ae grafiche VESA, tu puedis rindi permanente la impostazion lant a gjavâ il # de rie #fail_safe_video_mode true intal file di test /boot/home/config/settings/kernel/drivers/kernel.
+Se il driver incriminât, o la zonte e vie indenant, al è instalât te gjerarchie dal sisteme, lis robis a diventin un tic plui complicadis, parcè che chê aree e je in dome-leture. Chi, il al jentre in zûc. Cun chel, tu puedis navigâ su dute la gjerarchie dal sisteme e disabilitâ il component che fâs damps segnant une vôs cul tast SPAZI o INVIE. ESC ti fâs tornâ insù di un nivel ae cartele superiôr.
+In rêt, al è l'articul How to Permanently Blacklist a Package File che al mostre ce mût fâ in mût di mantignî lis modifichis.
+Sot di tu puedis specificâ cuale "version" precedente di Haiku inviâ. Ogni volte che tu dis/instalis un pachet, il stât vecjo al ven salvât etu puedis inviâlu sielzintlu de liste presentade intes opzions dal boot loader.
+Cussì, se ti si presentin problemis di inviament dopo vê instalât cualchi pachet, invie un stât di Haiku precedent a chê volte e disinstale il pachet incriminât.
+
+
+Inviament di Haiku
+Dopo vê ativât une o plui opzions, si torne al menù principâl e si continue l'inviament, che si presentarà cun cheste videade di inviament:
+
+
+Se dut al va ben, si impie un simbul daûr di chel altri.
+I simbui diferents a corispuindin sù par jù a chestis fasis:
| Atom | Inizializazion dai modui. | |
| Disc + lint di ingrandiment | Creazion di rootfs (/) e montaç di devfs (/dev). | |
| Schede interne | Inizializazion dal gjestôr dai dispositîfs. | |
| Disc di inviament | Montaç dal disc di inviament. | |
| Microchip | Cjariament dai modui specifics de CPU. | |
| Cartele | Inizializazion finâl dal sot-sisteme. | |
| Missil | Launch_daemon al à inviât il sisteme. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Welcome to the Haiku User Guide
+ +Below, you'll find the documentation of the most important aspects of Haiku. Naturally, completing and extending the documentation is a continuing process (see the online version for updated pages and translations). If you find errors, would like to suggest topics or maybe even contribute yourself, please get in touch on the documentation mailing list. If you're interested in helping with translations, you'll find information on that at the i18n user guide wiki.
+| Boot Loader | +Set safe boot options to solve configuration problems. |
| Filesystem layout | +Understand the filesystem hierarchy and get familiar with important file locations and folders. |
| Haiku's GUI | +Learn about the basic elements of the graphical user interface. |
| Shortcuts and key combinations | +The most common shortcuts to speed up your workflow. |
| Workspaces | +Use virtual desktops for an uncluttered work environment. |
| Twitcher | +Switch between running applications. |
| Team Monitor | +Kill unresponsive applications or system components. |
| Tracker | +Learn all about navigating, working with files and folders and how to configure Haiku's file manager. |
| Deskbar | +Use and configure Haiku's version of the "Start" menu and taskbar. |
| Filetypes | +Set default applications, change file types and create your own. |
| Attributes | +One of Haiku's main features lets you manage and add any kind of data to any file. |
| Index | +Use indexing to be able to search for attributes. |
| Queries | +Use Haiku's lightning fast queries to quickly find what you're looking for. |
| Workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries | +Learn to use some of Haiku's key features by organizing your DVDs. |
| Workshop: Managing Email | +Learn to use Haiku's mail system with custom statuses and queries. |
| Workshop: Wireless networking | +Set up your open or encrypted wireless network. |
Applications
|
+ Learn how to un/install applications in general and how work with the ones that come with Haiku. |
Desktop Applets
+
|
+ Simple tools to install on your Desktop and Deskbar. |
Preferences
+
|
+ Configuring and setting up your system. |
| Bash and Scripting | +Learn of some interesting scripts used by the system and about online resources for working in the shell and scripting. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
|
+ Il menù Deskbar + La guantiere + La liste dai programs in esecuzion + |
Deskbar
+ +Il Deskbar al è chel piçul panel che in maniere predefinide si cjate tal angul in alt a drete dal schermi. Al è la version di Haiku de sbare des ativitâts di Windows cul so boton Start. Al conten il menù di Deskbar di dulà che si pues inviâ aplicazions e preferencis, une guantiere cuntun orloi e sot di chel, altris struments. In bas, une liste dai programs atualmentri in esecuzion.
+
+Tu puedis spostâ il Deskbar in cualsisei angul o, come une sbare, vêlu dilunc l'ôr superiôr o inferiôr dal schermi. Par spostâlu al baste cjapâlu te aree cui groputs che e sta dome di une bande de guantiere e strissinâlu inte gnove posizion. Tu puedis ancje striçâlu intune disposizion plui compate strissinant la aree cui groputs sul menù dal Deskbar.
+Cjapant chel altri widget cui groputs de guantiere, tu puedis cambiâ la largjece dal Deskbar strissinant il mouse a drete o a çampe:
+
+Un Deskbar plui larc al permet tantis plui iconis par rie te guantiere. In diplui al cjonce cetant di mancul i nons luncs des aplicazions inte liste dai programs in esecuzion, In particolâr se si dopre iconis plui grandis.
+ +
+
+Il menù Deskbar
+Si vierç un menù cuant che si fâs clic te part superiôr dal Deskbar:
+
+-
+
Informazions sul sisteme... - Al mostre cualchi informazion di base dal sisteme, licencis e i ricognossiments dal progjet Haiku.
+
+Cjate... - Al vierç il dialic pe Interogazion.
+Mostre replicants - Al mostre/plate il piçul widget dal Replicant che tu dopris par strissinâlu ator, par gjavâlu o par jentrâ tal so menù contestuâl.
+Monte - Al ufrìs lis stessis opzions di cuant che al ven invocât dal clic diestri sul Scritori (see Montâ i volums).
+Preferencis Deskbar... - Al vierç un panel par configurâ il Deskbar (viôt sot).
+Jessude di Haiku - Al ufrìs lis opzions opûr .
+documents, cartelis, aplicazions resintis - Liste dai ultins documents, cartelis aplicazions viertis di resint (viôt lis chi sot).
+Applications, Demos, Deskbar applets, Preferences - Liste di aplicazions, dimostrazions, applet e preferencis instaladis.
Tu puedis zontâ colegaments a altris programs (o cualsisei cartele, document, interogazion e vie indenant) metintju in ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/.
+
+Preferencis di Deskbar
+
+Il panel des preferencis di Deskbar si divît in trê sezions.
+ +Aplicazions
+Lis impostazions chi sot no si aplichin aes impostazions che tu âs instalât, ma al compuartament e al aspiet de liste des aplicazions in esecuzion.
+| Al ordene la liste dai programs in esecuzion in ordin alfabetic. | ||
| Ancje se tu ordenis in ordin alfabetic, la vôs dal Tracker e restarà simpri la prime inte liste. | ||
| Al furnirà un piçul widget par mostrâ/platâ ducj i barcons di un program subite sot la sô vôs tal Deskbar. | ||
| I gnûfs programs inviâts a àn i lôr barcons pandûts in automatic sot lis lôr vôs tal Deskbar. | ||
| Al gjave lis etichetis di test des aplicazions in esecuzion. | ||
| Al adate la dimension des iconis des aplicazions in esecuzion. |
Menù
+While the first couple of menu items of the Deskbar are fixed, you can customized the ones below .
+Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.
+The button opens the folder ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are , , , and .
+You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.
I programs instalâts di un pachet, a metin in automatic une vôs tal Deskbar. In base al numar di pachets che tu âs instalât, chest al pues deventâ un tic ingolfât. Se tu preferissis vê il plen control e viodi dome lis aplicazions che tu coleghis lì par cont to (magari categorizant in sot-cartelis), cussì al è ce mût che si fâs:
+Tu creis un colegament de cartele dal menu in ~/config/settings/deskbar/ e i cambiis il non a menu_entries. Dal Terminâl si rive a fâ il lavôr cun:
ln -s ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu_entries
Barcon
+Tal ultin, lis preferencis pal barcon dal Deskbar.
+| Il Deskbar al starà simpri parsore dai altris barcons. | ||
| Il Deskbar al comparirà denant se il pontadôr dal mouse lu tocjarà. | ||
| Il Deskbar al ven ridusût a dome cualchi pixel e al comparirà dome se il pontadôr dal mouse ju tocjarà. |
+
+La guantiere
+
+Among other things, the tray is housing the clock. Hover the mouse over it to display the date in a tooltip. Left-click it to show a calendar. Right-click it to hide/show the clock or launch the Time preferences to set it.
+Ducj i programs a puedin instalâ une icone te guantiere par furnî al utent une interface. Il sisteme e-mail, par esempli, al mostre un simbul diferent cuant che si à pueste no lete e al ufrìs un menù contestuâl par (par esempli) creâ o controlâ se si à gnove pueste. Controlôr dai procès al è un altri esempli che al dopre la sô icone te guantiere par dâ informazions (CPU/memorie doprade) e par ufrî un menù contestuâl.
+ +
+
+La liste des aplicazions in esecuzion
+
+Tu puedis passâ a une specifiche aplicazion in esecuzion fasint clic su la sô vôs tal Deskbar e sielzint il so/un dai soi barcons dal sot-menù. Fasint clic diestri tu puedis i barcons opûr e cun lôr la aplicazion interie.
+Un MAIUSC CTRL clic suntune aplicazion al plate ducj i siei barcons, un CTRL clic ju torne a mostrâ.
+Se tu âs ativât i Espansôrs tes impostazions dal Deskbar, tu puedis espandi/striçâ la liste dai barcons subite sot de vôs di une aplicazion.
+Denant di ogni barcon de aplicazion al è un simbul che al da informazions sul so stât. Un simbul clâr al significhe che al è un barcon visibil, un scûr che al minimizât. Trê liniis denant di un simbul al indiche che nol sta sul spazi di lavôr atuâl.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Applet di Scritori
+ +Haiku al furnìs un pôcs di imprescj utii, che a puedin jessi instalâts sul Scritori o sul Deskbar cui lôr Replicants.
+ | LaunchBox | + | Scurtis pes tôs aplicazions preferidis. |
 | Stât de Rêt | + | Ise ative la tô conession? |
 | Stât de Batarie | + | Al mostre il sᵗat di cjarie de batarie dal to portatil. |
 | Controlôr dai procès | + | Ten di voli e controle ogni aplicazion e servizi in esecuzion. |
 | Spazis di lavôr | + | Une version in miniature di ducj i spazis di lavôr. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
LaunchBox
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/LaunchBox | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/LaunchBox/* |
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag & drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
+
+All options are reached from the context menu:
+| Adds an empty button. | |||
| Empties a button. | |||
| Removes a button. | |||
| Hovering the mouse over an icon shows a tooltip with the file's name and, in case of an application, its short description if it differs from its name (see topic FileTypes). With this menu item you can customize the description for this tooltip. | |||
+ + + + + + | +Aligns the buttons horizontally. +Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel. +Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click. +Shows the window border. +LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge. +Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace. | ||
+ + + | +Add a new pad. +Duplicate the current pad. +Close the current pad. | ||
+ | +Quits all LaunchBox pads. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
NetworkStatus
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/NetworkStatus | |
| Impostazions: | none |
NetworkStatus shows the status of your network connections. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
+Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
+The first section contains all network devices' names and their state. Clicking on such an entry brings up a window showing its IP, broadcast and netmask address.
+Below is a list of all wireless networks found by the first wireless adapter and an indicator of their signal strength. Have a look at the Workshop: Wireless networking for more information on how to set up a connection.
+Lastly, you can to change your network configuration or the applet.
Status icons
+ | Ready | Link is established. | |
 | Configuring | Connecting in progress. | |
 | No stateful configuration | Some settings are missing (check IP configuration). | |
 | No link | There is no physical connection (probably the network cable is not connected and wireless networks are unavailable). | |
 | - | There are no network adapters available (if you are sure that at least one is connected, there are probably no drivers yet). |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
PowerStatus
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/PowerStatus | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/PowerStatus settings |
PowerStatus shows information about the battery level, so it's only useful on mobile computers. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
+Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
Note: PowerStatus requires a working ACPI support.
+
+The context menu offers these options:
+| Shows battery level in percent or remaining time. | ||
| Shows icon of the applet. | ||
| Switch between showing battery level in percent or remaining time ( has to be active). | ||
| Shows the extended battery info window. | ||
| Shows the About window. | ||
| Quits the PowerStatus applet. |
When is active, the battery level is shown in brackets while charging.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
ProcessController
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/ProcessController | |
| Impostazions: | none |
The primary task of the ProcessController applet is to show the activity of your CPU(s) and the amount of used memory. It allows monitoring of individual teams, change their priority, and kill them if the program freezes. In multiprocessor environments it allows you to disable individual processors/cores. When Tracker or Deskbar crash you can restart them from ProcessController's menu.
Indicators on the left show each CPU's usage, while the bar on the right shows the memory consumption. Remember that the number of indicators depend on the number of processors/cores in the computer.
+If not yet running, launching ProcessController asks if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you can resize the bar-display by resizing the window and then use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
+Wherever it's installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
+To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck in its context menu.
Quit an application
+
+To quit an application just choose its name from the menu. This is a clean way to close app, just like clicking its close button. Be careful not to quit system processes like servers or daemons, however. Your system may stop working reliably.
+Memory usage
+
+Monitoring memory usage can be rather inaccurate.
+This menu allows you to monitor memory usage of different teams in your system. Next to the team's name there are two columns: first with the amount reserved for writable memory, while the second shows all memory including read-only space (shared libraries for example).
+The first row System resources & caches... shows the total amount of memory used by the system and all applications. The length of the blue bar is based on the total physical memory in your computer. The next rows show memory used by each process. Note that the length of the bar is based only on the actually used part of the memory.
+| Memory used only by given application (with write access) | ||
| Memory including read-only space (can be shared with other applications) |
Threads and CPU usage
+This menu allows you to change thread priorities, kill teams or debug them.
+
+| Kernel code | ||
| User code | ||
| Idle thread |
At the first level you see team names. By clicking on one, you can kill the whole team. The dark-blue part of the bar is time spent in kernel code, the light-blue part in user code, the green part in the idle thread(s). A bar completely filled with blue means that the team is using all processoring power.
+The second level shows particular threads of a team. By clicking on one, you can debug or kill it. A bar completely filled with blue means that the thread is pegging one processor/core.
+The last level of the menu allows you to change a thread's priority. Be careful with that! As a rule of thumb the priority of a thread should be inverse its CPU usage. That is, the more it tries to claim CPU time, the lower should be it's priority. In general, don't mess with an app's priorities; contact its author, that's his business. +
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Workspaces
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/apps/Workspaces | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces +~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - Stores the panel's window position. |
+You find the Workspaces applet with the other in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.
+ will open the Screen preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag & drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold SHIFT while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.
+ +
+
+Moving windows between workspaces
+To move a window, you grab it in the Workspaces applet and simply drag it to another workspace. This has the advantage, that you can move it without leaving your current desktop. Of course, that only works well when there aren't too many windows in a workspace and your target isn't obscured by other windows. Another possibility is to grab a window by its tab and just holding on to it while switching workspaces with ALT Fx.
+For more information on workspaces in general and more keyboard shortcuts, see topic Workspaces.
++Now you can quickly summon the applet with a key combo and equally quickly dismiss it again with ESC.
+
+Special functionality
+The Workspaces applet provides some additional functionality when clicking on a window while holding certain modifier keys:
+| CTRL | Brings the window to the front. | |
| CTRL SHIFT | Minimizes the window. | |
| OPT | Sends the window to the back. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Filesystem layout
+ +Haiku's filesystem layout is quite transparent, trying to always use non-cryptic names for files and folders, that don't leave the user guessing. Files and folders that are important for the system to function properly, are protected from accidental tempering by showing one of these alerts:
+
+
+The second alert pops up if you try to rename or delete something in the system hierarchy. Here, the "" button will only become clickable when you're holding down the SHIFT key.
+Generally, there are two separate branches springing from the root folder of the boot volume:
+| /boot/system/ | Contains system files and applications/packages shared by all users. | |
| /boot/home/ | This is your personal folder where you keep your data and settings and the applications/packages that are not shared by all users. |
As long as Haiku isn't multi-user, this distinction between shared and not-shared applications/packages has no apparent effect, as there's only one user with one home folder. But since there will be support for more users than one eventually, it makes sense to learn the right way from the start.
+ +
+
+The system folder - /boot/system/
+Under Haiku's predecessor BeOS, this folder was named /boot/beos/. You may still find it in some older documentation (e.g. in the original BeBook).
+Most of the folders inside /boot/system/ are read-only, which is sensible as they contain the files necessary for Haiku to function correctly and therefore have to be safe from (accidental) alteration. The only user-writable folders are:
| /boot/system/cache/ | Contains cached files and the temporary folder linked to /tmp/. | |
| /boot/system/non-packaged/ | Contains a hierarchy for files that aren't part of a .hpkg (probably from old BeOS archives). | |
| /boot/system/packages/ | Besides holding Haiku's system packages, you can add/remove packages shared by all users. | |
| /boot/system/settings/ | Contains system-wide settings. | |
| /boot/system/var/ | Contains logs like the syslog (important when troubleshooting) and is the default location for the swap file. |
For more information on the packages and non-packaged folders, see topic Applications.
+ +
+
+The home folder - /boot/home/
+This folder belongs to you. Here you can create and delete files and folders as you wish. (By the way, the tilde ("~") is a shortcut for your home folder, so you don't always have to write "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
+Files that you'd like to share with other users in a future multi-user environment have do be put outside /boot/home/. For example, you could create a folder /boot/all-users/ and put the stuff there.
| ~/Desktop/ | + | Holds the files of your desktop. Double-clicking won't open it, as it is already always visible. When your files happen to be obscured by open windows, just switch quickly to another Workspace. Of course, drilling down by right-clicking is also possible. |
| ~/mail/ | + | This is the default location for your mails. |
| ~/people/ | + | This is the default location for you contact files, see People. |
| ~/queries/ | + | Queries are stored here, by default temporarily for 7 days. |
The folder /boot/home/config/ is special: just like /boot/system/ it's mostly under the control of the package management and therefore read-only. It too contains these similar user-writable folders:
+ +| ~/config/packages/ | + | Here you can add/remove packages that are not shared by all users. |
| ~/config/non-packaged/ | + | Contains a hierarchy for files that aren't part of a .hpkg (probably from old BeOS archives) and are not shared by all users. |
| ~/config/settings/ | + | This folder contains the settings to all applications and a few configurations for the system. Some applications manage their settings in their own subfolders, others simply put their configuration file in there. |
For more information on the packages and non-packaged folders, see topic Applications.
+Here are some of the more interesting subfolders in ~/config/settings/:
+ +| boot/ | + | This folder is the place for User Scripts that are executed before or after the system boots up or shuts down. |
| boot/launch/ | + | Links to programs or documents in this folder are automatically launched on every boot-up. |
| beos_mime/ | + | In this MIME database Haiku keeps track of all the different filetypes and their settings. |
| deskbar/menu/ | + | Copied or linked to files/folders/queries in this folder appear in the Deskbar menu. |
| kernel/drivers/ | + | There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here! |
| Tracker/ | + + | Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders: |
| DefaultFolderTemplate/ | Show and arrange all attributes and the window size to your liking. Every new folder you create will use it as a template. | |
| DefaultQueryTemplates/ | You can define the layout of query result windows for certain filetypes. See topic Query: The result window. | |
| Go/ | Put links to your favorite locations in here to make them available e.g. in open and save panels. See topic Haiku's GUI: Favorites and recent folders. | |
| Tracker New Template/ | Add a template for any filetype that's then available from Tracker's menu. See topic Tracker: Working with files. |
Filetypes
+ +Other than Windows, Haiku doesn't rely on the 3-letter file extension for a file type (e.g. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). This method is only a last resort fallback. Haiku uses MIME types just like it's custom on the internet.
+
+Setting the filetype of a specific file
+You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the from the right-click context menu.
+
+
+
+
+The File Type
+The above is a PNG file, it's MIME string image/png. Let's say you definitely know that it's not a PNG but a GIF. You can change that either by entering the correct MIME string by hand or with one of the two buttons below the textbox:
+| shows a hierarchical list of filetypes where you navigate to image | GIF Image. | ||
| opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the filetype you're looking for. |
+
+The Preferred Application
+This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
+ +The is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons and which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
+ +
+
+The Icon
+If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype add-on of a file that contains an icon and drag & drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
+ +
+
+Special settings for applications
+If you invoke the Filetype add-on on an executable (here: StyledEdit), you'll get a different dialog:
+
+On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.
+Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:
+| Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side. | ||
| Many instances of the app can run simultaneously. | ||
| Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time. | ||
| Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages. | ||
| The app won't appear in Twitcher or the list of running apps of the Deskbar. |
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
+At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.
+ +
+
+Global settings with the FileTypes Preferences
+The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
+All filetypes and their configurations are stored in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Before you start experimenting, it may be prudent to make a backup of that folder...
+To learn more about the FileTypes preferences see the workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
|
+ Easy moving and resizing + Stack & Tile + Open and save panels + Replicants |
Haiku's GUI
+ +Haiku's graphical user interface is an integral part of the system. Unlike other Unix-like operating systems, there is no separate window manager and booting just into a command-line shell is not possible. Haiku's focus being on the desktop user, this is just not considered necessary.
+As you probably have experience with other graphical environments, let's skip over the standards like menus, right-click context menus, drag & drop etc. Let's have a look at the few unique aspects of Haiku's GUI instead.
+
+There are only a few things in Haiku's GUI that aren't obvious and deserve an explanation.
+-
+
The Deskbar is Haiku's "Start" menu and taskbar, if you will. See topic Deskbar.
+- The yellow tab offers more than just a program's name or a document's filename:
+
- You can move it by holding the SHIFT key while dragging it to another position, enabling you to stack a number of windows and conveniently access them by their named tab. +
- You minimize a window with a double-click on its tab (or with CTRL ALT M). A such hidden window can be accessed by its entry in the Deskbar or the Twitcher. +
- You can send a window to the back with a right-click on its tab (or its border).
+ The close button.
+The "zoom" button (or CTRL ALT Z). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size without obscuring the Deskbar (hold SHIFT to cover the Deskbar as well). It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.
+The window border. Left-dragging moves the window, right-dragging resizes.
+The resize corner.
+
+
+A quick way to move or resize windows
+Moving and resizing windows is a large part of interacting with several concurrently running applications. Instead of aiming at the small yellow title tab or the even tinier window border, there's a more convenient way to move a window. Also, additionally to its small size, the resize corner has another limitation: It only allows resizing at and in the direction of the lower right corner.
Right-dragging a border for resizing works, but again you'll have to aim carefully.
To address these issues, Haiku provides a neat solution using the window management key combo CTRL ALT and the mouse. See also chapter Shortcuts and key combinations for more shortcuts concerning window management.
+
+Holding down CTRL ALT will highlight the window borders nearest to the mouse pointer. Move the mouse in the direction of another border to change the target. Click and dragging with the right mouse button will resize the window along the highlighted border(s).
+Hold down CTRL ALT and click and drag with the left mouse button anywhere in a window to move it around. A quick click with the right mouse button sends it to the back.
+ +
+
+Stack & Tile
+Haiku's user interface provides a unique feature that puts the fact that windows have a yellow tab instead of a full-width title bar to perfect use. It's called "Stack & Tile".
+In the example below, a Tracker window with bookmarks is tiled to the left of a WebPositive window, which itself is stacked with another Tracker window showing the source folder haiku. In this animation, the user clicks on the tabs of the stacked windows to alternately bring one or the other to the front.
+Connected like this, the group of windows can be moved and resized together - a nice arrangement to work in a more project centric environment. Instead of looking for the right browser window with documentation, editor and Tracker windows and maybe a related email concerning one project you are currently working on, just stack&tile them together.
+Doing the actual arranging of windows is easy: Hold down OPT while dragging a window by its tab close to another window's tab or border until it's highlighted and release the mouse button.
+Stack & Tile consists of two related parts.
+ | + | "Stacking" is putting windows on top of each other, automatically moving the yellow tabs into position. |
 | + | "Tiling" means gluing windows horizontally or vertically together. |
Separation is done in the same way, by holding OPT while dragging a window by its tab out of the group.
+ +
+
+Open and save panels
+When opening or saving a file from any application, a panel like this opens:
+
+It has all the usual things: A list of files of the current folder to choose from, in case of a save panel, a text field to enter a filename and a pop-up menu for different file formats and their settings.
+You can enter parent folders with the pop-up menu above the file listing.
If you already have a Tracker window with the location for a file open, you can simply drag either any file or the folder-representation (i.e. the symbol to the far right in its menu bar) into the panel. This changes the panel to that new location.
+ +
+
+Keyboard shortcuts
+Many shortcuts in open and save panels are the same used in Tracker. Besides the commands that are also available through the menu, there are a few not that obvious:
+| ALT N | Creates a new folder. | |
| ALT E | Lets you rename the selected entry. | |
| ALT ↑ | Moves into the parent folder. | |
| ALT ↓ or ENTER | Moves into the selected folder. | |
| ALT D | Takes you to your Desktop. | |
| ALT H | Takes you to your Home folder. |
For keyboard shortcuts in Haiku in general, see chapter Shortcuts and key combinations.
+ +
+
+Favorites and recent folders
+The menu in open and save panels provides recently visited folders and favorite locations that you can set up yourself. As indicated by the little arrow, you can also use these locations to navigate further down the hierarchy via submenus.
+
+To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose . From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose and delete its entry.
+All Favorites are kept in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. So you might as well add and remove links to files and folders there directly.
+
+Replicants
+Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:
+
+The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag & drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.
+A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's window and to .
Examples for replicatable applications are the graphs of the ActivityMonitor, the Workspaces applet or DeskCalc.
+Tabele
+ +Attributes and Queries are key features of Haiku. While attributes are useful on their own, to display additional information on a file, for a query on them, they need to be indexed. It puts them into a lookup table, which in turn makes queries lightning fast.
+The index is part of the filesystem and is kept for every volume/partition separately.
+Indexing commands in Terminal
+There are several commands to manage the index:
+-
+
- lsindex - Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition.
+These are the attributes that are indexed by default:
+
~ ->lsindex +BEOS:APP_SIG +MAIL:account +MAIL:cc +MAIL:chain +MAIL:draft +MAIL:flags +MAIL:from +MAIL:name +MAIL:pending_chain +MAIL:priority +MAIL:reply +MAIL:status +MAIL:subject +MAIL:thread +MAIL:to +MAIL:when +META:address +META:city +META:company +META:country +META:email +META:fax +META:group +META:hphone +META:name +META:nickname +META:state +META:url +META:wphone +META:zip +_signature +_status +_trk/qrylastchange +_trk/recentQuery +be:deskbar_item_status +last_modified +name +size ++
-
+
- mkindex - Adds an attribute to the index of a volume/partition. +
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute> +Creates a new index for the specified attribute. + + -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume to which the index will be added, + defaults to current volume. + -t, --type=TYPE the type of the attribute being indexed. One of "int", + "llong", "string", "float", or "double". + Defaults to "string". + --copy-from path to volume to copy the indexes from. + -v, --verbose print information about the index being created + ++
Only new files with that attribute come automatically into the index!
+Existing files have to be added manually by copying them and deleting the originals after that. Alternatively you can use the command reindex.
+
-
+
- reindex - Puts the attributes of existing files into the newly created index of a volume/partition. +
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories> + -r enter directories recursively + -v verbose output + -f create/update all indices from the source volume, + "attr" is the path to the source volume + ++
-
+
- rmindex - Removes an attribute from the index of a volume/partition. +
Usage: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME + +Removes the index named INDEX_NAME from a disk volume. Once this has been +done, it will no longer be possible to use the query system to search for +files with the INDEX_NAME attribute. + + -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume from which the index will be + removed + -h, --help display this help and exit + -p, --pattern INDEX_NAME is a pattern + -v, --verbose print information about the index being removed + +INDEX_NAME is the name of a file attribute. + +If no volume is specified, the volume of the current directory is assumed.+ +
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Shortcuts and key combinations
+ +By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALT C and ALT V integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRL C quits the running process.
+In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
+If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
+ +
+
+General shortcuts
+Here's a table of many of the most commonly used shortcuts that are always available, even if there isn't a corresponding menu:
+| ALT Fx | Switches to Workspace X (Fx is the function key corresponding to that workspace). Take the active window with you by adding SHIFT | |
| CTRL ALT ← / → / ↑ / ↓ | Navigates spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. Add SHIFT to take the active window with you. | |
| OPT | Holding OPT while dragging a window near another window's tab or border will stack or tile them (see chapter GUI). | |
| OPT↑ / ↓ | Cycles through the open windows within the current workspace. | |
| CTRL ALT + left mouse | Click and drag with left mouse button to move a window (see chapter GUI). | |
| CTRL ALT + right mouse | Click and drag with right mouse button to resize a window (see chapter GUI). | |
| CTRL ALT Z | Zooms a window to an alternative size (maximum size for most applications). | |
| CTRL ALT M | Minimizes the active window. | |
| CTRL ALT H | Hides (minimizes) all windows of the active application. | |
| CTRL ALT F | Pulls the active window to the front (only applicable with the mouse setting Focus Follows Mouse). | |
| CTRL ALT B | Sends the active window to the back. | |
| CTRL TAB | Hold down to bring up the Twitcher. | |
| CTRL ALT DEL | Opens the Team Monitor. | |
| ALT ESC | Enters the menu bar (leave with ESC). | |
| ALT C | Copies the selection to the clipboard. | |
| ALT X | Cuts the selection to the clipboard. | |
| ALT V | Pastes the clipboard's contents. | |
| ALT W | Closes the active window. | |
| ALT Q | Quits an application. | |
| Takes a screenshot with zero delay and launches the Screenshot panel. | ||
| SHIFT PRINT | Takes a screenshot silently (without opening the panel), while still respecting the last used settings. | |
| CTRL PRINT | Also takes a screenshot silently with the saved settings, but instead of saving it as a file, it's just copied to the clipboard. |
+
+Textediting shortcuts
+Whenever you edit text – be it when renaming a file in Tracker, editing a file in StyledEdit, or chatting in Vision – there are some universal shortcuts:
+| ALT ← / → or OPT ← / → | Jump word-wise through the text. (Note: It may be useful to get used to using the OPT combination. Then you're all set if some app already uses the ALT combination for another command.) | |
| ALT BACKSPACE or OPT BACKSPACE | Word-wise removing the text to the left of the cursor. | |
| ALT DEL or OPT DEL | Word-wise removing the text to the right of the cursor. | |
| HOME | Jumps to the beginning of the line. | |
| END | Jumps to the end of the line. | |
| ALT HOME | Jumps to the beginning of the document. | |
| ALT END | Jumps to the end of the document. |
Holding SHIFT additionally when using the above key combinations will select the text between the cursor jumps.
+ +
+
+Shortcuts for Tracker navigation
+Additionally to the general shortcuts, here are some more for navigating with Tracker:
+| ALT ↑ | Opens the parent folder. | |
| ALT ↓ or ENTER | Opens the selected folder. | |
| OPT | Holding it while opening a folder will automatically close the parent folder. This also works when navigating with the mouse. | |
| MENU | Opens the Deskbar menu (leave with ESC). | |
| ALT Z | Undo last action. The undo history is only limited by the available memory. Note, this only works for actions on the file itself, changed attributes and permission settings can't be undone with this. Also, once a file is removed from Trash it's gone for good. | |
| ALT SHIFT Z | Redo the action you just reverted with ALT Z. | |
| SHIFT + Mousewheel | When scrolling through a long list of files in a Tracker window or when you're drilling down submenus, this will speed things up by doing page-wise scrolling. |
+
+Shortcuts in Terminal
+| ALT N | Opens another Terminal session in a new window. | |
| ALT T | Opens another Terminal session in a new tab. | |
| ALT 1, 2, 3 ... | Switches to the corresponding tab. | |
| ALT TAB | Switches to the next Terminal window. | |
| SHIFT ← / → | Switches to the tab to the left/right. | |
| ALT SHIFT ← / → | Moves the current tab left/right. | |
| ALT + / - | Increase/Decrease font size. | |
| ALT ENTER | Enter/leave fullscreen mode. | |
| SHIFT ↑ / ↓ | Scrolls the Terminal output up/down one line. | |
| SHIFT Page↑ / Page↓ | Scrolls the Terminal output up/down one page. | |
| TAB | Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press TAB once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press TAB twice to have all matches listed. | |
| ↑ / ↓ | Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands. | |
| CTRL R | Bash history. All the commands you enter +are stored in the file ~/config/settings/bash_history. Press CTRL R and start to enter a command and you'll be provided with the first match from the bash history. Keep pressing CTRL R until you find the right command line and press ENTER to execute it. | |
| CTRL C | Stops the currently running command. | |
| CTRL D | Closes the current Terminal session. |
+
+Other key combinations
+You can add or remove items to/from a selection by holding down a modifier key while clicking on a entry (or file in case of Tracker).
+| SHIFT | This will select everything between the first selected item and the one you click on. | |
| ALT | Adds or removes the item you're clicking on from the selection. |
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
+The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
+Instead of jumping to the first occurrence of your search string, Tracker can be configured to filter out all non-matching files. See the topic on type-ahead filtering.
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Preferences
+ +While a key philosophy of Haiku is to cut down on options and have sensible defaults instead, there are some things that have to be configured or can be set to individual preference. You find all panels in Deskbar's menu.
+ | Appearance | + | Configure certain aspects of the graphical interface. |
 | Backgrounds | + | Set a color or image as background of the Desktop or any other folder. |
 | DataTranslations | + | Settings for all supported file formats. |
 | Deskbar | + | Configure the Deskbar. |
 | + | Configure your email accounts. | |
 | FileTypes | + | Add, remove and configure filetypes. |
 | Keyboard | + | Configure repeat delay and rate. |
 | Keymap | + | Set the mapping of your keyboard. |
 | Locale | + | Set your system language and formatting. |
 | Media | + | Audio and video settings like in/output devices and the system's audio mixer. |
 | Mouse | + | Configure your mouse. |
 | Network | + | Configure your network. |
 | Printers | + | Add, remove and configure printers. [still missing] |
 | Repositories | + | Manage software repositories. |
 | Screen | + | Configure resolution, depth, refresh rate and number of used Workspaces. |
 | ScreenSaver | + | Add, remove and configure a screen saver. |
 | Shortcuts | + | Create your own shortcuts, e.g. to launch an application with a key combination. [still missing] |
 | Sounds | + | Assign sounds to different system events. |
 | Time | + | Set time, date and timezone. |
 | Tracker | + | Configure Haiku's file manager. |
 | Touchpad | + | Configure your touchpad. |
 | VirtualMemory | + | Set the amount of swap space. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Aspiet
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Appearance | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/system/app_server/appearance +~/config/settings/system/app_server/fonts |
Lis preferencis di Aspiet ti permetin di cambiâ cualchi aspiet de part visuâl di Haiku.
+ +
+
+Caratars
+
+Haiku al definìs trê caratars standard par diferentis finalitâts. Tu tu stabilissis lis dimensions e i gjenars di caratar fis, neret e normâl che a vignaran doprâts sul sisteme. Sore chescj, e je ancje une impostazion separade pal caratar doprât tai menù.
+ +
+
+Instalazion di gnûfs caratars
+I gnûfs caratars che no rivin come part di un pachet .hpkg regolâr, a puedin jessi instalâts copiantju intune sot-cartele, in acuardi cul lôr gjenar di caratar(psfonts o ttfonts), inte lôr rispetive cartele non-packaged (viôt l'argoment Disposizion dal filesystem). Pai caratars TrueType al sarà:
+| /boot/system/non-packaged/data/fonts/ttfonts/ | par caratars disponibii par ducj i utents. | |
| /boot/home/config/non-packaged/data/fonts/ttfonts/ | par caratars disponibii dome pal to utent. |
+
+Colôrs
+
+Inte schede , tu puedis cambiâ i colôrs di diferentis parts de interface utent. Il colôr al acete ancje il strissine e mole di altris programs, permetint cussì di strissinâ parsore i colôrs, par esempli, di WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic o il panel Fonts.
+ +
+
+Decoradôrs dai barcons
+
+I decoradôrs a determinin l'aspiet e il compuartament dai barcons e di ducj i elements de interface utent grafiche. Pal moment Haiku rive cun dome un decoradôr predefinît. Se tu vessis di cjatâ e instalâ altris decoradôrs, tu podarâs sielzi un diferent dal menù a tende.
+Il decoradôr predefinît di Haiku al permet di stabilî il stîl des frecis de sbare di scoriment: o frecis singulis ae fin des sbaris di scoriment par sparagnâ spazi, o doplis frecis — la maniere tradizionâl di BeOS — che potenzialmentri a sparagnin un pôcs di spostaments di mouse cuant che si scor sù e jù o çampe e drete...
+ +
+
+Antialiasing
+
+La schede e furnìs variis impostazions su ce mût che lis robis a vegnin visualizadis sul schermi.
+ +
+
+Miorament dai glifs
+Un ativât al inlinee dutis lis letaris in mût che i lôr ôrs, verticâi e orizontâi, a restedin juste jenfri doi pixel. Il risultât al è un contrast perfet, in particolâr cuant che si à a ce fâ cul blanc e neri. Il test al aparìs plui net. E je ancje une impostazion dome par che e jude soredut cui dispositîfs a basse risoluzion come i netbook. I caratars piçui a puedin aparî brututs cuant che il miorament al è ativât, ma cun cheste impostazion si varà in ogni câs il vantaç dal miorament pai editôrs di test e pal terminâl.
+Viôt la diference fate dal miorament in chestis caturis di schermi ingrandidis:
+ Miorament: disativât |  Miorament: ativât |
Al va evidenziât ancje che ducj i barcons di Magnify in cheste pagjine a son visualizâts cu lis varis opzions. Cussì si pues vê une impression gjenerâl e reâl des impostazions, confrontant par esempli il titul de schede in neret o il test "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+ +
+
+Gjenar di antialiasing
+Une altre tecniche par miorâ la visualizazion e je l' Antialiasing, che al supuarte dute la grafiche vetoriâl e il test. Al pulìs lis liniis cambiant il colôr di cierts pixel. A son doi metodis par fâlu:
+ al cambie la intensitât dai pixel tal ôr.
+ al fâs un lavôr ancjemò miôr, in particolâr cui visôrs LCD (a elevade risoluzion). Al puest de intensitât di un pixel, al cambie il so colôr; chest al sposte un ôr di une frazion di pixel, parcè che i schermis LCD a produsin ogni pixel cuntun component ros, un vert e un blu.
Di gnûf, i doi diferents metodis cu lis caturis di schermi ingrandidis:
+Scjale di grîs, Miorament glifs: disativât |  Sub-pixel LCD, Miorament glifs: disativât |
L'Antialiasing basât su sub-pixel al da un lizêr lusôr colorât ai ogjets. Une robe che no plâs a ducj. In Haiku tu puedis miscliçâ i doi metodis di antialiasing e cjatâ la tô juste impostazion, doprant un cursôr.
+Se tu ativis il miorament dai glifs adun cu la modifiche dai sub-pixel LCD, cambiant il codiç sorzint e tornant a compilâ, cussì al è ce mût che al aparirà confrontât cul miorament dai glifs adun cu la Scjale di grîs:
+Scjale di grîs, Miorament glifs: ativât |  Sub-pixel LCD, Miorament glifs: ativât |
In bas tal panel a son doi botons:
+| al puarte dut ai valôrs predefinîts. | ||
| al puarte indaûr lis impostazions a chês che a jerin ativis cuant che si à inviât lis preferencis Aspiet. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Fonts
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Backgrounds | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces +~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - al salve la posizion dal barcon dal panel |
Par ogni spazi di lavôr, tu puedis stabilî come fonts un colôr o une imagjin par ogni cartele e pal Scritori.
+
+Il menù superiôr al specifiche se lis modifichis a vegnin aplicadis dome al spazi di lavôr atuâl, a ducj i spazis di lavôr, a une cartele specifiche opûr come predefinidis par ogni gnove cartele.
+Sot di chel tu puedis assegnâ une imagjin o selezionâ se tu desideris vê dome un fonts colorât. Lis imagjins a puedin ancje jessi strissinadis e moladis inte anteprime a çampe.
+Se tu stâs doprant une imagjin, tu âs di decidi il plaçament:
+| ti permet di specificâ lis coordenadis. Tu puedis strissinâ la figure ator inte anteprime a çampe opûr inserî X e Y a man. | ||
| al centre la figure tal mieç dal schermi. | ||
| al slargje la figure, cence tignî cont des sôs proporzions, fintremai che nol jemple il schermi. | ||
| al jemple il schermi ripetint la figure. |
Ativant al met un fin contor tor ator des etichetis des iconis.
+Indiche se il jessi neri o blanc dal test atuâl di une etichete di icone al dipent de impostazion dal seletôr dal colôr. Un colôr scûr al met a blanc il test, un colôr clâr lu met a neri. Duncje, se tu assegnis pal fonts une imagjin une vore clare, tu varessis ancje di meti il seletôr dal colôr suntun colôr clâr, par podê vê la pussibilitât di lei lis etichetis des iconis in neri. (O doprâ la opzion contor parsore.)
+Il colôr selezionât al è ancje rifletût te applet Spazis di lavôr, che e ignore lis imagjins come fonts.
| al puarte indaûr lis impostazion a chês che a jerin ativis cuant che si à inviât lis preferencis Fonts. | ||
| al apliche lis tôs modifichis. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
DataTranslations
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/DataTranslations | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/* - Ogni Tradutôr al cree il so file di configurazion achì, daspò vê modificât lis sôs impostazions predefinidis. +~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Al memorize la posizion dal barcon. |
Ogni aplicazion e à la capacitât di vierzi e salvâ ogni formât di file che di chei al è instalât un Tradutôr. Lis impostazions par chescj Tradutôrs a son configuradis intes Preferencis - Traduzion dâts.
+
+In base aes sôs capacitâts, ogni Tradutôr al ufrìs impostazions diferentis. Se no altri tu varâs un boton che al vierzarà un barcon cui ricognossiments e il percors di instalazion.
+La tabele chi sot ti darà une panoramiche dai Tradutôrs predefinîts e lis lôr opzions plui utilis.
| Lis dimensions di imagjin validis a son 16, 32, 48, 128, 256, 512, 1024 (RGB32 e RGBA32) | |
| 24bit, no comprimût, cence trasparence | |
| Formât HDR (ampli spetri dinamic) di ILM | |
| 8bit, compression cence pierditis, trasparence +Tu puedis ridusi la dimension dal file limitant il numar di colôrs doprâts e la palete. +Tu puedis scrivi lis imagjins cu la trasparence, o doprant in automatic il canâl alpha o configurant a man il valôr RGB che al deventarà trasparent. | |
| Tradutôr pal formât des iconis vetoriâls di Haiku | |
| 24bit, comprimût, cence trasparence +Chi, di norme ti interesse dome pe cualitât dal file in jessude. | |
| 24bit, comprimût, cence trasparence +In diplui ae cualitât dal file in jessude tu puedis ancje configurâ une slissadure (smoothing) che e diminuirà i artefats di compression ma e pues meti un pôc fûr fûc la figure. | |
| 24bit, no comprimût, cence trasparence, formât PC Paintbrush Exchange | |
| 32bit, compression cence pierditis, trasparence +Il tradutôr al ridûs ducj i strâts a un sôl strât bitmap. | |
| 32bit, compression cence pierditis, trasparence | |
| 24bit, no comprimût, cence trasparence, formât Portable PixMap | |
| fin a 48bit, no comprimût, cence trasparence | |
| Test formatât | |
| 24bit, compression cence pierditis opzionâl, trasparence | |
| Test sempliç cun formatazion archiviade tai atribûts | |
| 32bit, compression cence pierditis opzionâl, trasparence | |
| 24bit, compression cence pierditis opzionâl, strâts, trasparence | |
| formât di imagjin a 8-bit YUV 4:2:0, comprimût, cence trasparence | |
| Lis dimensions di imagjin validis a son 16, 32, 48 | |
| 32bit, strâts, trasparence, dâts di vetôr/pixel |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Deskbar
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Deskbar | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Deskbar_settings +~/config/settings/Deskbar_security_code |
Il panel des preferencis di Deskbar al è ancje disponibil dal Deskbar. Lis sôs impostazions a son spiegadis tal argoment su Deskbar.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
|
+ Creating a new e-mail account + Account settings + Setting up incoming e-mail + Setting up outgoing e-mail + Notifications and e-mail filters + Setting up the Mail Service + |
E-mail
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/E-mail | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Mail/* |
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
+The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
+
+Creating a new e-mail account
+Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
+You start by clicking the button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
+First, you set how you get your mail, via or .
+Now you enter your E-mail address, Login name and Password, give an Account name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real name.
+If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses. If that is not the case, clicking will open another window to enter this information by hand:
+
+You first set the Server name, Login type and Connection type for the incoming mail, below that for the outgoing mail. You should find the necessary information on your email provider's website.
+See below for more info about the various settings and additional options.
+
+Account settings
+By selecting the name of an account in the left list, you can change some general settings:
+
+The Account name is the name that's shown for example in the list of accounts in the E-mail preferences. Real name is the name someone sees when she gets mail from you. Return address is the email address that is used when someone replies to your mail. Normally that is the same address you've sent your email from.
+If you'd like to use an email account to only send or only receive email, you can de/activate that usage by right-clicking the account's name in the leftside list to set the checkmarks accordingly.
+ +
+
+More on setting up incoming e-mail
+Click on under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.
+
+First is the address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+Then you enter your login information, Login name and Password, and if necessary change the Login type from the default to for authentication.
+If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to and only locally.
+If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to locally. You can specify to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
+Also, you can opt to only a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
+You can change the Destination of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
+ + +
+
+More on setting up outgoing e-mail
+Click on under your account's name to set up how e-mails are sent.
+
+First is the SMTP server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+If you need to login, you change the Login Type to and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with for identification.
+As with incoming mail, you can also change the Destination of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
+ +
+
+Notifications and other e-mail filters
+Notifications for newly arrived email and methods to sort and filter emails are found in under an account's name. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other and rearrange them by drag & dropping them to their new position.
+Currently there are three you can add. After adding a filter, you have to select it to see its options.
+
+Spam filter (AGMS Bayesian)
+
+The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
+You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
+Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
Together with the following , you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+ +
+
+Rule filter
+
+This filter compares the mail header to a search pattern and performs some action according to the rules you set up.
+ With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are available:
| + | the name of the sender | |
| + | the e-mail address of the sender | |
| + | your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account) | |
| + | the e-mail address replies are sent to | |
| + | the date and time the mail was received | |
| + | the subject line | |
| + | addresses of anyone receiving a carbon copy (Cc) | |
| + | the name of the e-mail's account | |
| + | The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail. | |
| + | is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent") | |
| + | essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd: | |
| + | depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam" | |
| + | this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065. |
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
+With the pop-up menu below it, you assign an action when the pattern matches. You can move or delete a mail, set the status to "Read" or anything else or set the e-mail account you'll reply with.
+ +
+
+New mails notification
+
+There are several ways you can choose to be notified of newly arrived email. Under you find a number of options that can be combined as well:
+| + | No notification | |
| + | Plays the sound file of the "New E-mail" event set in the Sounds preferences for every new email | |
| + | Shows an alert window for every new email | |
| + | Blinks some LEDs like the caps-lock indicator | |
| + | Shows one alert window for all new mails | |
| + | Plays the sound file of the "New E-mail" event set in the Sounds preferences once for new mail | |
| + | Shows the log window |
+
+Outgoing Mail Filters
+At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
+
It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
+
+Setting up the Mail Service
+Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
+
+Under Mail checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
+If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that and also to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up , , or .
+Make sure to or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
+will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
+From that menu, you can also , or edit .
+If you hold down SHIFT when invoking the context menu, you'll get additional commands:
+| + | Offers a submenu to check only one specific account | |
| + | Allows you to send pending mails without also checking for new mails | |
| + | Quits the whole email infrastructure (mail_daemon) |
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
FileTypes
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/FileTypes | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/FileTypes settings +~/config/settings/beos_mime/* - Stores all MIME types as folders. |
Please refer to topic Filetypes and the workshop Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries that explains most of this preference panel.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Keyboard
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Keyboard | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Keyboard_settings |
+Set the repeat rate, and the delay until a held down key starts to repeat. You can test your settings in the text field at the bottom.
+| al puarte dut ai valôrs predefinîts. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the Keyboard preferences. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Keymap
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Keymap | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Location of user modified keymaps. +~/config/settings/Key_map |
+To the right, the Keymap window shows a representation of your keyboard. When you press a key, the corresponding key is darkened and the assigned symbol is entered into the Sample and Clipboard text field at the bottom. From there you can also copy and paste it into a document.
+Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but are also useful when looking for a special symbol used in other languages. For example, you can switch the keymap to "French", find the "ç" and copy it into your mail to François. (Though you'll find the "cedil" also in other keymaps...)
Pressing modifier keys like SHIFT, CONTROL or OPTION changes the displayed keyboard accordingly.
+Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
+Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+| for setting the above mentioned blue keys. | ||
| for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT). |
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap in the keyboard representation: drag & drop one key on another and they switch places.
+Alternatively to this drag & dropping of keys, there's the menu that opens this window:
+
+Here, you can assign keys to their respective roles or even completely disable the role of a key. You can even assign the same key to different roles, though that's not a good idea most of the time and you'll be warned by a small exclamation mark beside the pop-up menus if you do that.
+Pressing applies your changes and closes the window.
When you're done you can save the result from the menu . Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via .
+To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the menu.
+The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
+Finally, there's a button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
+ +
+
+Advanced keymap manipulation
+There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
+You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
+keymap -d > MyKeymap+
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
+At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use the Shortcuts preferences.
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+keymap -s < MyKeymap+
If you'd like to import this keymap into the Keymap panel, you have to compile it first to a binary format:
+keymap -c < MyKeymap+
This will produce a file keymap.out which you can load into Keymap via its menu. By the way, the keymap command is able to load this binary format as well: keymap -l < keymap.out
+This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
+ +#!/bin/keymap -s
+#
+# Raw key numbering for 101 keyboard...
+#
+#
+# [esc] [ f1] [ f2] [ f3] [ f4] [ f5] [ f6] [ f7] [ f8] [ f9] [f10] [f11] [f12]
+# 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0a 0x0b 0x0c 0x0d
+#
+# [ ` ] [ 1 ] [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] [ 5 ] [ 6 ] [ 7 ] [ 8 ] [ 9 ] [ 0 ] [ - ] [ = ] [bck]
+# 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1a 0x1b 0x1c 0x1d 0x1e
+#
+# [tab] [ q ] [ w ] [ e ] [ r ] [ t ] [ y ] [ u ] [ i ] [ o ] [ p ] [ [ ] [ ] ] [ \ ]
+# 0x26 0x27 0x28 0x29 0x2a 0x2b 0x2c 0x2d 0x2e 0x2f 0x30 0x31 0x32 0x33
+#
+# [cap] [ a ] [ s ] [ d ] [ f ] [ g ] [ h ] [ j ] [ k ] [ l ] [ ; ] [ ' ] [ enter ]
+# 0x3b 0x3c 0x3d 0x3e 0x3f 0x40 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x45 0x46 0x47
+#
+# [shift] [ z ] [ x ] [ c ] [ v ] [ b ] [ n ] [ m ] [ , ] [ . ] [ / ] [shift]
+# 0x4b 0x4c 0x4d 0x4e 0x4f 0x50 0x51 0x52 0x53 0x54 0x55 0x56
+#
+# [ctr] [cmd] [ space ] [cmd] [ctr]
+# 0x5c 0x5d 0x5e 0x5f 0x60
+#
+# NOTE: On a Microsoft Natural Keyboard:
+# left option = 0x66
+# right option = 0x67
+# menu key = 0x68
+# NOTE: On an Apple Extended Keyboard:
+# left option = 0x66
+# right option = 0x67
+# keypad '=' = 0x6a
+# power key = 0x6b
+Version = 3
+CapsLock = 0x3b
+ScrollLock = 0x0f
+NumLock = 0x22
+LShift = 0x4b
+RShift = 0x56
+LCommand = 0x5d
+RCommand = 0x60
+LControl = 0x5c
+RControl = 0x00
+LOption = 0x66
+ROption = 0x5f
+Menu = 0x68
+#
+# Lock settings
+# To set NumLock, do the following:
+# LockSettings = NumLock
+#
+# To set everything, do the following:
+# LockSettings = CapsLock NumLock ScrollLock
+#
+LockSettings =
+# Legend:
+# n = Normal
+# s = Shift
+# c = Control
+# C = CapsLock
+# o = Option
+# Key n s c o os C Cs Co Cos
+Key 0x00 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x01 = 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b
+Key 0x02 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x03 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x04 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x05 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x06 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x07 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x08 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x09 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0a = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0b = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0c = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0d = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0e = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0f = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x10 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x11 = '^' 0xc2b0 '' ' ' '' '^' 0xc2b0 ' ' ''
+Key 0x12 = '1' '!' '' ' ' '' '!' '1' ' ' ''
+Key 0x13 = '2' '"' '' 0xc2b2 '' '"' '2' 0xc2b2 ''
+Key 0x14 = '3' 0xc2a7 '' 0xc2b3 '' 0xc2a7 '3' 0xc2b3 ''
+Key 0x15 = '4' '$' '' ' ' '' '$' '4' ' ' ''
+Key 0x16 = '5' '%' '' ' ' '' '%' '5' ' ' ''
+Key 0x17 = '6' '&' '' ' ' '' '&' '6' ' ' ''
+Key 0x18 = '7' '/' '' '{' '' '/' '7' '{' ''
+Key 0x19 = '8' '(' '' '[' '' '(' '8' '[' ''
+Key 0x1a = '9' ')' '' ']' '' ')' '9' ']' ''
+Key 0x1b = '0' '=' '' '}' '' '=' '0' '}' ''
+Key 0x1c = 0xc39f '?' '' '\\' '' '?' 0xc39f '\\' ''
+Key 0x1d = 0xc2b4 '`' '' ' ' '' 0xc2b4 '`' ' ' ''
+Key 0x1e = 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08
+Key 0x1f = 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05
+Key 0x20 = 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01
+Key 0x21 = 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b
+Key 0x22 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x23 = '/' '/' '/' '/' '/' '/' '/' '/' '/'
+Key 0x24 = '*' '*' '*' '*' '*' '*' '*' '*' '*'
+Key 0x25 = '-' '-' '-' '-' '-' '-' '-' '-' '-'
+Key 0x26 = 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09
+Key 0x27 = 'q' 'Q' 0x11 '@' '' 'Q' 'q' '@' ''
+Key 0x28 = 'w' 'W' 0x17 ' ' '' 'W' 'w' ' ' ''
+Key 0x29 = 'e' 'E' 0x05 0xe282ac '' 'E' 'e' 0xe282ac ''
+Key 0x2a = 'r' 'R' 0x12 ' ' '' 'R' 'r' ' ' ''
+Key 0x2b = 't' 'T' 0x14 ' ' '' 'T' 't' ' ' ''
+Key 0x2c = 'z' 'Z' 0x1a ' ' '' 'Z' 'z' ' ' ''
+Key 0x2d = 'u' 'U' 0x15 ' ' '' 'U' 'u' ' ' ''
+Key 0x2e = 'i' 'I' 0x09 ' ' '' 'I' 'i' ' ' ''
+Key 0x2f = 'o' 'O' 0x0f ' ' '' 'O' 'o' ' ' ''
+Key 0x30 = 'p' 'P' 0x10 ' ' '' 'P' 'p' ' ' ''
+Key 0x31 = 0xc3bc 0xc39c 0x1b ' ' '' 0xc39c 0xc3bc ' ' ''
+Key 0x32 = ' ' '*' 0x1d '~' '' '*' ' ' '~' ''
+Key 0x33 = '#' '\'' 0x1c ' ' '' '\'' '#' ' ' ''
+Key 0x34 = 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f
+Key 0x35 = 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04
+Key 0x36 = 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c
+Key 0x37 = 0x01 '7' 0x01 0x01 '7' 0x01 '7' 0x01 '7'
+Key 0x38 = 0x1e '8' 0x1e 0x1e '8' 0x1e '8' 0x1e '8'
+Key 0x39 = 0x0b '9' 0x0b 0x0b '9' 0x0b '9' 0x0b '9'
+Key 0x3a = ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
+Key 0x3b = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x3c = 'a' 'A' 0x01 ' ' '' 'A' 'a' ' ' ''
+Key 0x3d = 's' 'S' 0x13 ' ' '' 'S' 's' ' ' ''
+Key 0x3e = 'd' 'D' 0x04 ' ' '' 'D' 'd' ' ' ''
+Key 0x3f = 'f' 'F' 0x06 ' ' '' 'F' 'f' ' ' ''
+Key 0x40 = 'g' 'G' 0x07 ' ' '' 'G' 'g' ' ' ''
+Key 0x41 = 'h' 'H' 0x08 ' ' '' 'H' 'h' ' ' ''
+Key 0x42 = 'j' 'J' 0x0a ' ' '' 'J' 'j' ' ' ''
+Key 0x43 = 'k' 'K' 0x0b ' ' '' 'K' 'k' ' ' ''
+Key 0x44 = 'l' 'L' 0x0c ' ' '' 'L' 'l' ' ' ''
+Key 0x45 = 0xc3b6 0xc396 '' ' ' '' 0xc396 0xc3b6 ' ' ''
+Key 0x46 = 0xc3a4 0xc384 '' ' ' '' 0xc384 0xc3a4 ' ' ''
+Key 0x47 = 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a
+Key 0x48 = 0x1c '4' 0x1c 0x1c '4' 0x1c '4' 0x1c '4'
+Key 0x49 = '' '5' '' '' '5' '' '5' '' '5'
+Key 0x4a = 0x1d '6' 0x1d 0x1d '6' 0x1d '6' 0x1d '6'
+Key 0x4b = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x4c = 'y' 'Y' 0x19 ' ' '' 'Y' 'y' ' ' ''
+Key 0x4d = 'x' 'X' 0x18 ' ' '' 'X' 'x' ' ' ''
+Key 0x4e = 'c' 'C' 0x03 ' ' '' 'C' 'c' ' ' ''
+Key 0x4f = 'v' 'V' 0x16 ' ' '' 'V' 'v' ' ' ''
+Key 0x50 = 'b' 'B' 0x02 ' ' '' 'B' 'b' ' ' ''
+Key 0x51 = 'n' 'N' 0x0e ' ' '' 'N' 'n' ' ' ''
+Key 0x52 = 'm' 'M' 0x0d 0xc2b5 '' 'M' 'm' 0xc2b5 ''
+Key 0x53 = ',' ';' ',' ' ' '' ';' ',' ' ' ''
+Key 0x54 = '.' ':' '.' ' ' '' ':' '.' ' ' ''
+Key 0x55 = '-' '_' '' ' ' '' '-' '_' ' ' ''
+Key 0x56 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x57 = 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e
+Key 0x58 = 0x04 '1' 0x04 0x04 '1' 0x04 '1' 0x04 '1'
+Key 0x59 = 0x1f '2' 0x1f 0x1f '2' 0x1f '2' 0x1f '2'
+Key 0x5a = 0x0c '3' 0x0c 0x0c '3' 0x0c '3' 0x0c '3'
+Key 0x5b = 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a
+Key 0x5c = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x5d = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x5e = ' ' ' ' 0x00 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
+Key 0x5f = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x60 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x61 = 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c
+Key 0x62 = 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f
+Key 0x63 = 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d
+Key 0x64 = 0x05 '0' 0x05 0x05 '0' 0x05 '0' 0x05 '0'
+Key 0x65 = 0x7f ',' 0x7f 0x7f ',' 0x7f ',' 0x7f ','
+Key 0x66 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x67 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x68 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x69 = '<' '>' '' '|' '' '<' '>' '|' ''
+Key 0x6a = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x6b = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x6c = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x6d = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x6e = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x6f = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x70 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x71 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x72 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x73 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x74 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x75 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x76 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x77 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x78 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x79 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7a = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7b = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7c = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7d = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7e = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7f = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Acute ' ' = 0xc2b4
+Acute 'A' = 0xc381
+Acute 'E' = 0xc389
+Acute 'I' = 0xc38d
+Acute 'O' = 0xc393
+Acute 'U' = 0xc39a
+Acute 'Y' = 0xc39d
+Acute 'a' = 0xc3a1
+Acute 'e' = 0xc3a9
+Acute 'i' = 0xc3ad
+Acute 'o' = 0xc3b3
+Acute 'u' = 0xc3ba
+Acute 'y' = 0xc3bd
+Acute '' = ''
+Acute '' = ''
+Acute '' = ''
+AcuteTab = Normal Shift Option Option-Shift CapsLock CapsLock-Shift CapsLock-Option CapsLock-Option-Shift
+Grave ' ' = '`'
+Grave 'A' = 0xc380
+Grave 'E' = 0xc388
+Grave 'I' = 0xc38c
+Grave 'O' = 0xc392
+Grave 'U' = 0xc399
+Grave 'a' = 0xc3a0
+Grave 'e' = 0xc3a8
+Grave 'i' = 0xc3ac
+Grave 'o' = 0xc3b2
+Grave 'u' = 0xc3b9
+Grave '' = ''
+Grave '' = ''
+Grave '' = ''
+Grave '' = ''
+Grave '' = ''
+GraveTab = Normal Shift Option Option-Shift CapsLock CapsLock-Shift CapsLock-Option CapsLock-Option-Shift
+Circumflex ' ' = '^'
+Circumflex 'A' = 0xc382
+Circumflex 'E' = 0xc38a
+Circumflex 'I' = 0xc38e
+Circumflex 'O' = 0xc394
+Circumflex 'U' = 0xc39b
+Circumflex 'a' = 0xc3a2
+Circumflex 'e' = 0xc3aa
+Circumflex 'i' = 0xc3ae
+Circumflex 'o' = 0xc3b4
+Circumflex 'u' = 0xc3bb
+Circumflex '' = ''
+Circumflex '' = ''
+Circumflex '' = ''
+Circumflex '' = ''
+Circumflex '' = ''
+CircumflexTab = Normal Shift Option Option-Shift CapsLock CapsLock-Shift CapsLock-Option CapsLock-Option-Shift
+Diaeresis ' ' = 0xc2a8
+Diaeresis 'A' = 0xc384
+Diaeresis 'E' = 0xc38b
+Diaeresis 'I' = 0xc38f
+Diaeresis 'O' = 0xc396
+Diaeresis 'U' = 0xc39c
+Diaeresis 'Y' = 0xc5b8
+Diaeresis 'a' = 0xc3a4
+Diaeresis 'e' = 0xc3ab
+Diaeresis 'i' = 0xc3af
+Diaeresis 'o' = 0xc3b6
+Diaeresis 'u' = 0xc3bc
+Diaeresis 'y' = 0xc3bf
+Diaeresis '' = ''
+Diaeresis '' = ''
+Diaeresis '' = ''
+DiaeresisTab = Normal Shift Option Option-Shift CapsLock CapsLock-Shift CapsLock-Option CapsLock-Option-Shift
+Tilde ' ' = '~'
+Tilde 'A' = 0xc383
+Tilde 'O' = 0xc395
+Tilde 'N' = 0xc391
+Tilde 'a' = 0xc3a3
+Tilde 'o' = 0xc3b5
+Tilde 'n' = 0xc3b1
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+TildeTab = Normal Shift Option Option-Shift CapsLock CapsLock-Shift CapsLock-Option CapsLock-Option-Shift
+
+-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Locale
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Locale | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Locale settings |
Haiku's localization system does not only include replacing texts with their translations, but also more complex tasks such as formatting numbers, dates, and times in a way that matches your Locale preferences.
+
+Language
+Haiku has been translated to dozens of languages, unfortunately some translations are not complete yet. For that reason, you can choose more than one language as “Preferred languages”. If some text is missing in a translation, it's replaced with the words of the next preferred language. English is the default fallback (also when not listed).
+
+In this example, the preferred language is set to Spanish. The first fallback is Italian, and if the text is missing there too, it's back to default English.
+As you can see, expanding a language entry on the left side reveals sub-entries for specific variations or dialects of a language (if available).
+Formatting
+On the tab you can set up the formatting of date, time, number and currency formats independently from the settings of your preferred language.
+
+You may be a Spanish fellow located in the Italian speaking part of Switzerland. So, you'd prefer your system in Spanish, but numbers and currency formatted like at work: Swiss/Italian.
+If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of the modified dates of files, for example), you can override this time-specific formatting with the checkbox at the top to .
Granted, the above example is maybe not the most common scenario, but it demonstrates the flexibility of the system.
+
+Options
+The last tab provides an option that will . Disable the checkbox if you prefer the graphical interface localized, while retaining the original English names for preference panels, applications and standard folder names.
+
Changes are applied immediately, though currently running applications may require to be closed and restarted before showing the new setting.
+| al puarte dut ai valôrs predefinîts. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the Locale preferences. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Media
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Media | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Media/* +~/config/settings/System Audio Mixer +~/config/settings/MediaPrefs Settings - Stores the panel's window position. |
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Mouse
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Mouse | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Mouse_settings |
+First you set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRL ALT and a left-click.
+You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration. The test area below the mouse graphics can be used to check if the double-click speed meets your taste: if double-clicking a word doesn't select it, it's set too fast (or you'll have to get used to clicking quicker...).
+There are three that determine how windows react to clicks:
+| This is the default setting: you click a window and it gets focus and is raised to the top. | ||
| Clicking a window only gives it the focus, but won't raise it automatically. To do that, you'd have to either click on its title tab or border or click anywhere while holding the window management keys CTRL ALT. | ||
| The window under the mouse pointer automatically gets the focus. Actually raising it, is done as described in the |
Activating relieves you of having to first put the focus on an inactive window in order to trigger widgets like a button or menu. This bears the risk of unintentionally closing a window, for example, by accidentally hitting the close button when aiming for the window tab. On the other hand it speeds up your workflow considerably.
+All settings are immediately applied.
+| al puarte dut ai valôrs predefinîts. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Network
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Network | |
| Impostazions: | /boot/system/settings/network/ |
The Network preference is the one-stop panel to configure all available network devices and services. To the left is a collapsible list of your devices and services, the right has information or settings for the selected entry.
+At the bottom you find a checkbox to . brings back the settings that were active when you've started the panel.
Devices
+
+
+Here we see the wireless device, using the iprowifi4965 driver. From the pop-up menu you select the WLAN to connect to. After every WLAN name in the menu, you're shown a little icon representing the signal strength.
+Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every bootup. Select and it'll try to connect to the WLAN with the best signal around.
If you're connecting to a protected network, you'll be asked for the password and if to either allow that connection only once, or always, which will save the password so you won't be bothered to enter it in the future.
+The buttons below let you the device, or the connection.
+ +Beneath a device you find a list of the available protocols, IPv4 and IPv6:
+
+
+From the pop-up menu you set the mode to assign the vital network parameters , and . You can choose to dynamically get the configuration from your network (router etc.), or specify them yourself by selecting and pressing when finished.
+ +The settings for a tethered device are similar, without the WLAN connecting pop-up menu, obviously.
+ +Services
+DNS settings
+
+
+If you're using DHCP the IP address for a DNS server and the domain are provided by you network (router etc.). You can add and remove other DNS servers and adjust their priorities by moving them up and down in the list with the buttons to the right of it.
+ will activate your new settings.
FTP, SSH, Telnet
+ +
+
+Haiku provides a few servers that you can or . On the right side of the window, you'll find information on that particular server that you should heed: The FTP and the Telnet server are insecure and unencrypted. By default they're turned off and should only be turned on, if you're aware of the security risks.
+ +Settings files
+ +The network settings are found in the folder /system/settings/network/. Normally you don't have to care about those, other than maybe having to delete them to begin with a clean slate after things have gone terribly wrong...
+One file however can be really useful, especially when working from the Terminal. The hosts file lets you define aliases to specific IP addresses in the network. For example:
+127.0.0.1 localhost #loopback +192.168.178.3 NAS #Synology +192.168.178.102 XIOS #Mediaplayer+
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember it's IP address, but can simply enter:
+ftp NAS+ +
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Printers
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Printers | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/printers/* |
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Repositories
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Repositories | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Repositories_settings |
Repositories are collections of software packages. Set up by default, there's the Haiku repo with all of the operating system's packages and HaikuPorts, which provides a large number of ported and native Haiku software. There are several more repositories, curated by members of the Haiku community. Checkout Software Sites on the website.
+This is the preference panel to manage your respositories (you can open it also from HaikuDepot's menu):
+
+The first column in the list of known repositories shows if a repo is currently enabled. If it doesn't have a checkmark, it will not be queried by HaikuDepot or pkgman from the command line. Use the buttons to or the selected repositories, or double-click a repo to toggle the status.
+Depending on the size of the repository and the speed of the internet connection, enabling a repository may take a few seconds. If it takes longer, you're informed of pending tasks in the little text box above the buttons. If it takes unusually long, you'll be asked to either cancel or retry.
+To be able to remove a repository completely with the "" button, it has to be disabled.
+You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel:
+To add a new repository, just paste its URL into the text field. It'll be named "Unknown" until you enable it.
+-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Screen
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Screen | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces +~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode. +~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position. |
Each of your workspaces can have its own resolution, color depth and refresh rate.
+
+The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other menus contain all supported resolution, color depth and refresh rate settings.
+After clicking on , the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
+There's a key combination that always works, not only when the Screen preferences are open: SHIFT CTRL ALT ESC sets a fall-back video safe mode. Handy if your monitor doesn't report its capabilities correctly and your settings result in a distorted or black screen. Here too, an alert pops up and if you do nothing for 12 seconds or press ESC you'll revert back.
+On the left side of the window, you see a representation of your screen with the manufacturer and model it reports and it's resolution in dots per inch (dpi). It also shows the name of graphics card if it's supported by a driver. Otherwise it says "VESA", the quick fallback solution that works with pretty much every hardware.
+brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
+To the bottom left you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
+-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
ScreenSaver
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Screensaver | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/ScreenSaver_settings |
The panel of the ScreenSaver preferences is split into two tabs: +
+ +
+
+General
+
++
The top checkbox enables/disables the screen saver.
+With the slider below it, you control after how long an idle time the screen saver kicks in.
+
The next two sliders are only usable after you activated their checkboxes:
+One slider determines after how many minutes the screen is powered off.
+The other, after how many minutes you need a password to unlock your machine.
+
By clicking into different corners of the two screens at the bottom, you tell the system when to immediately start the screen saver or when to prevent it from kicking in when you rest the mouse in the indicated corner. Click in the middle of the screens to disable that feature again. +
+ +
+
+Screensavers
+
++
The second tab shows a list of all installed screen savers and their individual settings. You can test your settings with the button below the list.
+New screen savers that don't come as part of a regular .hpkg package, can be installed by copying them into their respective non-packaged folder (see topic Filesystem layout):
| /boot/system/non-packaged/add-ons/Screen Savers/ | for screen savers available to every user. | |
| /boot/home/config/non-packaged/add-ons/Screen Savers/ | for screen savers only available to yourself. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Shortcuts
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Shortcuts | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/shortcuts_settings +~/config/settings/Shortcuts_window_settings + |
Documentation is still missing. If you want to work on it, please announce it on the Documentation mailing list to avoid duplication.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Sounds
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Sounds | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Media/MediaFiles |
+You can assign sounds to certain events in the system. Just select the event from the list and choose a sound from the pop-up menu below.
+| will silence an event. | ||
| will open a file panel to find a new sound that isn't yet in the menu. |
You can use any format that's supported by the system. If MediaPlayer can deal with it, so can any other program.
+You can "pre-hear" an event's sound by selecting it and using the and buttons.
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Time
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Time | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/networktime settings - All the settings concerning synchronizing the time through the network +~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings - The setting of the hardware clock (local or GMT) +~/config/settings/Time settings - The time zone setting +~/config/settings/Time_preflet_window - The panel's window position etc. + |
The panel of the Time preferences is split into four tabs:
+ +
+
+Date and time
+
+On the left side, you can set the day of the month by simply clicking on it in the calendar. You change the month and year by clicking on it and using the up/down arrows to the right or the cursor keys on your keyboard.
+Similarly, you set the time at the right. Or simply move the hands of the clock directly.
+ +
+
+Time zone
+
+Simply find and choose your country in the list of continents and press . For countries with more than one time zone you'll have to expand one level deeper.
+To the right you'll find the time of the currently set time zone and the preview time of the the zone you've chosen.
Also on the right side is a setting for the hardware clock of your computer. There are two modes for the clock:
+| to display your local time, which you normally want if you dual-boot into Windows. | ||
| to display Greenwich Mean Time, which is the UNIX compatible setting. |
+
+Network time
+Setting date and time manually is pretty much obsolete if you're connected to the internet. There are public servers that supply very exact time signals.
+
+With the / buttons you can add/remove NTP-servers to/from the list.
+The checkboxes below tell the system to when synchronizing, not only the currently selected one, and to , so you can be sure you're clock always shows the correct time.
+You can if you accidentally deleted working NTP-servers and your clock manually. The synchronization can be achieved from the command line (or a script) as well:
+Time --update+ +
+
+Clock
+
+The last tab shows the options of the clock displayed in the Deskbar. You can disable the clock there completely with the top checkbox. The rest are equally self-explanatory.
+In every tab is a button that brings back the settings that were active when you started the Time preferences.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Touchpad
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Touchpad | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Touchpad_settings |
This panel offers several touchpad related settings that are interesting when you're running on a notebook.
+ +
+
+By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
+The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best if with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
+If you feel comfortable using this feature, you can dispense with setting scroll areas and instead use the whole pad for normal navigation.
At the bottom is another slider to set the tap click sensitivity. If your taps keep getting ignored, increase the sensitivity. If the system registers clicks all the time, while all you want is to move the mouse pointer, try decreasing it.
+| al puarte dut ai valôrs predefinîts. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the Touchpad preferences. |
Here is a tip that's not related to the Touchpad preferences, but fits the general topic:
+Did you know that you can do a drag and drop just by using the touchpad, i.e. not using the buttons? Just do a double click without lifting the finger after the second click. The picked up icon will stick to the mouse pointer and you can drag it around by moving your finger. Lifting your finger will drop the icon.
If your finger reaches a border of the touchpad while dragging an icon, but the mouse pointer hasn't yet reached the screen edge, how can you keep on dragging your icon? As soon as you lift your finger, the icon would be dropped.
+Depending on your hardware, there's a nifty feature: just leave your finger without lifting at the touchpad edge. The mouse pointer will keep on moving on auto-pilot.
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Tracker
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/Tracker | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/Tracker/TrackerSettings |
The Tracker preference panel is also available from every Tracker window with the menu .
+Its functions are discussed in the topic on Tracker.
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
VirtualMemory
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Posizion: | /boot/system/preferences/VirtualMemory | |
| Impostazions: | ~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory +~/config/settings/VM_data - Stores the panel's window position. |
Virtual memory let's the system swap out memory to harddisk, if the RAM can be used more sensibly for other things. So, even if you have lots of RAM, providing virtual memory is never a bad idea.
+
+You can set the size to even more than your physical memory size if needed. With today's huge harddisks, assigning the physical memory size shouldn't be a problem. Still, you can quickly adjust the size if your free space ever runs low. In that case you should also have a look at DiskUsage to find out what's eating up your diskspace.
+Normally, the swap file's written to your boot partition. If you often run into disk thrashing due to the virtual memory system swapping memory in and out, you can try to use a separate harddisk for you swap file. Simply another partition on the same harddisk with your system/data won't help.
+Upgrading your RAM is of course the most effective way to go...
| al puarte dut ai valôrs predefinîts. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the VirtualMemory preferences. |
| Tabele |
|
+ The Find window + Basic queries - "by name" + Advanced queries - "by attribute" + Even more advanced queries - "by formula" + The result window + Query templates + |
Queries
+ +A query is a file search based on file attributes and can be performed within Tracker or in Terminal. Queries are saved in /boot/home/queries/ and by default last seven days before being purged. Note, these aren't static result lists of your search, but are the query formulas which trigger a new search whenever you open them.
+Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can drill down a saved query just like any folder by right-clicking on it and navigating through the submenus.
+
+The Find window
+You start a query by invoking the menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is ALT F. You're presented with the Find window:
+
+-
+
Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as Query Template.
+Narrow down your search from to specific file types.
+- Define the search method:
-
+
- - a basic search by file or folder name +
- - an advanced search, you specify search terms for one or more attributes +
- - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term
+ Select which drives to search on.
+Enter the search term.
+The expander hides/unhides the additional options.
+Uncheck the checkbox if you don't want this query self-destruct after 7 days.
+Check if your query is supposed to .
+Optionally, enter a name for this query if you want to save it.
+You can drag & drop the icon anywhere to save a query. Doing that with the right mouse button, offers the option to save as template.
+
+
+Basic queries - "by name"
+If you simply want to find all files and folders on your mounted disks that match a certain pattern, simply leave the search method at , enter the search term into the text box and press ENTER.
+ +
+
+Advanced queries - "by attribute"
+You can create more advanced queries by searching within the attributes of specific file types. For that to work, these attributes have to be indexed.
+
+You start by setting the filetype from to, for example, and change the search method to .
+This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons and under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With and you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
+Let's do an email query as an example:
+
+This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Oswald has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "sufflé" or "impossible".
+As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
+A good way to cut down the number of search results.
+
+Even more advanced queries - "by formula"
+Typing in a formula query by hand is daunting and really quite unpractical. It still has its uses.
+Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
+
+Once more as text, edited for readability:
+(((((MAIL:from=="*[cC][lL][aA][rR][aA] [oO][sS][wW][aA][lL][dD]*") + &&(MAIL:when>=%2 months%)) + &&(MAIL:subject=="*[sS][uU][fF][fF][lL][éÉ]*")) + ||(MAIL:subject=="*[iI][mM][pP][oO][sS][sS][iI][bB][lL][eE]*")) + &&(BEOS:TYPE=="text/x-email"))+
What's the use?
+-
+
You could copy and paste the string into an email, forum or IRC for others to use or debug.
+You can use this method to construct a query in mode and then switch to mode, to comfortably generate a search string. Enclosed in single quotes, that string can then be used with the query command in the Terminal.
+You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
+
+
+The result window
+After you start a search, the Find window will be replaced by a result window. Here is an example that queried for "server":
+
+Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:
+-
+
You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.
+With or ALT G you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
+A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with .
+Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with .
+ + +
+
+Query templates
+If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
+By using the menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag & dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
+Team Monitor
+ +With CTRL ALT DEL you invoke the Team Monitor which lists all currently running programs.
+
+Programs that were launched by the system are blue, those started by the user black.
+Applications that are unresponsive, which is often a sign the program has crashed, are marked red. You can try to quit a program by selecting it and pressing (or either DEL or Q). If that doesn't work, try (or SHIFT DEL or K) instead.
You can summon a Terminal with OPT ALT T.
+If your Tracker or Deskbar crashed or froze, a new button appears (you may have to kill the offending team first): will restart Tracker and/or Deskbar for you.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Tracker Add-Ons
+ +Applications can install add-ons so they can be invoked easily on a selection of files from Tracker. Only the add-ons that can handle a specific filetype are presented under from the context menu or the menu of a Tracker window. Some add-ons don't necessarily need a file to work on and are thus always present.
+New Tracker add-ons that don't come as part of a regular .hpkg package, can be installed by copying them into their respective non-packaged folder (see topic Filesystem layout):
+| /boot/system/non-packaged/add-ons/Tracker/ | for add-ons available to every user. | |
| /boot/home/config/non-packaged/add-ons/Tracker/ | for add-ons only available to yourself. |
The file name of an add-on can be suffixed with a dash and capital letter, and is then available via keyboard shortcut. For example, Open Target Folder-O opens with ALT OPT O.
+Of course, you have to take care of possible shortcut collisions when deciding on a shortcut. You can't have the same for different add-ons.
Haiku's Tracker Add-Ons
+These Tracker Add-Ons come with every Haiku installation:
+| Background-B | +Opens the Background preferences to change the color or image of the Desktop or any folder. Invoked on an image file the Background panel is launched with that image already loaded as a potential background. |
| DiskUsage-I | +Starts the DiskUsage application with the according folder as basis. |
| FileType-F | +Invoked on a file, opens its specific FileType panel, otherwise the general FileTypes preferences are launched. |
| Open Target Folder-O | +Can only be used on a linked file and opens the folder that file lives in. |
| TextSearch-G | +Starts the TextSearch application to look for a string in the selected folder (and its subfolders). |
| ZipOMatic-Z | +A selection of files will be added to a zip archive, invoked without a selection opens a panel to create an archive via drag & drop. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
|
+ Mounting volumes + Navigating + Appearance + Tracker preferences + Working with files + Transaction status + |
Tracker
+ +The Tracker is the graphical interface to all your files. It lets you create new files and folders or find, launch or rename as well as copy or delete existing ones.
+Being an application like any other (the Desktop with its icons is really just a fullscreen window in the background), Tracker appears with its windows in the Deskbar and can be quit and restarted. The easiest way to quit and restart a crashed or frozen Tracker (or a wayward Deskbar) is to call the Team Monitor.
+ +
+
+Mounting Volumes
+In order to access a harddisk, CD, USB stick etc., you first have to mount the volume, that is, let the system know it's there. This is done with a right-click on the Desktop or an already mounted volume (like the boot disk) and choosing the volume from the submenu. You find the same menu in the Deskbar.
+
+There are also so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.
+The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.
+
+Navigating
+By default, when you double-click a folder, Tracker opens a new window while leaving the parent window open. This can quickly lead to an overcrowded desktop.
+You can prevent that by holding down the OPT key, which automatically closes the parent window.
+This is also true for keyboard navigation. For more on that, see topic Shortcuts and key combinations.
Moving through your folders is one of Trackers main purposes, just like the file managers on other platforms. Haiku's Tracker has some unique features that will help you doing that efficiently.
+ +
+Drilling down the submenus
+Instead of double-clicking your way down folder after folder, there's a better way to drill down:
+
+
+Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/home/config/.
+If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
A similar method can be used from any Tracker window:
+
+Click on the area in the lower left, where the number of items is listed, and you'll get submenus for every level above your current location. From there you can drill down through the folders as usual.
+Note, that the Desktop is always the topmost level as that is where Tracker shows mounted volumes. So, if you want to go to another disk, you first have to navigate to the top (Desktop) and cross over to your other disk from there.
+
You'll get the same submenu-navigating when you drag a file over a folder. After a short while of hovering, a submenu pops up and you can drill down to your destination. If you initiated the drag with the right mousebutton, you can choose between copying, moving or linking the file when you release the mouse.
+ +
+
+Jumping to files with type-ahead
+You may be familiar with the concept from file managers of other operating systems: typing the first few letters of a filename will jump to the first file matching these starting characters. Haiku took the idea a step further. If there isn't a file starting with those letters it will jump to the first file including the string anywhere in its name. And if there's nothing with the string in its filename, the attributes are searched next.
+
+In the above example, there are many files starting with "Haiku logo", rendering simpler approaches to typing ahead quite useless. In Haiku however, typing "web" jumps right to its first occurence in "Haiku logo - website". The characters you enter appear in the bottom left corner where you normally find the item count of all files in the folder. A second after entering a character, the display jumps back to normal and you're ready for a new type ahead search.
+
+
+Type-ahead filtering
+Instead of jumping to a file while typing, there's also the option to filter out all files not matching your type-ahead string. This can improve clarity dramatically, especially when dealing with crowded folders. By using SHIFT SPACE as delimiter, you can even filter on multiple strings.
+Contrary to type-ahead jumping, the filtering will stick until you press ESC or close the window (or leave the folder if you're using Single Window Navigation).
+This type-ahead filtering is set in the Tracker preferences.
+
+Appearance
+
+Tracker windows offer three different viewing modes from the menu:
+-
+
(ALT 1) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with ALT +/-.
+(ALT 2) - Small icons.
+(ALT 3) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide file attributes (see topic Attributes.)
+
The menu offers a number of other functions:
+-
+
(ALT Y) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
+- Only available in Icon or Mini icon view, a submenu allows to set the sorting order to various properties:
+-
+
, , , , , , ,
+ - Inverts the sorting order
+ (ALT K) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes which additionally sorts all icons according to the above selected criterium.
+
+(SHIFT ALT A) - Select files according to a regular expression.
+(ALT W) - Closes the window. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes which closes every Tracker window.
+(ALT Q) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
+
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete (ALT K). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
+The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.
+ +
+
+Tracker preferences
+ opens a panel that offers a number of settings that, where not obvious, should become clear once tried out. Since all settings are applied live, you'll immediately see the changes.
+
So, in short, the not so obvious settings:
-
+
- Decide if all mounted disks appear directly on the Desktop or in a window after clicking a single Disk icon sitting on the Desktop.
+- You can set , i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of its parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the OPT key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size. +
+
+Before you switch Tracker to , because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a Navigator where you can enter or copy & paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.
+Activating will filter the contents of a Tracker window while you type to only display the files matching your string in their name or any currently displayed attribute. See above.
+- Set the color of an optional indicator of free space that's shown besides a disk's icon.
+- Define when and what disks are mounted automatically, as described above under "Mounting volumes".
+
This panel, by the way, is also available as Tracker from Deskbar's .
+ +
+
+Working with files
+When invoked on a selected file, most of the menu commands are also offered in the context menu by right-clicking that file.
+As usual the commands are pretty clear.
+-
+
- Find a file or folder. See topic Query for more info.
+- Create a new folder or any other file based on a template. +
+
+Choosing opens the folder /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype text/plain. See topic Filetypes for more info.
+- A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype. +
+
+
+The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type text/plain. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here text/*. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the entry instead, a panel opens:
+ +
+Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here text/plain.
+-
+
This opens a panel that shows the meta data of a file and lets you edit its permissions. You can rename it by clicking on the file name at the top.
+
+The panel consists of three tabs:
+-
+
- : Shows standard data like size, date of creation/modification, file type and location. Click on the location path to open the files parent folder. The menu sets the preferred application to open this particular file. +
- : Lets you change owner, group and file permissions. +
- : Lists all extra file attributes with their value and type. +
+ , and - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.
+, and - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.
+, and - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding SHIFT while invoking the menu you can files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding SHIFT you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.
+- will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with wget which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu changes the item to which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.
+- offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic Tracker Add-ons for more information.
+
+
+Transaction status
+When you copy, move or delete files, Tracker shows its progress with a status window. If you initiate more than one transaction, each job gets its own status display.
+
+To the right are two buttons to pause or stop a transaction entirely. Sometimes it can be useful to temporarily pause a large transaction. For example, you may need to quickly launch a large application. Copying large amounts of data chokes your harddisk's IO bandwidth and thus delays your workflow.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Twitcher
+ +The Twitcher is a task switcher to jump between running applications and their windows.
+
+Just tap CTRL TAB to switch between the current and the last application/window. Tapping CTRL TAB very quickly will switch between all applications. Or press and hold CTRL TAB to go through all running applications by repeatedly hitting TAB or ←/→. If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as described and then go through its open windows with the ↑/↓ keys.
+You cycle through all an applications visible windows on the current workspace with CTRL ~ (which, depending on the keymap you're using, is the key below ESC).
+It's also possible to invoke the Twitcher with CTRL TAB and then use the mouse to choose the application/window you'll jump to when releasing the CTRL key.
+The Twitcher also offers a few more advanced keyboard shortcuts:
+| ESC | Aborts the twitching and returns to the formerly active window. | |
| Q | Quits the selected application. | |
| H | Hides all windows of the selected application. |
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
|
+ Haiku's mail system + Using custom statuses + Using queries + More tips + |
Workshop: Managing Email
+ +This workshop takes a look on how to manage email under Haiku. It assumes that the email services are correctly configured with the E-Mail preferences and you're familiar with the basic features of the Mail application.
+ +
+
+Haiku's mail system
+If you come to Haiku from other operating systems, you're probably used to big applications like MS Outlook or Mozilla's Thunderbird. You have to configure them by entering all the info on mail server addresses etc. and they use their own contacts database. They take care of sending and fetching email and store them in some big special file.
+Changing you email client can be a hassle with quite some ex/importing and converting going on. Using more than one client in parallel to check out what else is available is also not without the occasional kerfuffle.
Haiku's mail system is different. It breaks down into smaller separate modules.
+There's the mail_daemon that takes care of the communication with your mail servers. The E-Mail preferences is the one central point to configure your email accounts and how often they're checked, for example.
+Every message that is fetched or sent is saved as one single email file, with its header information (like sender, subject, date) and status (like New, Replied, Sent) in BFS attributes. This enables searching/filtering them with Haiku's fast queries.
+
+With every email being in a separate file, viewing them becomes just as easy as browsing through a folder (or query result) of images with ShowImage. Leaving the Tracker window open, you'll see the moving selection of the currently viewed file while you use the previous/next button to move through them.
+As they are independent files, using a viewer other than Haiku's Mail causes no problems whatsoever.
Similarly, creating a new message results in just another file that is handed to the mail_daemon that takes care of sending it off. Contact management is deferred to the People application.
+In a nutshell, where other mail clients do everything, from communicating with the mail servers to providing a view with all your mails and tools to search and filter them, Haiku uses a chain of smaller tools and general file management:
+-
+
The mail_daemon to fetch/send mail and save them as normal files.
+Tracker windows and queries to find and show email files.
+The Mail application to view email files and create new messages relying on system-wide contact management by the People app.
+
Especially using Tracker and queries to manage emails is a powerful idea. The experience you gain can be transferred to any other problem that is dealing with files. Be it images, music, video, contacts or any other documents, using Tracker is at the core of all file managing.
+Also, improvements in any of these system areas benefit not just emailing, but all applications that make use of them.
+
+Using custom statuses
+When you browse through your newly arrived email, you may want to come back to some of them later to think about it in more depth. While you could use Mail's menu to keep them in your "New messages" query, things tend to pile up that way...
+One solution is of course to just start a reply and save it as draft. But if you don't expect to write a reply and just want to re-read the mail later, that isn't ideal.
+
+Better use to create a new status and use that to categorize your mail. For example, you could call the status "Later", and then query for that when you find more time.
+Or you use different statuses for specific projects. For example, I created a status "HUG" (for "Haiku user guide") under which I collect every mail that may influence the contents of the user guide, like commit messages about code changes that alter or introduce some feature or anything else I feel could improve the user guide.
+In any case, try to keep the status name short. That way it always fits in a normally wide "Status" column in Tracker.
You don't have to open an email with the Mail application to set its status. With the Tracker add-ons Mark as Read and Mark as... you can select some email files and set their status in one go.
+ +
+
+Using queries
+Sure, you specify a folder to store all your email, you can open it et voilà, there's all you mail. But over time the folder becomes crowded and showing all will take longer and longer as thousands of files and their attributes have to be parsed and sorted. Also, most of the time you don't really care about two year old emails of Nigerian princes and their inheritory trouble ...
+Queries, to the rescue!
+By using queries, you can narrow down the view of your mails. Actually, the mailbox icon in the Deskbar uses queries.
+
+The submenu does a query for the status "Draft", which is set by Mail when you save a message.
+and are just links to regular folders (and not very useful in my opinion).
+The submenu is populated by a query for email with the status "New" (that same query is used to change the mailbox icon to show some letters in it, by the way).
+ +You can add your own queries (or folders, applications, scripts etc.) to that context menu too, by putting them or links to them into ~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links.
+
+
+Query examples
+Here are a few examples of useful queries:
+ +This finds all mails with the custom status "Later". |
+ +This finds all mails of the past 2 days. |
 +This finds all mails by Ingo Weinhold of the past 2 weeks. |
+ +This finds all posts from the Haiku commit list of the past 12 hours. |
+
+More tips
+-
+
If you don't save a query as "Query" but as "Query template", invoking it won't show the result window, but the Find... window instead. That way you can easily exchange the search string for the subject or sender, for example, or change a "2 days" time limit to "3 days".
+Activating "type-ahead filtering" in Tracker's preferences allows you to very quickly filter a query result even further. Often it's enough to query for all mails of the last 3 days and go with type-ahead filtering from there. The big advantage is, that you don't have to exactly specify which attribute to search for, as all displayed are considered when filtering.
+
+
-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
|
+ Preparations + Creating a custom filetype + Icon + File recognition + Description + Preferred Application + Extra Attributes + Indexing + Filling in the data + Querying the database + |
Workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries
+ +This is a workshop to show the use of Attributes, Queries, the Index and custom Filetypes. As an example, we build a database to keep track of our DVD library.
+ +
+
+Preparations
+Let's first decide what filetype and attributes would serve our needs. Originally, I planned to use a bookmark file with a link to the movie's IMdB page, but since Haiku didn't have a "bookmarkable" browser like BeOS' NetPositive at that time, I came up with this: The file itself will be a JPEG image for the movie cover.
+With WebPositive, Haiku now has a browser using bookmark files again, so you could as well use a bookmark file instead of an image as basic filetype for our database files.
+In any case, to these files we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to query it later (then we have to add it to the index) and if so, what type of attribute it should be. Numbers (int, float) can be evaluated differently than text (</=/> vs. is/contains/starts with).
Here are the attributes I'd like to see for my DVDs:
+-
+
- Movie title +
- Genre +
- URL to e.g. IMdB +
- Director/Cast +
- Plot +
- My rating from 1 to 10 +
- Coordinates in my shelf, e.g. A2, B3, so I find the DVD also in Real Life :) +
- If so, who's borrowed the disk... +
+
+Creating a custom filetype
+Start the Filetypes preferences, and click on the button below the hierarchical list on the left. A small dialog opens and you specify in which MIME Group your new filetype will reside. You can also create a completely new group. Let's put it into "applications" and set the "Internal name" to DVDdb.
+
+Now, a panel for your new DVDdb filetype opens:
+
+
+
+
+Icon
+Double-click the icon well to open Icon-O-Matic to design an icon for your filetype. You can also drag & drop an icon from the icon well of another type, maybe as starting point for a modified version.
+ +
+
+File recognition
+You can add suffixes like .txt, .jpg, .mp3 to recognize files by their extention. Useful when working with files from systems without MIME typing. We don't need that for our example.
+ +
+
+Description
+-
+
- Type name - Appears e.g. in the Attribute menu of Tracker windows and the "Kind" attribute of a file. +
- Description - A bit more detailed description. +
+
+Preferred application
+This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked.
+| opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover. | ||
| opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for. |
+
+Extra attributes
+Here we enter all the custom attributes we decided on in our preparations. Clicking the button opens a panel to enter all the data for the new attribute. You can edit an existing attribute with a double-click.
+
+-
+
Attribute name - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.
+Internal name - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.
+- Type - Defines the value the attribute can hold and therefore how it can be queried.
+
-
+
- for normal text +
- for binary data: 0 (false) or >=1 (true) +
- for integer numbers with different ranges:
+
-
+
- : ± 255 +
- : ± 65,535 +
- : ± 4,294,967,295 +
- : ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615 +
+ - for floating-point numbers, single precision +
- for floating-point numbers, double precision +
- for time and date format +
+
-
+
- Visible - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:
-
+
- - Left on "Default" if the values are to be displayed according to the attribute's "Type" (e.g. string/integer/float etc.). The other options are:
+
-
+
- - Can be used to show either one of two symbols, see below. +
- - Shows an integer as 1/60, e.g. "90" becomes "1:30". +
- - Shows a rating between 0 and 10 as star symbols. +
+ - - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker. +
- - Defines the two symbols used for a checkbox display. For example, "xo" will show a "x" for all values >0 and "o" for 0. +
- - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window. +
- - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned. +
- - Left on "Default" if the values are to be displayed according to the attribute's "Type" (e.g. string/integer/float etc.). The other options are:
+
Now, insert all the info for our attributes:
+| Internal Name | Attribute type | indexed? | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| DVDdb:title | text | yes | Movie title |
| DVDdb:genre | text | yes | Genre |
| DVDdb:url | text | no | URL |
| DVDdb:cast | text | yes | Director/Cast |
| DVDdb:plot | text | no | Plot |
| DVDdb:rating | int-32 | yes | Rating 1 to 10 |
| DVDdb:coord | text | no | Shelf |
| DVDdb:lent | text | yes | Lent to |
+
+Indexing
+Before we start entering data in our little DVD database, we should add certain attributes to the Index. Only indexed attributes can use Haiku's fast Queries.
+So, what will we be searching in the future? We probably won't ask "What's in the B4 coordinate in my shelf?" or "Does the IMdB URL or the plot of the movie contain the word 'pope-shenooda'?".
This leaves these attributes:
+| Internal Name | Attribute type |
|---|---|
| DVDdb:title | text |
| DVDdb:genre | text |
| DVDdb:cast | text |
| DVDdb:rating | int-32 |
To index them, we open a Terminal and simply add one attribute after the other:
+mkindex -t string DVDdb:title +mkindex -t string DVDdb:genre +mkindex -t string DVDdb:cast +mkindex -t int DVDdb:rating+
The -t option defines the type of attribute, which is "string" for all but the rating, which is an integer number.
+ +
+
+Filling in the data
+Now, everything's set and we can begin putting some data into our base.
+Since our basic file is a cover image, we go to some online resource like IMdB, look for our first movie and save the cover or movie poster in a new folder where we want to keep our DVDdb files.
Opening that folder we see a typical Tracker window with one JPEG in it. Right-clicking it, we change its filetype to application/DVDdb with the Filetype Addon. There's more info on this in the Filetypes document.
+Now, we activate all our DVDdb attributes from the menu of the Tracker window and rearrange the columns to our taste:
+
+By clicking on a yet empty attribute (or pressing ALT E) we enter editing mode and fill each attribute. With TAB and SHIFT TAB you can navigate between attributes.
+In our example, we usually start with a downloaded JPG cover and change its type to applications/DVDdb. There's another elegant way to produce a file to work with. Just copy an empty file of our filetype to /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates and rename it to DVDdb.
+Right-clicking into a Tracker window, you'll find a new entry under besides the default "New folder".
+ +
+
+Querying the database
+Several hours of grunt work later, we have a nice little database that you can query to find all your Christina Ricci movies that have a 7+ rating... :)
+You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.
+Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with .
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder and rename it to group/filetype, replacing slashes with underscores; in our case "applications_DVDdb".
+Open the new folder and paste in the layout with . Voilà:
+
+
+-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
| Tabele |
|
+ Joining a wireless network + Joining from the command line + Getting supported hardware to work + Tips + |
Workshop: Wireless networking
+ +Getting the networking to run is essential in today's need for permanent internet connection. As keeping up to date with all the different and ever changing hardware and drivers is quite impossible for a small project, Haiku relies on a FreeBSD compatibility layer for its networking drivers.
+This ensures a massive amount of supported hardware, though probably not 100% of what's out there. See FreeBSD 12.0's release hardware notes for a list of supported models.
+PCMCIA, CardBus, ExpressCard, USB and ISA devices still need more work to become functional.
+
+Joining a wireless network
+By default, Haiku will join the first unencrypted wireless network it finds after booting up. To connect to a specific network, you use the Desktop applet NetworkStatus.
+Right-click on its icon in the Deskbar and choose the network's public name (which is the "SSID" it broadcasts) from the context menu.
+
+A window opens where you enter the type of authentication (probably WPA/WPA2, WEP is not a secure encryption anymore!) and the password for that wireless network. Click to start the login process.
Depending on your hardware and network configuration this may take a while. You'll be kept informed of the progress by notifications:
+Once it reads "Ready" and the NetworkStatus icon in the Deskbar shows a green round light, the connection is established. If the notifications end in "No link" and a yellow triangle, something went wrong, probably an incorrect password.
+ +
+
+Joining from the command line
+If you prefer to use the command line or would like to use scripting or the ~/config/settings/boot/UserBootscript to automate things to join a specific network on bootup, there's the command ifconfig.
+Start a Terminal and enter the first line to scan for available wireless networks:
+ifconfig /dev/net/iprowifi3945/0 scan +name address signal auth +haiku-top 01:d0:19:a6:88:42 30 WPA +ArcorInternet123 00:20:12:a4:29:e1 15 WPA+
The path to your wireless network adapter has to be adjusted, of course.
+The output shows the public name (SSID), MAC address, signal strength and authentication method of all found networks.
To join a network, use this line and insert the respective public name (SSID) and password:
+ifconfig /dev/net/iprowifi3945/0 join {SSID} {password}
+Make sure the initial configuration of the wireless network adapter after booting up has finished, before issuing ifconfig commands or they might be ignored. Depending on your hardware and network configuration that may take a while. Watch those notifications...
+ +
+
+Getting supported hardware to work
+All supported modern wireless hardware works out of the box.
+ +A few quite old chipsets (Intel 2100/2200/2225/2915, Broadcom 43xx, Marvell 88w8335) require binary firmware modules that Haiku cannot include due to licensing issues, though. To get these wireless cards to work, a simple script is included which will retrieve and install all of the needed proprietary bits for you.
+Open a Terminal and type:
+install-wifi-firmwares.sh+
Now review the licenses and accept them to install all of the available firmware files.
+ +If you cannot obtain the binary firmware files via the install-wifi-firmwares.sh script (for example due to lack of internet connection within Haiku), you can also download this shell script, and run it from another OS that has wget and zip installed.
+Windows users need to have wget and zip for Windows installed in their default locations and use this batch script.
+The script will download the needed files and create a zip file that is to be extracted to Haiku's /boot. Once unpacked, open a Terminal and type:
install-wifi-firmwares.sh+
Review the licenses and accept them to install all of the now available firmware files.
+ +-
+
- Furlan
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Workspaces
+ +Workspaces are virtual desktops, complete with their own resolution, color depth and background. Up to 32 of these workspaces can be set from the Screen preferences.
+ +
+
+
+
+Switching workspaces
+You switch between workspaces by either clicking into the Workspaces applet (which is seen in the above image) or by using the keyboard shortcut ALT Fx, where "x" is the workspace number. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
+Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send you to the workspace it's in.
Another very convenient way is to use CTRL ALT ←/→/↑/↓ to navigate spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. If you additionally hold down SHIFT, the active window will move with you to the new workspace.
+You can switch back and forth between two workspaces with ALT ` (the actual key depends on the keymap you're using - it is the key below ESC). Again, holding SHIFT will take the active window with you.
+ +- Magyar
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/hu/applications/activitymonitor.html b/userguide/hu/applications/activitymonitor.html
index 36b010d5..59bba7d3 100644
--- a/userguide/hu/applications/activitymonitor.html
+++ b/userguide/hu/applications/activitymonitor.html
@@ -30,11 +30,13 @@
- Magyar
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/hu/applications/bepdf.html b/userguide/hu/applications/bepdf.html
index 2cd8f040..c3339b10 100644
--- a/userguide/hu/applications/bepdf.html
+++ b/userguide/hu/applications/bepdf.html
@@ -30,11 +30,13 @@
- Magyar
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/hu/applications/bootmanager.html b/userguide/hu/applications/bootmanager.html
index dd5b7d3d..7234dcf8 100644
--- a/userguide/hu/applications/bootmanager.html
+++ b/userguide/hu/applications/bootmanager.html
@@ -30,11 +30,13 @@
- Magyar
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/hu/applications/charactermap.html b/userguide/hu/applications/charactermap.html
index 629150f2..650069ab 100644
--- a/userguide/hu/applications/charactermap.html
+++ b/userguide/hu/applications/charactermap.html
@@ -30,11 +30,13 @@
- Magyar
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/hu/applications/cli-apps.html b/userguide/hu/applications/cli-apps.html
index 337bbe12..158386ff 100644
--- a/userguide/hu/applications/cli-apps.html
+++ b/userguide/hu/applications/cli-apps.html
@@ -31,11 +31,13 @@
- Magyar
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Polski
- Português
@@ -83,7 +85,7 @@ További információk az Indexek fejezetben.
Relating to package management: package, pkgman
- Magyar
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/hu/applications/debugger.html b/userguide/hu/applications/debugger.html
index a5873fef..fabe6033 100644
--- a/userguide/hu/applications/debugger.html
+++ b/userguide/hu/applications/debugger.html
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
+
+
+
+
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
will clean up after the crashed app but otherwise does nothing further.
+will start the Debugger for further investigation.
+creates a debug report which is saved as a text file on the Desktop and can be emailed to the developer of the crashed app or attached to a ticket at its bugtracker, if available.
+The debug report contains information on your hardware (type of CPU and used memory etc.), the exact version of Haiku and all available information on the state of the system that could be relevant to the crash.
+creates a possibly huge dump of the system's state. Better attach a regular debug report first when submitting a bug report and only provide a core file on request.
+DeskCalc understands much more than its simple keypad suggests.
+Besides the operators , -, *, /, %, ^ and the constants pi and e the following math functions are supported:
+!, acos, asin, atan, atan2, cbrt, ceil, cos, cosh, exp, floor, log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, tanh.
+
+Right-clicking offers these options:
++
Automatically activates the number block when launching DeskCalc. Switch between "rad" and "deg" as unit for angular measure. ALT 0 A minimal view mode that hides the keypad. ALT 1 The standard look of DeskCalc. ALT 2 Show additional buttons for advanced calculations.
+When it comes to user input, DeskCalc is quite tolerant:
+/, :, \ are all interpreted as division operators,
+*, x are valid symbols for multiplication.
+Also, be aware that . and , are both considered floating points, which means you mustn't use them as 1000-separators.
+You can resize the calculator until it fits your needs and then put it as Replicant onto the Desktop via drag & drop of the symbol in the bottom right corner. Make sure is activated in the Deskbar.
+The keypad can be colored with a drag & drop from any color well, e.g. from Icon-O-Matic.
+You can move up and down in a history of past calculations with ↑ and ↓.
+You can select DeskCalc's contents and drag & drop it into any application. Or you drop it into a Tracker window or onto the Desktop and a text file with that clipping is created there.
+Even better, the reverse is also possible:
+Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag & dropping them back into DeskCalc.
+Or you drag & drop a calculation directly out of an email onto DeskCalc.
+DeskCalc can be used in Terminal. Just put the expression in double quotes, like this:
+~> DeskCalc "sin(45)*(cos(12)+3.45)" +3.65365546732025461817951947270058
+Note: Used in the Terminal, DeskCalc will always use radians as unit for these trigonometric functions.
+- If the graphical representation of a file or folder comprises less than about 2° of a circle, it is excluded from the display. +
- The number of files that's reported for a folder includes files in subfolders too. A folder counts as a file. +
- DiskUsage ignores symbolic links. +
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
The pop-up menu lets you limit the list to individual categories like "Audio" or "Games".
+The text field filters the list to those packages that have all the entered (space-delimited) strings in their name or description.
+The checkbox to can be activated to further filter the results in the set category or of the entered search terms.
+The menu of the menu bar determines which repos are being queried. "Local" packages are the ones that were installed from somewhere other than an online repo; maybe from a USB thumb drive or downloaded from some website or a package that you've built yourself.
+: The package is currently installed and ready to be used.
+: The package exists in that repository and can be downloaded and installed. If there are any dependencies on other packages, you'll be informed of that while installing and get the choice of downloading/installing all that's necessary.
+: Pending is shown for a package that is queued for download/installation. While a package is downloaded, the progress is shown as percentage.
+: There's a newer version than your installed one available.
++
The first tab has a detailed description of the package, as well as screenshots and a contact address and URL of the team that maintains the packaged software, if available. Clicking the screenshot thumbnail will open it full-size in a new window
++
The second tab shows ratings and comments of users, if available.
+
+To the left is a statistic, showing the number of stars (1 to 5) the package got from how many users.
+In the middle are user comments with their nickname, the number of stars they gave the package and which version of the package they were rating or commenting on. You'll find more on how to rate a package yourself further down.
+ +
++
Here you find a detailed history of all the versions of the package that have been released so far, if the maintainer of the package provides that information.
++
The last tab shows all the files and folders a package contains. This only works for already downloaded packages.
+- use an all lower-case user name without special characters +
- use a password that's at least 8 characters long with at least 2 capitals and 2 numbers +
- provide a valid email address (if you want a new password sent to you in case you forgot it) +
- solve the captcha
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, shadows and the Haiku color palette.
+You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
+Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
+Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
+There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag & drop or copy & paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
+If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
+You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click & drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click & drag while holding SPACE.
+This is beta-quality software. Make backups or suffer the consequences!
+The Installer needs a prepared partition. You can use DriveSetup to create and format a partition, but cannot yet resize existing partitions. For that you'll have to use a GParted LiveCD or a similar tool for now.
+- Haiku can be added manually to the bootmanager GRUB. How that is done exactly is available as an online guide. +
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- type of installation (depending on the developer there might be more than one (standard) installation option). +
- Installation location (only entire partitions/hard disks can be chosen, not custom paths) +
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Customize your Terminal prompt +
- More prompt customizations +
- Enhancing bash +
- Custom keyboard shortcuts +
Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:
++
Inserts the location of the file, same as drag & dropping with the left mouse button. Changes to the folder of the dragged file. Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal. Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal. Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+You can open any file with its preferred application with the command open [filename]. This also works with the representation of the current (".") and parent ("..") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:
+open .
+- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Search the web for "IRC etiquette" to learn about the do's and don'ts of chatting. Without much searching, I found Getting help on IRC by Christoph Haas to be quite helpful.
+By registering your nickname you make sure nobody can pull any shenanigans and you gain the trust of the residents. See Freenode's FAQ on that matter.
+Set up a sound in Haiku's Sounds preferences to be notified if someone mentions your nickname. People don't always watch their IRC client screen. Putting the nickname of the person you're talking to at the beginning of what you're about to post increases your chance to be noticed. Similar to the Terminal, Vision supports tab-completion for nicknames, i.e. if you enter the starting letters of a nickname and press the tab key, Vision completes it with the first name that matches.
+- black - no new text +
- gray - new text, but nothing exciting (joins, parts, etc.) +
- green - someone has said something +
- red - someone has said something, and mentioned your nickname +
+Opens Vision's About window.
+
+
+Opens www.acronymfinder.com with your current html handler. (Note: If the file-handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
+
+Sets away status on current network. If no away reason is specified, it is set to 'BRB'. (be right back)
+
+
+Sets your status to 'back' on current network.
+
+
+Clears the contents of the current text buffer.
+
+
+Executes the specified ctcp command on a channel or nick.
+
+
+Opens a private dcc chat session with the specified nick.
+
+
+Sends a file to <nick>. If no file is specified, a File panel will open.
+
+
+De-ops or de-voices <nick(s)>.
+
+
+Like a private /ME, only <nick> can see it.
+
+
+Resolves the given IP or domain name.
+
+
+Quits Vision.
+
+
+Same as /AWAY [away-reason], but applies to all connected networks.
+
+
+Same as /BACK, but on applies to all connected networks.
+
+
+Opens www.google.com with your current html handler. (Note: If the file-handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
+
+Invites <nick> to the <channel>.
+
+
+Joins the <channel>. Provide a [channel-key] if necessary.
+
+
+Kicks <nick> from current channel. If [reason] is not specified, it will be set to the reason specified in Preferences.
+
+
+IRC operator command to disconnect a user from the network.
+
+
+Opens a new view which lists all the channels on the current network. [except hidden channels]
+
+
+Displays the channel modes of the current channel.
+
+
+Same as , but on current channel.
+
+
+Same as , but on current channel.
+
+
+Displays: * {YourNickname} <text>.
+
+
+Sets mode for <nick(s)> on <channel>.
+e.g.
+or
+
+
+Sets the mode of <channel>. (Note: Commata just for optical separation.)
+e.g.
+
+
+Sends a <message> to <nick>.
+
+
+Displays all channels and all nicks of the network in the network window. (Careful with this one)
+
+
+Displays nick(s) in <channel>.
+
+
+Changes your nick to <newnick>.
+
+
+Sends a notice to <nick> with the given <message>.
+
+
+Adds <nick(s)> to your notify list.
+
+
+Executes the given <app>. If more than one application is provided, they will be executed in a pipe.
+e.g. opens a new Terminal, and afterwards StyledEdit
+or displays the contents of your ~/Downloads/ directory in the current window (Attention!)
+
+
+Ops or voices to <nick(s)>.
+
+
+Leaves current channel or network.
+
+
+Pings the <nick> and returns the ping-time. Equivalent to .
+
+
+Opens a query window on <nick>, optionally along with a [message].
+
+
+Quits current network. If [custom-quit-message] is not specified, the default set in Preferences will be used.
+
+
+Sends a raw IRC command.
+
+
+Will reconnect you to the current network if the 47 automatic reconnection attempts have failed.
+
+
+Causes current thread to sleep for the specified time ; for future scripting use.
+
+
+IRC operator command to disconnect a server.
+
+
+Returns local time of <nick>. Equivalent to
+
+
+Displays the topic of the current channel or, if provided, of <channel>.
+
+
+Sets the topic of <channel> to <new-channel-topic>.
+
+
+Same as , but on current channel.
+
+
+Removes <nick(s)> from your notify list.
+
+
+Displays the systems uptime. If [-l] is specified, the uptime will be echoed locally, and not sent to the network.
+
+
+Returns the client-version of <nicks> IRC-client. Equivalent to .
+
+
+Opens <url> with your current html handler. (Note: If the handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
+
+Opens www.m-w.com (Merriam Webster) with your current html handler. (Note: If the handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
+
+Displays the Vision uptime. If [-l] is specified, the uptime will be echoed locally, and not sent to the network.
+
+
+IRC operator command that sends a wallops message (visible to those with umode w active).
+
+
+Returns whois information of <nick>.
+-
+
New tabs are created with the + button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the < > scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The ∨ button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.
+ Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background. Holding SHIFT while middle-clicking, opens it in the foreground.
+From the menu you can and of a page. There's also an option to , leaving all images with their original size.
+If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.
+-
+
While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with ↑ or ↓. ENTER will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.
+Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.
+ Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.
+shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.
+BEOS:TYPE holds the file type as a MIME string, here "application/x-person". It determines the default icon and the application that opens the file when you e.g. double click it.
+"_trk/pinfo_le" is the attribute with which Tracker keeps track of a file's icon position.
Activating will prevent most servers, daemons and the UserBootscript from being started.
+Activating will prevent using any add-ons (drivers, translators, etc.) you have installed in the user hierarchy under your Home folder.
+If activating solves your troubles by falling back to VESA graphics, you can make the setting permanent by removing the # of the line #fail_safe_video_mode true in the text file /boot/home/config/settings/kernel/drivers/kernel.
+If the offending driver, add-on etc. is installed in the system hierarchy, things get a bit more complicated, because that area is read-only. Here, the comes into play. With it, you can navigate through the whole system hierarchy and disable the component that's messing things up for you by checking an entry with the SPACE or RETURN key. ESC returns you up one level to the parent directory.
+Online, there's the article How to Permanently Blacklist a Package File showing how to make that setting stick.
+Under you can specify what former "version" of Haiku to boot. Every time you un/install a package, the old state is saved and you can boot into it by choosing it from the list presented in the boot loader options.
+So, if you encounter boot problems after installing some package, boot a Haiku state from before that time and uninstall the offending package.
+- Haiku packages (.hpkg) +
- Old BeOS archives (.zip and .pkg) +
- Haiku's applications +
- ActivityMonitor +
- BootManager +
- CharacterMap +
- CodyCam +
- Debugger +
- DeskCalc +
- DiskProbe +
- DiskUsage +
- DriveSetup +
- Expander +
- HaikuDepot +
- Icon-O-Matic +
- Installer +
- Magnify +
- MediaPlayer +
- MidiPlayer +
- LegacyPackageInstaller +
- People +
- PoorMan +
- Screenshot +
- ShowImage +
- SoftwareUpdater +
- SoundRecorder +
- StyledEdit +
- Terminal +
- TextSearch +
- TV +
- WebPositive +
- Haiku's commandline applications +
- Bundled applications +
- LaunchBox +
- NetworkStatus +
- PowerStatus +
- ProcessController +
- Workspaces +
- Appearance +
- Backgrounds +
- DataTranslations +
- Deskbar +
- FileTypes +
- Keyboard +
- Keymap +
- Locale +
- Media +
- Mouse +
- Network +
- Printers +
- Repositories +
- Screen +
- ScreenSaver +
- Shortcuts +
- Sounds +
- Time +
- Tracker +
- Touchpad +
- VirtualMemory +
About this system... - Shows some basic information of the system, licenses and the credits of the Haiku project.
+
+Find... - Opens the Query dialog.
+Show replicants - Shows/hides the little Replicant widget you use to drag it around, remove or access its context menu.
+Mount - Offers the same options as when invoked by right-clicking the Desktop (see Mounting Volumes).
+Deskbar preferences... - Opens a panel to configure the Deskbar (see below).
+Shutdown - Offers options to either or .
+Recent documents, folders, applications - List of the last recently opened documents, folders and applications (see below).
+Applications, Demos, Deskbar applets, Preferences - List of installed applications, demos, applets and preferences.
You can add links to other programs (or any folder, document, query etc.) by putting them into ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/.
+- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Deskbar adalah menu "Start" dan bilah tugas Haiku, jika Anda mau. Lihat topik Deskbar.
+- Tab kuning menawarkan lebih dari sekadar nama program atau nama file dokumen:
+
- Anda dapat memindahkannya dengan menahan tombol SHIFT sambil menyeretnya ke posisi lain, memungkinkan Anda untuk menumpuk sejumlah jendela dan dengan mudah mengaksesnya dengan tab bernama mereka. +
- Anda meminimalkan jendela dengan mengklik dua kali pada tabnya (atau dengan CTRL ALT M). Jendela tersembunyi semacam itu dapat diakses dengan entri di jendela Deskbar or the Twitcher. +
- Anda dapat mengirim jendela ke belakang dengan mengklik kanan tabnya (atau pembatasnya).
+ Tombol untuk menutup.
+The "zoom" button (or CTRL ALT Z). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size without obscuring the Deskbar (hold SHIFT to cover the Deskbar as well). It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.
+Perbatasan jendela. Seret-kiri menggerakkan jendela, seret-kanan seret.
+Pojokan pengubah-ukuran.
+- lsindex - Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition.
+These are the attributes that are indexed by default:
+ - mkindex - Adds an attribute to the index of a volume/partition. +
- reindex - Puts the attributes of existing files into the newly created index of a volume/partition. +
- rmindex - Removes an attribute from the index of a volume/partition. +
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as Query Template.
+Narrow down your search from to specific file types.
+- Define the search method:
-
+
- - a basic search by file or folder name +
- - an advanced search, you specify search terms for one or more attributes +
- - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term
+ Select which drives to search on.
+Enter the search term.
+The expander hides/unhides the additional options.
+Uncheck the checkbox if you don't want this query self-destruct after 7 days.
+Check if your query is supposed to .
+Optionally, enter a name for this query if you want to save it.
+You can drag & drop the icon anywhere to save a query. Doing that with the right mouse button, offers the option to save as template.
+You could copy and paste the string into an email, forum or IRC for others to use or debug.
+You can use this method to construct a query in mode and then switch to mode, to comfortably generate a search string. Enclosed in single quotes, that string can then be used with the query command in the Terminal.
+You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
+You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.
+With or ALT G you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
+A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
(ALT 1) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with ALT +/-.
+(ALT 2) - Small icons.
+(ALT 3) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide file attributes (see topic Attributes.)
+(ALT Y) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
+- Only available in Icon or Mini icon view, a submenu allows to set the sorting order to various properties:
+-
+
, , , , , , ,
+ - Inverts the sorting order
+ (ALT K) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes which additionally sorts all icons according to the above selected criterium.
+
+(SHIFT ALT A) - Select files according to a regular expression.
+(ALT W) - Closes the window. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes which closes every Tracker window.
+(ALT Q) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
+- Decide if all mounted disks appear directly on the Desktop or in a window after clicking a single Disk icon sitting on the Desktop.
+- You can set , i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of its parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the OPT key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size. +
+
+Before you switch Tracker to , because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a Navigator where you can enter or copy & paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.
+Activating will filter the contents of a Tracker window while you type to only display the files matching your string in their name or any currently displayed attribute. See above.
+- Set the color of an optional indicator of free space that's shown besides a disk's icon.
+- Define when and what disks are mounted automatically, as described above under "Mounting volumes".
+- Find a file or folder. See topic Query for more info.
+- Create a new folder or any other file based on a template. +
+
+Choosing opens the folder /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype text/plain. See topic Filetypes for more info.
+- A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype. +
+
+
+The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type text/plain. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here text/*. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the entry instead, a panel opens:
+ +
+Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here text/plain.
+-
+
This opens a panel that shows the meta data of a file and lets you edit its permissions. You can rename it by clicking on the file name at the top.
+
+The panel consists of three tabs:
+-
+
- : Shows standard data like size, date of creation/modification, file type and location. Click on the location path to open the files parent folder. The menu sets the preferred application to open this particular file. +
- : Lets you change owner, group and file permissions. +
- : Lists all extra file attributes with their value and type. +
+ , and - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.
+, and - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.
+, and - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding SHIFT while invoking the menu you can files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding SHIFT you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.
+- will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with wget which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu changes the item to which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.
+- offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic Tracker Add-ons for more information.
+- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
The mail_daemon to fetch/send mail and save them as normal files.
+Tracker windows and queries to find and show email files.
+The Mail application to view email files and create new messages relying on system-wide contact management by the People app.
+If you don't save a query as "Query" but as "Query template", invoking it won't show the result window, but the Find... window instead. That way you can easily exchange the search string for the subject or sender, for example, or change a "2 days" time limit to "3 days".
+Activating "type-ahead filtering" in Tracker's preferences allows you to very quickly filter a query result even further. Often it's enough to query for all mails of the last 3 days and go with type-ahead filtering from there. The big advantage is, that you don't have to exactly specify which attribute to search for, as all displayed are considered when filtering.
+
+- Movie title +
- Genre +
- URL to e.g. IMdB +
- Director/Cast +
- Plot +
- My rating from 1 to 10 +
- Coordinates in my shelf, e.g. A2, B3, so I find the DVD also in Real Life :) +
- If so, who's borrowed the disk... +
- Type name - Appears e.g. in the Attribute menu of Tracker windows and the "Kind" attribute of a file. +
- Description - A bit more detailed description. +
Attribute name - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.
+Internal name - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.
+- Type - Defines the value the attribute can hold and therefore how it can be queried.
+
-
+
- for normal text +
- for binary data: 0 (false) or >=1 (true) +
- for integer numbers with different ranges:
+
-
+
- : ± 255 +
- : ± 65,535 +
- : ± 4,294,967,295 +
- : ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615 +
+ - for floating-point numbers, single precision +
- for floating-point numbers, double precision +
- for time and date format +
+ - Visible - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:
-
+
- - Left on "Default" if the values are to be displayed according to the attribute's "Type" (e.g. string/integer/float etc.). The other options are:
+
-
+
- - Can be used to show either one of two symbols, see below. +
- - Shows an integer as 1/60, e.g. "90" becomes "1:30". +
- - Shows a rating between 0 and 10 as star symbols. +
+ - - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker. +
- - Defines the two symbols used for a checkbox display. For example, "xo" will show a "x" for all values >0 and "o" for 0. +
- - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window. +
- - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned. +
- - Left on "Default" if the values are to be displayed according to the attribute's "Type" (e.g. string/integer/float etc.). The other options are:
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
+
- Català
+
- Deutsch
+
- English
+
- Español
+
- Français
+
- Furlan
+
- Italiano
+
- Magyar
+
- Polski
+
- Português
+
- Português (Brazil)
+
- Română
+
- Slovenčina
+
- Suomi
+
- Svenska
+
- 中文 ［中文］
+
- Русский
+
- Українська
+
- 日本語
+
- Italiano
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Magyar
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/it/applications/activitymonitor.html b/userguide/it/applications/activitymonitor.html
index dd3b17df..2e35f69e 100644
--- a/userguide/it/applications/activitymonitor.html
+++ b/userguide/it/applications/activitymonitor.html
@@ -33,11 +33,13 @@
- Italiano
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Magyar
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/it/applications/bepdf.html b/userguide/it/applications/bepdf.html
index 95769977..ddfe7b5d 100644
--- a/userguide/it/applications/bepdf.html
+++ b/userguide/it/applications/bepdf.html
@@ -32,11 +32,13 @@
- Italiano
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Magyar
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/it/applications/bootmanager.html b/userguide/it/applications/bootmanager.html
index e47ac273..0f9e6d22 100644
--- a/userguide/it/applications/bootmanager.html
+++ b/userguide/it/applications/bootmanager.html
@@ -28,11 +28,13 @@
- Italiano
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Magyar
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/it/applications/charactermap.html b/userguide/it/applications/charactermap.html
index ec852d78..0c7d0d0e 100644
--- a/userguide/it/applications/charactermap.html
+++ b/userguide/it/applications/charactermap.html
@@ -32,11 +32,13 @@
- Italiano
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Magyar
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/it/applications/cli-apps.html b/userguide/it/applications/cli-apps.html
index 352fdc0a..682d4e5b 100644
--- a/userguide/it/applications/cli-apps.html
+++ b/userguide/it/applications/cli-apps.html
@@ -33,11 +33,13 @@
- Italiano
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Magyar
- Polski
- Português
@@ -87,7 +89,7 @@ Questi comandi sono descritti nel capitolo L'indice del
Relating to package management: package, pkgman
- Italiano
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Magyar
- Polski
- Português
diff --git a/userguide/it/applications/debugger.html b/userguide/it/applications/debugger.html
index b4d33c6d..403595fc 100644
--- a/userguide/it/applications/debugger.html
+++ b/userguide/it/applications/debugger.html
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Magyar
- Polski
diff --git a/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/launchbox.html b/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/launchbox.html
index 068bf29b..59ff2811 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/launchbox.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/launchbox.html
@@ -31,11 +31,13 @@
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Magyar
- Polski
diff --git a/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/networkstatus.html b/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/networkstatus.html
index 3238fa69..d6c8314d 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/networkstatus.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/networkstatus.html
@@ -32,11 +32,13 @@
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Magyar
- Polski
diff --git a/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/powerstatus.html b/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/powerstatus.html
index b8eab89b..3e89497a 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/powerstatus.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/powerstatus.html
@@ -31,11 +31,13 @@
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Magyar
- Polski
diff --git a/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html b/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html
index 5ae3ba90..ef4606b3 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/processcontroller.html
@@ -32,11 +32,13 @@
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Magyar
- Polski
diff --git a/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/workspaces.html b/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/workspaces.html
index fa86339d..62b317b6 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/workspaces.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/desktop-applets/workspaces.html
@@ -30,11 +30,13 @@
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Magyar
- Polski
@@ -74,7 +76,7 @@
ワークスペース間のウィンドウ移動
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Magyar
- Polski
diff --git a/userguide/jp/filetypes.html b/userguide/jp/filetypes.html
index 322615af..8a978e1c 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/filetypes.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/filetypes.html
@@ -30,11 +30,13 @@
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Magyar
- Polski
diff --git a/userguide/jp/gui.html b/userguide/jp/gui.html
index b8f44918..11d36a65 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/gui.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/gui.html
@@ -32,11 +32,13 @@
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Magyar
- Polski
@@ -63,8 +65,8 @@
- 日本語
+
- Bahasa Indonesia
- Català
- Deutsch
- English
- Español
- Français
+
- Furlan
- Italiano
- Magyar
- Polski
diff --git a/userguide/jp/keyboard-shortcuts.html b/userguide/jp/keyboard-shortcuts.html
index 38becb22..fb2ca689 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/keyboard-shortcuts.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/keyboard-shortcuts.html
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
@@ -28,11 +31,13 @@
The package command is used to manage HPKG packages. Have a look at the article Installing applications to learn the very basics. Usually the tool haikuporter is used to automatically create packages from so-called recipes.
pkgman is used to search, install, update and uninstall packages. Package repositories can be added, dropped and their package lists refreshed. A special kind of update is invoked with the parameter full-sync: it is more aggressive and also downgrades or removes packages, if necessary.
-For more details on a parameter, append "--help", e.g. pkgman search --help.
Hasznos parancsok szkriptekhez
diff --git a/userguide/hu/applications/codycam.html b/userguide/hu/applications/codycam.html
index b2d289e9..dd7a9edd 100644
--- a/userguide/hu/applications/codycam.html
+++ b/userguide/hu/applications/codycam.html
@@ -30,11 +30,13 @@
Aplikasi
+ +Sebelum menyelam ke semua aplikasi yang datang dengan Haiku, mari kita lihat lebih rinci tentang cara menginstal dan menghapus program. Cara paling mudah untuk menemukan, menginstal, memperbarui, dan menghapus instalasi aplikasi adalah melalui sistem manajemen paket Haiku. Namun, karena Haiku sebagian besar biner dan sumbernya kompatibel dengan leluhurnya BeOS, Anda mungkin menemukan arsip lama (.zip dan .pkg) yang masih dapat diinstal juga.
+
+
+Paket Haiku(.hpkg)
+Cara paling sederhana adalah dengan menggunakan HaikuDepot untuk menemukan, mengunduh, dan secara otomatis menginstal dan menghapus instalasi suatu paket. Jika Anda telah mengunduh paket dari tempat lain - mungkin karena itu belum (belum) ada di repositori publik - cukup klik dua kali untuk membuka di HaikuDepot dan instal dari sana.
+Anda akan menemukan aplikasi yang baru diinstal di /system/apps/ atau, jika ada aplikasi commandline, di /system/bin/. Semua file lain yang bergantung pada program (pustaka, data, add-on, dll.) Muncul secara otomatis di lokasi yang tepat di sistem file.
+Topik Deskbar atau LaunchBox menjelaskan cara menambahkan pintasan ke aplikasi Anda yang baru diinstal.
+Jika paket tergantung pada beberapa pustaka atau paket lain, sebuah jendela akan muncul, menanyakan apakah file yang diperlukan akan diunduh dan diinstal juga.
+Menghapus instalan semudah ini: Cukup temukan paket di HaikuDepot dan klik .
+Jika Anda bekerja di Terminal atau ingin melakukan install/uninstal paket dalam skrip, Anda harus melihat pada perintah pkgman --help .
+ +
+
+Arsip BeOS lama (.zip and .pkg)
+Arsip BeOS yang menyertakan semua yang mereka butuhkan di folder aplikasi mereka dapat dibongkar (klik dua kali membuka Expander atau PackageInstaller yang lama) di mana saja di /boot/home/ dan jalankan dari sana. Menghapus instalasi aplikasi mandiri semacam itu mudah: cukup hapus folder aplikasi.
+Ini berlaku untuk sebagian besar aplikasi BeOS lama. Jika Anda menemukan salah satu yang tidak bekerja, karena ingin menyebarkan file-nya ke lokasi yang dikodekan dengan kaku yang tidak dijamin ada, Anda dapat mencoba memperbaikinya secara manual. Folder /system/non-package/ memungkinkan Anda untuk membuat ulang hierarki folder yang diperlukan. Karena semakin banyak paket .hpkg yang nyata tersedia dan aplikasi BeOS lama dikemas ulang, ini akan menjadi kurang dibutuhkan. Silakan baca artikel online ini tentang cara menggunakan hierarki tanpa paket .
+ +
+
+Aplikasi-aplikasi Haiku
+Haiku hadir dengan satu set aplikasi yang sebagian besar kecil namun penting. Anda akan menemukan semuanya di /boot/system/apps/. Aplikasi yang biasanya tidak diluncurkan dengan mengklik dua kali pada file data (mis. ShowImage untuk file gambar) dapat ditemukan di menu di Deskbar.
+ | ActivityMonitor | + | Alat untuk melacak sumber daya sistem seperti penggunaan CPU dan memori. |
| BootManager | + | Alat untuk menginstal menu boot di Master Boot Record (MBR) drive. |
| CharacterMap | + | An application that shows the Unicode character map. |
| CodyCam | + | A tool to regularly upload images from a webcam to a server. |
| Debugger | + | A graphical debugger. |
| DeskCalc | + | A calculator. |
| DiskProbe | + | A HEX editor for files and devices. |
| DiskUsage | + | A tool to visualize a disk's memory usage. |
| DriveSetup | + | A harddisk partitioning tool. |
| Expander | + | A tool to unpack common archives. |
| HaikuDepot | + | A tool to find, download, install, update and uninstall (application) packages |
| Icon-O-Matic | + | An app to create Haiku's vector icons. |
| Installer | + | The tool to install Haiku to a partition. |
| Magnify | + | A magnified view of the area around your mouse pointer. |
| + | An email client. | |
| MediaPlayer | + | A player for all supported audio/video files. |
| MidiPlayer | + | A player for MIDI files. |
| LegacyPackageInstaller | + | Installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. |
| People | + | A contact manager. |
| PoorMan | + | A simple web server. |
| Screenshot | + | A tool to take screenshots. |
| ShowImage | + | A simple image viewer. |
| SoftwareUpdater | + | A tool to update software packages and Haiku itself. |
| SoundRecorder | + | A tool to record audio from line-in or a microphone. [still missing] |
| StyledEdit | + | A simple text editor. |
| Terminal | + | Access to the bash. |
| TextSearch | + | A search tool for text files. |
| TV | + | A viewer for analog TV. [still missing] |
| WebPositive | + | A native web browser |
+
+Haiku's commandline applications
+Besides the normal commandline tools coming with the bash shell or are necessary to be POSIX compliant, there are a few Haiku-specific commandline applications worth mentioning. These commands are often useful for scripting purposes, see also topic Bash and Scripting.
+ | List of all commandline applications | |
| Haiku-specific commandline applications |
+
+Bundled applications
+Besides the above listed programs, which are all maintained by the Haiku project, there are a few essential applications bundled in a standard Haiku system. Bugs and feature requests for those have to be filed with the particular maintainer.
+ | BePDF | + | A PDF viewer. |
| Pe | + | An advanced texteditor with syntax coloring and much more. |
| Vision | + | An IRC client. |
| WonderBrush | + | YellowBite's graphics programm. |
ActivityMonitor
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/ActivityMonitor | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/ActivityMonitor settings |
Anda dapat melacak sumber daya sistem dengan meluncurkan ActivityMonitor dan mengaktifkan berbagai item menarik.
+
+Dengan mengeklik kanan ke jendela, Anda dapat beralih tampilan semua jenis sumber daya:
+Used/Cached Memory, Swap Space, CPU Usage, Network Receive/Send, Page faults, Semaphores, Ports, Threads, Teams, Running Applications, Raw/Text Clipboard Size, Media Nodes.
Below the graph is a legend (hideable from the context menu). You can change the colors and that of the graph's background via drag & drop from any color picker, e.g. from Icon-O-Matic.
+You can add more views from the menu if it gets too crowded.
+The menu opens a panel to set the update interval.
+Each view has it's own Replicant handle and can thus be arranged, for example, on the Desktop.
+ +BePDF
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/BePDF/BePDF | |
| Dokumentasi: | /boot/system/apps/BePDF/docs/* | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/BePDF |
BePDF adalah penampil PDF peluncuran cepat. Selain melihat, ini mendukung bookmark beranotasi dan yang ditentukan pengguna untuk PDF tidak terenkripsi. Ini sepenuhnya dilokalkan untuk 20 bahasa saat ini dengan bahasa tambahan yang mudah ditambahkan melalui file teks.
+Dokumentasi tersedia sebagai HTML atau file PDF.Yang terakhir juga akan terbuka dari menu .
+-
+
BootManager
+| Deskbar: | No entry, normally started from Installer's menu | |
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/BootManager | |
| Pengaturan: | none MBR backups are saved by default in ~/config/settings/bootman/ |
If you don't add the Haiku partition to an existing boot manager like GRUB, BootManager can install a small boot menu in the Master Boot Record (MBR) that looks something like this:
+
+BootManager guides you through the installation process of the boot menu.
+
+
+Choosing the destination drive
+
+The BootManager starts off with a list of all available drives from which you choose the destination. If there's already a boot menu on that drive, the button becomes active, leading you through the simple procedure to restore a formerly backed-up MBR, thereby removing the boot menu. Otherwise, choose to continue.
+
+
+Backing up the Master Boot Record (MBR)
+In case anything goes wrong or you want to remove the boot menu again, the Master Boot Record (MBR) is now saved. This is obviously a very important step, make sure you don't accidentally overwrite some other MBR-backup maybe from some earlier experimentation, for example!
+
+
+Just select a destination for the backup file "MBR" or leave the default path. After clicking you'll get a confirmation if the backup was successful.
+
+
+Configuring the boot menu
+
+
+Next you're presented with a list of all partitions on the destination drive. By setting checkmarks you decide what entries will appear in the boot menu, the text boxes allow you to rename an entry.
+After that, you pick from the pop-up menu which partition will be booted from by default and set a timeout with the slider below. Here, "Immediately" will skip the boot menu entirely, "Never" will just stop at the boot menu. You can override the timeout setting by holding ALT while booting.
+
+
+Writing the boot menu
+
+
+Before the boot menu is written to the MBR, you'll get a summary of your configuration and then one last chance to abort the operation. Don't worry though, as long as you keep the MBR backup safe, you can easily revert the changes. Should things get thoroughly messed up, you can always boot from a Haiku install CD or USB stick and write back the MBR backup with BootManager.
+ +CharacterMap
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/CharacterMap | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings |
CharacterMap will show you the UTF-8 code of every character a font supports.
+
+To the left you have the standardized blocks, together with a handy filter function. Optionally, you can choose to also from the menu. The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the menu. Below that you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer is displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.
+You can drag & drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either (ALT C) or (SHIFT ALT C). Resulting in, e.g. either € or \xe2\x82\xac.
+ +-
+
Haiku-specific commandline applications
+| Lokasi: | /boot/system/bin/ +/boot/system/non-packaged/bin/ ~/config/bin/ ~/config/non-packaged/bin/ |
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in /boot/system/bin/. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps will appear there as well, or in ~/config/bin/, when installed from a .hpkg package. Otherwise you can put them into /boot/system/non-packaged/bin/ or ~/config/non-packaged/bin/. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
+The following isn't an exhaustive list of all Haiku-specific CLI apps, it serves just to highlight a few of the most useful to give you a taste. Feel encouraged to explore what's in the bin/ folders on your own a bit. Executing an app with the parameter --help shows the usage of the command and all its various options.
+Relating to attributes: listattr, catattr, addattr, rmattr, copyattr
+These commands are used to display, read out, add and remove attributes of files. Remember that these meta data are currently only available on BFS formatted volumes. Moving files onto other file systems will strip all attributes!
+All these commands are described in topic Attributes in Terminal.
+Relating to the index: lsindex, mkindex, reindex, rmindex
+With these commands you list, make, reindex and remove attributes to BFS' index. Every volume has it's own index, remember that when copying files from one volume to another.
+These commands are described in topic Index.
+Relating to package management: package, pkgman
+The package command is used to manage HPKG packages. Have a look at the article Installing applications to learn the very basics. Usually the tool haikuporter is used to automatically create packages from so-called recipes.
+pkgman is used to search, install, update and uninstall packages. Package repositories can be added, dropped and their package lists refreshed. A special kind of update is invoked with the parameter full-sync: it is more aggressive and also downgrades or removes packages, if necessary.
+For more details on a parameter, append "--help", e.g. pkgman search --help
+Useful scripting commands
+Here are a few commandline tools that are especially useful for scripting (see also topic Bash and Scripting).
+alert | + | alert conjures up the typical alert window with a pre-defined icon, explanatory text and up to three buttons. It will return the title of the pressed button and an exit status (starting with 0). For example, this is made of the line: +alert --idea "FantasticApp(tm) installed successfully! \ +Would you like a link to it?" "On Desktop" "In Deskbar" "No thanks"+
|
filepanel | + | filepanel displays a load or save file panel and lets the user choose a file or location. As a return value you'll get the chosen file or folder's path. There are several parameters available, for example to set a starting directory, a window title, a default name when saving or restrictions to the allowed types of files. This is an example of +filepanel -s -t "Save your logfile" -d ~/config/settings -n Fantastic.log+
|
hey | + | hey is a littler helper tool that sends BMessages to applications and prints out their answer. It can be used for application scripting, i.e. "remote controlling" a program from a script or the command line. It's usage is a bit complex... Humdinger's blog post serves as a good introduction, and thanks to Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible, there is a much more comprehensive hey tutorial by Chris Herborth. + |
notify | + | notify shows a notification panel with a message. There are various parameters that are described when you call notify --help. A notification can also be used to show the progress of some action. When doing that, it's important to set a messageID and always use it when you update the progress (a float between 0.0 and 1.0 that's printed as percent). Otherwise you'll see several notification panels if you update quicker then the set timeout. notify --type progress --group "--group" --title "--title" --icon /boot/home/bebook.hvif \ +--messageID MyMessageID --progress .75 "Keep waiting"+
|
query | + | query is the commandline version of the Find panel. In fact, a quick way to generate the search term is to build a query in the Find panel, switch to , add double quotes (") in front and back and paste the whole string after your query command in Terminal or your script. + |
waitfor | + | waitfor is a nice way to wait for a particular application or thread to be started or to have ended. + |
+Other commands
+
+checkfs | + | checkfs is an important tool to check for errors in your file system. Simply add a volume name like /Haiku or device path and it'll run through every file and correct inconsistencies where possible. + |
desklink | + | desklink can install an icon for any file, folder, query or application in the Deskbar tray. It also offers the option to provide a context menu when right-clicking an icon to execute special actions. As an example, try this to add the commandline app screenshot with various options (the "\" in the first line is just for the line break in Terminal): +desklink "cmd=Active window (2s):/bin/screenshot --window --border --delay 2" \ +"cmd=Remove replicant:desklink --remove=screenshot" /bin/screenshot ++
|
diskimage | + | diskimage lets you register a regular file as disk device. For example, you can register a Haiku anyboot image, mount it in Tracker and copy, edit or remove files there before using it as source in the Installer. + |
launch_roster | + | The launch_daemon starts all sorts of services and applications at boot-up. For some it was instructed to re-start them if they were quit. If you don't want that – maybe you'd like to test a modified Tracker, for example – you use launch_roster to stop the re-starting of the application before quitting it. Similarly, you can start it again or get info about it.c The parameter log prints out a log of all launch_daemon related events. launch_roster stop x-vnd.be-tskb |
mountvolume | + | mountvolume is preferred by many to mount local partitions and disks, because its usage is so easy: just call it with the name of the partition and you're done. Try --help for more options. +mount can additionally mount remote disks by using a network filesystem, like NFS4. You specify the used filesystem with the -t parameter and the remote location with the -p parameter. As filesystem parameter you can use anything you find in /system/add-ons/kernel/file_system (and corresponding file hierarchies under ~/config or "non-packaged", of course). You also have to create a folder as mountpoint. Here's an example: +mkdir -p /DiskStation +mount -t nfs4 -p "192.168.178.3:volume1" /DiskStation |
open | + | open is a very handy little tool. With it you open any file with its preferred application, or start a specific application by its signature without the need to know its exact path. It also works with URLs and even with the "virtual" directories . for the current directory and .. for the parent, opening the folder in Tracker. + |
ramdisk | + | A ramdisk is like a harddisk running only in the computer's memory. That makes it very fast but also volatile, because its contents vanishes when you shut down the computer, or it crashes or you experience a blackout. ramdisk create -s 1gb +mkfs -q -t bfs /dev/disk/virtual/ram/0/raw RAMses +mountvolume RAMses+ Note: When creating a ramdisk, the ramdisk command prints out the path to it. If you create several disks, that path /dev/disk/virtual/ram/0/raw will change! +To preserve the contents, at least if no calamity like a blackout etc. strikes, a ramdisk can be set up to read/write an image on the harddisk. For that, you need to supply a file of the desired size that will be read from every time you start your ramdisk, and written to when you unmount it. To create an image file "RAMimage" of 500MiB and format it, do this: +dd if=/dev/zero of=RAMimage bs=500M count=1 +mkfs -q -t bfs /dev/disk/virtual/ram/0/raw RAMimage+ From now on, you start the ramdisk like this: +ramdisk create RAMimage +mountvolume RAMimage+ It's very important to always cleanly unmount you ramdisk, either from Tracker or with unmount /RAMimage, or the changes won't be written back to the image file! + |
CodyCam
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/CodyCam | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/codycam |
CodyCam lets you take pictures at a specified interval from a connected webcam or any other video-in device and save them via FTP.
+
+To the left under the preview, you set the filename that'll be suffixed with an increasing number for every picture taken. Beneath that you decide on the file format and the rate the pictures are taken.
+To the right you choose either FTP or sFTP (if SSH is available) and enter the needed data to save the images on a server.
+ +Debugger
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Debugger | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Debugger settings +~/config/settings/Debugger/ |
The Debugger is an application the common user hasn't much use for. It's targeted at developers to investigate bugs in programs. Sometimes those bugs result in crashes and that is when even end users come into contact with the Debugger. When a program crashes, you're confronted with this alert :
+
+It offers four options to react to the crash:
+-
+
The default action when a crash happens can be configured with a text file ~/config/settings/system/debug_server/settings.
+The file takes on a driver_settings style format as follows:
default_action user
+
+executable_actions {
+ app1 log
+ /path/app2* debug
+}
+Valid values for a default_action are:
+| user | Prompt the user for action. | |
| kill | Silently terminate the crashing team. | |
| debug | Attach the debugger to the crashing team. | |
| log / report | Save a crash report and terminate the team. | |
| core | Save a (possibly very large) core file and terminate the team. |
If no default_action is specified, "user" is assumed.
+The executable_actions subsection contains individual overrides of the default. These take the form above, where the individual lines can be only a team name, or a path, with wildcards.
++
Describing the usage of the actual Debugger is out of scope for this guide that is addressing the needs of the common user of Haiku. For completeness sake, here's the window that'll come up if you choose the option in the above alert:
+
+As you'll quickly see when you start poking around a bit, the Debugger is one of the most complex and sophisticated applications for Haiku. If you're a developer and are used to graphical debuggers on other platforms, many features will be familiar to you.
+Below are a few links that may shed some light on the intricacies of Haiku's Debugger. If you have a specific question, you may want to consider posting it on the development mailing list. If you find more useful resources, please file a bugreport with that info.
+| Debugger Reference Manual | This is the most in-depth source on how to work with the Debugger. | |
| Blogposts | There are a few articles on the Debugger, mostly by Rene Gollent after implementing a new feature. | |
| BeGeistert 026 video | A video from the BeGeistert meeting in 2012, in which Ingo Weinhold demonstrates the state of the Debugger back then and shows other interesting tools like the profiler to hunt down bottlenecks. |
DeskCalc
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/DeskCalc | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/DeskCalc_settings |
DeskCalc is a simple calculator that nevertheless has some nice features that aren't apparent on first sight.
+
+-
+
DiskProbe
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/DiskProbe | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/DiskProbe_data |
DiskProbe is a HEX editor to view and alter data of a file or on a device on a byte-level. It's a very low-level tool and has therefore the potential to really mess things up if you're not careful!
+When starting DiskProbe you'll first be asked for the file or the device to work on. After that you are presented with this interface:
+
The main view shows always one block of data, the size of which can be adjusted with . To the left is the offset to the start of the block, in the middle the data as HEX values and to the right the same as ASCII symbols.
+You can move from block to block with the slider above or with ALT ← and ALT → and switch between the HEX and ASCII columns with TAB.
will not only show the selection with different endianess (and in HEX or decimal, set by ), it will also interpret the selection as a block offset that you can jump to. It will be grayed out if the position is outside of the file/device.
+This is a handy feature mostly when looking at file systems, as they often contain pointers to other blocks.
If the file you're probing includes attributes, the menu can be used to open any of them in a new DiskProbe window. Here's the SYS:PACKAGE attribute of the AboutSystem application: +
Depending on the kind of attribute, you'll get a different editor tab besides the always present Raw Editor. For example, there are editors for strings and MIME types or an icon viewer for the vectoricon attribute.
+DiskUsage
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/DiskUsage | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/DiskUsage |
DiskUsage menunjukkan secara grafis bagaimana ruang pada volume Anda digunakan.
+Alat yang berguna untuk menjawab pertanyaan, " Ke mana semua ruang disk saya hilang? ".
After launching, DiskUsage shows only an empty window with all mounted volumes as tabs at the top. You'll have to choose the one you're interested in and click to start chugging through the disk. For larger disks this can take some time... While you wait, you may switch to a different tab and start exploring that volume or begin the scan process there as well.
+It's not recommended to start several concurrent scan processes on the same physical disk, as the constant repositioning of the heads of the drive will only extend the wait.
The concentric circles represent different levels in the file system hierarchy. Above, the circle in the center represents the /boot/home/ folder. Each segment of the ring immediately outside that circle is a file or folder under /boot/home/. Every segment farther outside brings you one level deeper in the file hierarchy. You may have to resize the window to accommodate very deep folders.
+-
+
As you move the mouse over a segment, information about that file or folder appears in the status bar at the bottom.
+Right-clicking a segment offers a context menu to , (with Tracker), another suitable application or that particular folder.
+Left-clicking a segment makes that file/folder the center circle.
+Left-clicking the center circle moves you up one level.
You can drag files and folders from DiskUsage to other applications or to the Desktop or other Tracker windows for copying. Vice versa, dropped volumes and folders on DiskUsage's window will zoom directly to them, making them the new center circle.
+You can also use the Tracker add-on from the context menu of any folder to start DiskUsage with that particular location.
+ +DriveSetup
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/DriveSetup | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/DriveSetup |
DriveSetup is a tool to create, delete and format partitions. At this time it can't resize or move existing partitions, so that you'll either need an unpartitioned volume (perhaps an external USB drive or another harddisk) or do the initial setup with a tool like the GParted LiveCD to provide the space for another partition.
+
+At the top is a graphical representation of all partitions inside the device chosen in the list below it. Each device, by default, can hold a maximum of 4 primary partitions. This limit can be removed by making one of those an extended partition, which in turn can hold theoretically an unlimited number of logical partitions (practical limitations depend on, for example, other OSes installed).
+You may have to expand such a list with the +/- widget that appears in that case in front of that device to see the details of every logical partition.
Colors and icons provide some more information about the available volumes and partitions.
+Besides the familiar icons for harddisks, CD drives and USB sticks etc., there are a few that indicate a their mount mode:
| + | The /boot partition |
| + | An encrypted partition |
| + | A partition shared through SMB/NFS etc. |
| + | A partition that was mounted read-only |
| + | A mounted image file (see also the diskimage command) |
When mounted, a colored bar shows the used space of a partition. The color depends on the kind of partition:
+| A BFS formatted partition | ||
| A non-BFS formatted partition | ||
| A read-only partition | ||
| An encrypted partition |
You can select a partition and choose various commands from the context or menu, like /, or to .
+You can also or completely a partition.
+
+
+Initializing a disk
+If you don't plan to use just one of the partitions of a larger disk, but the entire drive as one partition, e.g. a USB stick or a Compact Flash card, you'll have to initialize the disk first.
+You do this by selecting the raw disk from list of devices and choose a partition map from the menu. The is the right choice for classical booting via a BIOS.
+
+
+Creating a new partition
+When you found unformatted space on a drive, like the above <empty>, you can create a new partition in this space with (ALT C).
+
+You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.
+The checkbox is only available if you have created a primary partition instead of just another logical partition within an extended one. You'll have to tick that checkbox if you plan to use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.
+Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be formatted with a filesystem.
+
+
+Formatting a partition
+Only unmounted partitions can be formatted by choosing a filesystem from the sub-menu of . The (BFS) is mandatory for a Haiku boot partition and recommended for data partitions to be used with Haiku. Only BFS formatted partitions can be queried and fully support Haiku's file attributes.
+
+Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. The blocksize is the space in bytes that a file will allocate at minimum. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
+If the future data on your partition won't need any querying, you can uncheck to save a bit of overhead for managing the index.
-
+
Expander
+| Deskbar: | Tidak ada entri, biasanya diluncurkan melalui mengklik dua kali file yang didukung. | |
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Expander | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Expander_Settings |
Expander adalah alat kecil untuk membongkar arsip yang paling umum dengan cepat, di antaranya zip, gzip, bzip2, rar dan tar.gz.
Cukup klik dua kali arsip untuk melihat antarmuka sederhana ini:
| ALT O | akan membuka dialog file untuk menemukan arsip untuk dibongkar. | |
| ALT D | akan membuka dialog file untuk mengatur tujuan. | |
| ALT E | akan mulai membongkar. Itu dapat dibatalkan dengan ALT K. |
Anda dapat beralih tampilan daftar file dengan membatalkan centang atau menekan ALT L.
++Anda tidak dapat memilih file individual untuk memperluas atau menambah / menghapus file dari arsip.
atau ALT S membuka panel preferensi yang menawarkan beberapa pengaturan yang berguna untuk menyesuaikan perilaku Expander.
+Semua opsi cukup jelas:
| Indeks |
| The Filter + The List + The Info Area + Tools and Show menus + Creating a User Account + Rating and Commenting + |
HaikuDepot
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/HaikuDepot | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/HaikuDepot/main_settings +~/config/cache/HaikuDepot/ - Cached icons, screenshots, descriptions etc. |
HaikuDepot is the central application when it comes to managing your software packages. With it you can browse and search through package repositories and install, update and uninstall packages. By default, HaikuDepot starts up with a list of "Featured packages", software that's deemed interesting to many users.
+
+When the checkbox is deactivated, all available packages are shown and the display changes to smaller icons and more information arranged in columns:
+
+
+
+The Filter
+At the top we find a few means to filter the list of available packages below:
+-
+
+The List
+Like in any Tracker window, you can choose from a context menu which columns to display by right-clicking the column heading. A left-click sorts the list according to that column. Of course, you can rearrange the columns by dragging them to a new position.
+The status column of a package can have one of several states:
+-
+
You can grab the dotted line between the packages list and the info area to vertically resize the packages list.
+ +
+The Info Area
+At the bottom is an area that displays information on the package that is currently selected in the list above it.
+To the right of package name, author, rating and version is a button, that – depending on the current state of the package – lets you , or it. If a package is already installed, you'll find an additional button there to the application.
Below are four tabs: About, Ratings, Changelog and Contents.
+-
+
+Tools and Show menu
+In the menu at the top of the window, you'll find an item to . This will request an up-to-date list of all available packages from the repositories.
+The second item is to . It opens the Repositories preferences, to add/remove or disable and enable repositories.
+ opens the SoftwareUpdater to search and install updated packages.
Under you can choose to also display and in the packages list. For the normal user those are of no interest and would only clutter the list. They are important, however, for people who need the libraries, headers etc. of a package to develop and compile programs depending on them.
+Of more interest are the options to only show and .
+ +
+Creating a User Account
+To be able to rate a package, you need a user account at the Haiku Depot Server that serves all the packages and keeps track of ratings and user comments. You can create an account within the HaikuDepot application by clicking on the menu in the far right of the menu bar that shows your current status: . Choosing opens a window with two tabs; one to enter your user name and password (once you have those) to log in, and the other to create a new account:
+
+To create an account you need to:
+After logging in, the top-right menu of the HaikuDepot window will now say , showing your user name. The menu now offers you to or .
+ +
+Rating and Commenting
+After you've created a user account and are logged in, you can rate a package and leave a comment, if you want. Just hover the mouse over the rating stars in the info area of a package and they turn into a button. Click it to open the rating window:
+
+Here you move the mouse over the stars to light them up and choose your rating, you can also choose from a number of levels to judge the stability of the application and pick the language of your optional comment. To make a comment meaningful, you should have worked with the application you're about to rate for a while to become familiar with its features, bugs and quirks. And don't write the next great American novel... keep it short, sweet and polite. :)
+After you click the data is transmitted to the server. You may have to go to the menu to before you can see your changes.
At any time, you can come back and edit your comment and re-rate it. You can also hide your rating from other users by deactivating the checkbox .
+| Indeks |
| BeOS bitmap vs. Haiku vector icons + Icons are attributes + Creating icons with Icon-O-Matic + Path + Shape + Style + Transformer + Saving an icon + Tips & Tricks |
Icon-O-Matic
+
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Icon-O-Matic | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Icon-O-Matic |
Before we come to the actual creating of icons in Icon-O-Matic, a few words on Haiku's icons in general.
+ +
+
+BeOS bitmap vs. Haiku vector icons
+Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
+Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
| Bitmap | SVG | HVIF |
| | | |
| 1,024 byte + 256 byte | 7,192 byte | 768 byte |
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
+This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
+| 16x16 | 32x32 | 64x64 | 128x128 | |
| Bitmap | + |
+ |
+ |
+ |
| Vector | + |
+ |
+ |
+ |
+
+Icons are attributes
+Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType add-on on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
+
+
+Creating icons with Icon-O-Matic
+Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
+Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
+For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
+
+To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the view.
+ + +
+
+Path
+A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure the path is selected in the path list.
+ +Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+ +
+
+To get from "A" to "B", you have to transform some points from corner-points to curve-points. That's done by holding ALT while clicking on a point and dragging out the handles. This results in a symmetrical Bezier: the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click & drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
+Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
To move a point, simply click & drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
+To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
+Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+ |
+ |
+ |
+ |
+ |
+ |
+
| Move point(s) | +Insert point | +Add point | +Delete point CTRL |
+ Corner↔Bezier ALT |
+ Select points SHIFT |
+
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+| ALT A | Selects all points of the current path. | |
| T | Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down. | |
| Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other. | ||
| Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points. | ||
| DEL | Deletes selected points. |
Path Menu
+The menu offers a few obvious entries to and or to or a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
+ +| If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead. | ||
| Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points. | ||
| ALT R | Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪. | |
| ALT SHIFT R | Does the same in the other direction. |
Path Properties
+at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a and if it's or not.
+ + +
+
+Shape
+A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
+A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
+ +
+
+When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+ |
+ |
+ |
+ |
+
| Move | +Resize | +Rotate | +Move rotation point |
+
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag & drop their entry to a different position in the list.
+ +Shape Menu
+The menu offers the before mentioned possibility to and to or a shape. Then, there is:
+| Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape. | ||
| When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used to set the points at precise pixel borders. +If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state. |
Shape Properties
+Besides a , the view for a shape has these options:
+ +| Minimum Level of Detail | ||
| Maximum Level of Detail |
Level of Detail (LOD)
+| 16x16 | 32x32 | 64x64 |
|
+ |
+ |
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
+With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its and above its .
+So, if you set a shape's to 0.0 and the to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
+The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
+For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
| OK | Not OK! | ||||
| Shape 1 | Min LOD | 0.00 | Min LOD | 0.00 | |
| Max LOD | 0.74 | Max LOD | 0.75 | ||
| Shape 2 | Min LOD | 0.75 | Min LOD | 0.75 | |
| Max LOD | 4.00 | Max LOD | 4.00 | ||
+
+Style
+A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
+Besides the predefined colors under , you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
+You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag & dropping it into the list of styles.
+If you go for a gradient, you set the type (, , , ) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag & drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
+Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
+ +Style Menu
+The menu offers the usual entries to , or a style and to .
+ +Style Properties
+The is the only of a style.
+ + +
+
+Transformer
+A shape can have Transformers which change its appearance. The effects, however, are more subtle than a truck turning into a battle robot...
+ +Transformer Add Menu
+| Adds an outline to a shape. | ||
| Strokes the path of a shape instead of filling it with a style. |
Depending on the kind of Transformer, you'll get a different set of properties.
+ +Transformer Properties
+Besides a and the actual for the transformer, the view has these (depending on its type slightly differing) options:
+| Stroke only. Defines the end caps of a line: , or . | ||
| Contour only. Determines if the contour is to the inside or outside the path. | ||
| Defines how lines are joined at a point: , or . | ||
| Only when the above is set to "Miter" this setting influences the looks of the miter joint. |
+
+Saving an icon
+There's your usual menu bar at the top, , , . The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
+will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
+ +opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+| HVIF | Haiku Vector Icon Format | |
| HVIF RDef | Saves as resource used by programmers | |
| HVIF source code | Saves as source code used by programmers | |
| SVG | Saves as SVG | |
| PNG | Saves as a 64px sized PNG | |
| PNG set | Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs | |
| BEOS:ICON attribute | Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly | |
| META:ICON attribute | Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data |
+
+Tips & Tricks
+A few things you should keep in mind when working with Icon-O-Matic and some general tips for its usage:
+-
+
Installer
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Installer | |
| Pengaturan: | none |
The Installer is used to copy Haiku onto another volume.
+Upon launch it displays a start window with important information. It's not a mindless EULA you're used to click away in the blink of an eye, it states:
-
+
Once you acknowledged with , you're presented with the main window:
+
+In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.
+The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.
Clicking the little expander widget will Show optional packages, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.
+You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on to open DriveSetup and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.
+starts the installation procedure, which basically copies the /home/ and /system/ folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.
+ +
+Tools
+At the end of the installation procedure, the partition is automatically made bootable. However, it can happen that some other operating system or partitioning tool (accidentally) overwrites the boot sector of your Haiku volume. In this case, boot your installation CD and start the Installer. Select your Haiku boot partition from the menu and select from the menu to make it bootable again.
+The other item in the menu is used to that puts a menu in the boot sector to choose what operating system to boot. See topic BootManager for more information.
+ You don't need to run the BootManager if you already use a bootmanager like GRUB, in which case you have to add Haiku manually (see above), or Haiku runs exclusively on your machine.
-
+
List of all commandline applications
+| Lokasi: | /boot/system/bin/ ~/config/bin/ ~/config/non-packaged/bin/ |
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in /boot/system/bin/. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps will appear in ~/config/bin/ when installed from a .hpkg package. Otherwise you can put them into ~/config/non-packaged/bin/. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
+Here's a list of all commandline applications that are shipped with Haiku. Each with only a short description of what it does, for more detailed information on its usage execute the command with the parameter --help.
Index: A – E :: F – J :: K – O :: P – S :: T – Z
+| CortexAddOnHost | Starts service to monitor audio and video media add-ons in use. | |
| FirstBootPrompt | Language and keymap setup. | |
| [ | Returns true/false after comparing items. | |
| ||
| addattr | Writes an attribute to a file, taking the type into account and converting the values accordingly. (Haiku specific) | |
| alert | Shows a message box. (Haiku specific) | |
| arp | Manipulates the system ARP cache. | |
| awk | See gawk. | |
| base64 | Base64 encode or decode to standard output. | |
| basename | Strips directory and optionally suffix from a /path/to/filename string. | |
| bash | Bourne-again shell. | |
| bc | An arbitrary precision calculator language. | |
| beep | Rings a bell. | |
| bunzip2 | See bzip2. | |
| bzip2 | File compressor. | |
| c++ | C++-Compiler. | |
| cat | Concatenates files and prints to standard output. | |
| catattr | Prints out the contents of an attribute of a file. (Haiku specific) | |
| cc | C-Compiler. | |
| checkfs | Checks and repairs the file system. (Haiku specific) | |
| checkitout | Checks out sources simply with their repository's URL. | |
| chgrp | Changes group ownership of files. | |
| chmod | Changes permissions of files. | |
| chop | Splits a file into smaller files. | |
| chown | Changes the owner of files. | |
| chroot | Runs a command within a specified root directory. | |
| cksum | Prints out CRC checksum and byte count of files. | |
| clear | Clears the terminal window. | |
| cmp | Compares files byte by byte. | |
| collectcatkeys | [Leftover from the move of locale-kit.] | |
| comm | Compares sorted files line by line. | |
| consoled | Console daemon. | |
| copyattr | Copies all or a subset of attributes from one or more files to another or new file. (Haiku specific) | |
| cp | Copies files and directories. | |
| csplit | Split a file into pieces separated by a specified pattern. | |
| ctags | Generates an index file for a variety of language objects found in files. | |
| cut | Prints out sections from each line of a file. | |
| date | Displays or sets the current time and date. | |
| dc | Desk calculator language. | |
| dd | Copies raw data, converting and formatting according operands. | |
| desklink | Installs items in Deskbar. (Haiku specific) | |
| diskimage | Registers a file as disk device that can then be mounted. (Haiku specific) | |
| df | Reports free and used space of mounted volumes. | |
| diff | Compares files line by line. | |
| diff3 | Compares three files line by line. | |
| dircolors | Color setup for ls. | |
| dirname | Strips the filename from a /path/to/filename string. | |
| draggers | Shows/sets the dragger state of Replicants. | |
| driveinfo | Shows hardware information. | |
| dstcheck | Shows a message box used when switching to/from daylight saving time. | |
| du | Summarizes disk usage of each file, recursively for directories. | |
| dumpcatalog | [Leftover from the move of locale-kit.] | |
| echo | Displays a line of text. | |
| egrep | See grep. | |
| eject | Ejects removable media. | |
| env | Runs a program in a modified environment. | |
| error | Prints clear text error messages for given error numbers. | |
| expand | Converts tabs to spaces. | |
| expr | Prints the value of an expression. | |
F | ||
| factor | Prints the prime factors of integer numbers. | |
| false | Does nothing, indicates "unsuccessful" and returns the value "1". | |
| fdinfo | Shows info about the used file descriptors in the system. | |
| ffm | Sets focus follows mouse. | |
| fgrep | See grep. | |
| filepanel | Displays a load/save file panel. (Haiku specific) | |
| find | Searches for files in a directory hierarchy. | |
| finddir | Finds special directories defined by the system. | |
| fmt | Reformats the paragraphs of a file. | |
| fold | Wraps input lines of a file. | |
| fortune | Prints a random, hopefully interesting, adage. | |
| freetype-config | Shows FreeType compilation and linking information. | |
| fstrim | Send a TRIM command to an SSD drive. | |
| ftp | File transfer program. | |
| ftpd | FTP daemon. | |
| funzip | Extracts the first item of an archive to standard output. | |
| fwcontrol | FireWire control program. | |
| gawk | Pattern scanning and processing language. | |
| getarch | Shows the environment's compiler version. | |
| grep | Search for a pattern. | |
| groups | Prints group memberships for each username. | |
| gunzip | See gzip. | |
| gzexe | De/Compresses executables. | |
| gzip | De/Compresses files. | |
| hd | Hexdump. | |
| head | Prints the first lines of a file. | |
| hey | A small tool for scripting GUI apps. | |
| hostname | Prints or sets the hostname of the system. | |
| id | Prints user and group information. | |
| ifconfig | Configures a network interface. | |
| install | Copies files to a destination without disrupting the running system. | |
| install-wifi-firmwares.sh | Installs firmware for various wireless network cards. | |
| installsound | Installs a new sound event in the Sounds preferences panel. | |
| iroster | Lists input devices. | |
| isvolume | Gets information about a mounted volume. | |
| join | For each pair of input lines with identical join fields, write a line to standard output. | |
| ||
| kernel_debugger | Enters the kernel debugger. | |
| keymap | Loads or saves a keymap. | |
| kill | Sends a signal to quit a process. | |
| launch_roster | Controls the launch_daemon, e.g. stop and restart services. (Haiku specific) | |
| less | Views a file. | |
| lessecho | Echos its arguments and expands metacharacters, such as * and ? in filenames. | |
| lesskey | Specifies key binding for less. | |
| link | Creates a link to a file. | |
| linkcatkeys | [Leftover from the move of locale-kit.] | |
| listarea | Lists area info for all currently running teams. | |
| listattr | Lists the attributes of a file. (Haiku specific) | |
| listdev | Lists all hardware devices. | |
| listimage | Lists image info for all currently running teams. | |
| listport | Lists all open ports in the system organized by team. | |
| listres | Lists resources of files. | |
| listsem | Lists the semaphores allocated by the specified team. | |
| listusb | Lists USB devices. | |
| ln | Creates a link to a file. | |
| locale | Shows the set preferred language, its LC_CTYPE and the preferred formatting. | |
| locate | Locates a file. | |
| logger | Sends a message to the system log. | |
| login | Starts a session on the system. | |
| logname | Prints the name of the current user. | |
| ls | Lists directory content. | |
| lsindex | Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition. (Haiku specific) | |
| mail2mbox | Converts BeOS e-mail files to Unix mailbox files. | |
| make | GNU make utility. | |
| makebootable | Makes the specified BFS partitions/devices bootable by writing boot code into the first two sectors. | |
| mbox2mail | Converts Unix mailbox files to BeOS e-mail files. | |
| md5sum | Prints or checks MD5 checksums. | |
| media_client | "media_client play" plays back audio files. | |
| message | Prints a flattened BMessage file. | |
| mimeset | Sets MIME type of a file. | |
| mkdepend | Makefile dependency generator. | |
| mkdir | Creates a directory. | |
| mkdos | Initializes FAT partitions. | |
| mkfifo | Creates named pipes. | |
| mkfs | Creates a file system. | |
| mkindex | Creates a new index for an attribute. (Haiku specific) | |
| mktemp | Safely creates a temporary file or directory. | |
| modifiers | Prints currently (un)pressed modifier keys. | |
| more | See less. | |
| mount | Mounts a file system. | |
| mount_nfs | Mounts a NFS partition. | |
| mountvolume | Mounts a volume by name. | |
| mv | Moves/renames a file. | |
| nano | The default text editor in the Terminal, a clone of 'Pico'. | |
| netstat | Prints network connections, routing tables, interface statistics, masquerade connections and multicast memberships. | |
| nl | Prints each file with line numbers added. | |
| nohup | Runs a command ignoring hangup signals. | |
| nproc | Prints the number of available processing units. | |
| od | Writes an unambiguous representation of a file. | |
| open | Launches an application/document from the shell. (Haiku specific) | |
| ||
| package | Creates, inspects, or extracts a Haiku package. | |
| package_repo | Creates or inspects a Haiku package repository file. | |
| passwd | Changes the user password. | |
| paste | Prints lines consisting of the sequentially corresponding lines from each file, separated by tabs. | |
| patch | Applies a diff file to an original. | |
| pathchk | Diagnoses invalid or unportable file names. | |
| pc | Programmer's calculator. | |
| ping | Sends ICMP-echo-request to network host. | |
| pkg-config | Analyzes and configures a Haiku package. | |
| pkgman | Manages packages and package repositories. | |
| play | Plays tracks from CD. | |
| pr | Paginates or columnates files for printing. | |
| printenv | Prints the value of an environment variable. | |
| printf | Formats and prints data. | |
| prio | Changes priority of a process. | |
| profile | Profiles threads. | |
| ps | Lists running processes. | |
| ptx | Outputs a permuted index, including context, of the words in the input files. | |
| pwd | Prints current directory. | |
| query | A shell utility emulating Tracker's "Find by formula" functionality. (Haiku specific) | |
| quit | Quits an application. | |
| ramdisk | Creates a ramdisk. (Haiku specific) | |
| rc | Resource compiler. | |
| readlink | Prints the path to the destination of a symbolic link. | |
| reindex | Puts attributes of existing files into newly created indexes. (Haiku specific) | |
| release | Releases a semaphore. | |
| renice | Alters the priority of a running process. | |
| rm | Removes files and directories. | |
| rmattr | Removes an attribute from a file. (Haiku specific) | |
| rmdir | Removes directories. | |
| rmindex | Removes the index for an attribute. (Haiku specific) | |
| roster | Prints information about running teams. | |
| route | Lists and manipulates network routes. | |
| safemode | Checks if the system is running in safemode. | |
| screen_blanker | Starts the screen blanker. | |
| screenmode | Show/sets the screen mode. | |
| sdiff | Shows or merges differences of two files side-by-side. | |
| seq | Prints a sequence of numbers. | |
| setarch | Sets the environment to a specific compiler version. | |
| setdecor | Shows/sets the decorator. | |
| settype | Sets the MIME type, signature and preferred application of a file. | |
| setversion | Shows the version of a file. | |
| setvolume | Sets the system sound volume. | |
| sh | See bash. | |
| sha1sum | Prints or checks SHA1 checksums. | |
| shar | Creates shell archives. | |
| shred | Overwrites a file repeatedly. | |
| shuf | Prints a random permutation of the input lines. | |
| shutdown | Shuts down the computer. | |
| sleep | Pauses for a specified number of seconds. | |
| sort | Prints a sorted concatenation of all files. | |
| spamdbm | Classifies e-mail messages as spam or genuine. | |
| split | Outputs fixed-size pieces of input files to files with prefixes. | |
| stat | Displays file or file system status. | |
| strace | Traces the syscalls of a thread or a team. | |
| stty | Shows/sets terminal characteristics. | |
| su | Changes the effective user id and group. | |
| sum | Prints checksum and block counts for each file. | |
| sync | Forces changed blocks to disk, updates the superblock. | |
| sysinfo | Shows system info. | |
| ||
| tac | Concatenates and prints files, last line first. | |
| tail | Prints the last ten lines of a file. | |
| tcpdump | Dumps traffic of a network. | |
| tcptester | [deprecated] | |
| tee | Writes or appends data from standard input to a file. | |
| telnet | User interface to the telnet protocol. | |
| telnetd | Telnet daemon. | |
| test | Returns true/false after comparing items. | |
| timeout | Starts a command and kills it if it's still running after a specified number of seconds. | |
| top | Displays running threads and CPU usage. | |
| touch | Changes a file's timestamp. | |
| tput | Initializes a terminal or query terminfo database. | |
| tr | Translates, squeezes and/or deletes characters from standard input. | |
| traceroute | Prints the route packets take through a network. | |
| translate | Uses DataTranslators to convert file formats. | |
| trash | Sends files to trash or restores them. | |
| true | Does nothing, indicates "success" and returns the value "0". | |
| truncate | Shrinks or extends the size of a file. | |
| tsort | Does a topological sorting. | |
| tty | Prints the file name of the terminal connected to standard input. | |
| uname | Prints out system information. | |
| unchop | Recreates a file previously split with chop. | |
| unexpand | Converts spaces to tabs. | |
| uniq | Filters adjacent matching lines from input, writing to output. | |
| unlink | Calls the unlink function to remove the specified file. | |
| unmount | Unmounts a volume. | |
| unrar | Expands a rar archive. | |
| unshar | Expands a shar archive. | |
| untrash | See trash. | |
| unzip | Expands a zip archive. | |
| unzipsfx | Used to make existing zip archives self-extracting. | |
| updatedb | Updates a localization database. | |
| uptime | Prints date and time, as well as the time elapsed since the system was started. | |
| urlwrapper | Wraps URL MIME types around command line or other apps that don't handle them directly. | |
| useradd | Creates a new user. | |
| uudecode | Decodes a uuencoded file. | |
| uuencode | Uuencodes a file so it can be mailed to a remote system. | |
| vdir | Lists information about files. | |
| version | Returns the version of a file. | |
| vmstat | Prints information about the virtual memory system. | |
| waitfor | Waits until a certain thread appears. (Haiku specific) | |
| watch | Executes a program periodically. | |
| wc | Prints the number of paragraphs, words and characters (bytes) of a file. | |
| wget | Tool for downloading via HTTP, HTTPS or FTP. | |
| which | Locates a command. | |
| whoami | Prints user name associated with the current effective user ID. | |
| xargs | Builds and executes command lines from standard input. | |
| xres | Lists and manipulates resources. | |
| yes | Prints out a string repeatedly until killed. | |
| zcat | See gzip. | |
| zcmp | See zdiff. | |
| zdiff | Compares compressed files. | |
| zforce | Forces a '.gz' extension on gzip files. | |
| zgrep | Scan through possibly compressed files for a regular expression. | |
| zip | Adds or replaces items in a zip archive. | |
| zipcloak | Encrypts all unencrypted items in a zip archive. | |
| zipgrep | Scans the given zip items for a string or pattern. | |
| zipinfo | See unzip. | |
| zipnote | Prints the comments in a zip archive. | |
| zipsplit | Splits a zip archive into smaller pieces. | |
| zmore | Like more but operates on the uncompressed contents of any compressed file. | |
| znew | Recompresses .Z files into .gz (gzip) archives. | |
Magnify
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Magnify | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Magnify_prefs |
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
+At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "64 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 64x32 pixel rectangle around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
+Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
+You can move the red outline with ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALT H. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
+They can also be moved with ← / → / ↑ / ↓. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with ALT ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+Clicking on the pop-up menu or right-clicking into the pixel grid gives you a number of options:
+| ALT S | Saves the current display as a PNG image. | ||
| ALT C | Copies the current display to the clipboard. | ||
| ALT T | Shows additional information. | ||
| ALT H | Adds a crosshair you can drag around. | ||
| ALT SHIFT H | Removes the last added crosshair. | ||
| ALT G | Shows a grid overlay. | ||
| ALT F | Stops updating the magnification area. | ||
| ALT I | Keeps updating the magnification area, but doesn't follow the mouse pointer any more. | ||
| ALT / | Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window. | ||
| ALT - | Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer. | ||
| ALT + | Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer. | ||
| ALT , | Lowers magnification. | ||
| ALT . | Increases magnification. |
| Indeks |
| Reading messages + Creating new messages + Preferences |
Mail
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Mail | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Mail/ +~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links/ - Objects put here appear in the mailbox' context menu +~/config/settings/Mail/signatures/ - Location to store signatures +~/config/settings/Mail/status/ - Location to store custom statuses |
Mail is Haiku's default viewer and editor of emails. It has nothing to do with the actual fetching and sending of mails, which is done by the mail_daemon and can be configured via the E-mail preferences.
+This page is a general overview of the application Mail. For more information how email in Haiku works, refer to the Workshop on managing email.
+
+
+Reading messages
+You double-click an email file to open it in Mail. The interface is quite simple:
+
+A menu and optional tool bar on top, with an area of the interesting attributes of a mail (to, from, subject, date) below that, and then the actual body of the mail. If the mail appears with strange characters or empty, try to change the from the pop-up menu.
+If there are files attached to an email, they are listed at the end of the message. A right-click on one opens a context menu to or . You can also drag & drop directly to the Desktop or another Tracker window.
+Most of the menu and tool bar items are pretty self-explaining, so we'll concentrate just on the highlights.
+
+File
+When you close the window of a new mail, its status is normally switched from "New" to "Read". But you can set other statuses as well, by choosing from the submenu. There you'll also find the option to create your own custom statuses, which are saved under ~/config/settings/Mail/status/.
+
+Edit
+Here you'll find an item to open Mail's (see below) and a shortcut to manage your , which will open the E-mail preference panel.
+
+View
+You'll only seldomly need these two items, if at all:
+| ALT H | Shows the complete header of a mail, in case you need to track down the path of your mail, for example. | ||
| Displays a mail in its raw state, i.e. with all its control characters and without Mail's coloring of quotes or URLs, for example.. |
+Message
+The different options to reply to a mail may need a bit of explanation.
+| ALT R | The standard reply to the server that has sent the mail to you. NOTE: In case of a mailing list post, this normally replies back to the mailing list, not just the person that wrote the post! | ||
| OPT ALT R | This on the other hand, sends directly and only to the person listed in the "From" attribute. | ||
| SHIFT ALT R | Replies to the original sender plus all other (cc'ed) recipients of the original mail. |
The items to , and are again pretty self-explaining.
+When you've opened an email from a Tracker or query result window, and will move to the previous/next email in the list.
+collects all email addresses from the header and the actual email body in a submenu. Choosing an address will open the People application in order to complete and save the contact information.
+
+Queries
+This menu holds queries that show all mails related to the currently open mail. Selecting , or opens a query that lists all corresponding mails:
+
+
+
+
+Creating new messages
+A new email is created by invoking the menu or the corresponding icon from the tool bar of an open email. Or you just start the Mail application or choose from the context menu of the mailbox icon in the Deskbar.
+
+The window is pretty similar to the one when reading mails. The menu and tool bar items are slightly different and the text boxes have to be filled with the recipient's email address, subject and so on, of course.
+ is short for the anachronistic term "carbon copy" and results in copies of your mail being sent to the listed people. The difference to just listing a buch of addresses in the "To" field is, that you don't directly address the cc'ed people, thereby signaling that you probably don't expect an answer of them.
+ means "blind carbon copy" which does practically the same as "Cc", but hides the recipients from each other.
You can enter several recipients by separating their addresses with a comma. +, , and are pop-up menus. They contain all email addresses on your system found by a query for People files. Their "Group" attribute will sort them in corresponding submenus.
+Again, we'll focus on the more interesting features in the menus.
+
+File
+With you can store your work so far and come back to it later. To load it again, choose it from the submenu that will list the result of a query for all mails with the status "Draft".
+
+Edit
+and or their respective shortcuts ALT / - are used to add/remove a level of quoting by adjusting the number of ">" symbols in front of quoted lines. Just select some text in all the lines you want un/quoted and invoke the menu item.
+ +
+
+currently only offers corrections of English texts by marking wrong or unknown words red and showing them in italic. +Right-clicking such a word opens a context menu offering suggestions to correct the word or to it to the accepted vocabulary.
+Then, there are again the items to open Mail's (see below) and a shortcut to managing your , which will open the E-mail preference panel.
+
+Message
+With you can add predefined texts to the end of your mail. From its submenu you can choose a specific or one.
+ +
+
+You create new or edit existing signatures with , which will open a window where you enter the text itself and the title of your new sig. There, in the menu, you find items to a specific signature or or the currently loaded one, Signatures should be saved in ~/config/settings/Mail/signatures.
+Use and to add/remove files as attachments. You can also drag & drop files from a Tracker window. Be careful though to drop those in the header section (To/From/Subject area at the top) or they'll get pasted into the email body if they are text files.
+ +
+
+File attachments are listed below the header section. You can remove a file by invoking a context menu or by selecting it and pressing DEL.
+ +
+Queries
+This doesn't work yet, but is intended to hold queries that would show all mail related to the currently open mail, like all to the same recipient or same subject/thread.
+ +
+
+Preferences
+
+Mail's preferences come in two parts:
+
+User interface
+| Options to show labels under the icons or hide the tool bar completely. | ||
| Sets the type of font used for the email text. | ||
| Sets the font size. | ||
| Colors different levels of quotation. | ||
| Turns the spell checker on/off on startup. | ||
| If you close an email with the Status "New", you can have it automatically marked as "Read". |
+Mailing
+| If you have several email accounts, this specifies which to use by default when creating a new message. | ||
| When you reply to a mail, you can either always set in the pop-up menu above, or use the , which will send the mail from the same account that received the original message. | ||
This is inserted before the quoted text in your reply. You can use various variables from the pop-up menu next to the text field. Example: "Hello %n!\n\nOn %d you wrote:\n" produces this:
+Hello Dr. Hawking! + +On Mon, 18 Jan 1998 02:55:16 +0800 you wrote: +> so thanks again for the inspiration concerning the cosmological constant. +> ...and the rest of the quoted text following... | ||
| Adds a signature automatically to the end of the mail. | ||
| Sets the default encoding. | ||
| If your mail contains characters that can't be encoded with the currently set encoding method, you can turn on being warned about that. That gives you the opportunity to change the encoding before sending. Otherwise unencodable characters are replaced by rectangle symbols. | ||
| Inserts line-breaks every 76 characters which makes mails easier to read. | ||
| You can choose to send BFS' attributes of a file alongside the attachments. This is nice for other Haiku users, as they'll get a "complete" file (think artist, album, title attributes of MP3 files), but may cause confusion (or even suspicion) with others, who will wonder what the additional "BeOS Attributes" attachment might be... +Should you opt not to send attributes with your attachments, remember zip up your files before you send them or you'll strip away BFS attributes. |
MediaPlayer
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/MediaPlayer | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/MediaPlayer |
MediaPlayer is the default player for all audio and video files. Thanks to it's ffmpeg backend, a plethora of widely used formats are supported. Its simple interface has all the controls you'd expect:
+
+The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.
+Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.
Audio and video playback
+Since there aren't any specific features for for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.
+
+Available to all media is the (ALT I). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.
+Most of the often used commands from the menus are also available from a right-click context menu on the video area. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+Under you'll find options to zoom the window to various levels or force the aspect ratio to some standard values. Leaving the aspect ration to the default should work best for correctly encoded files.
MediaPlayer supports subtitles in SRT format. To have them show up under , their filenames have to be identical to their video file, with a suffixed language name and ".srt" instead of the video's extension. For example:
+MyMovie.avi +MyMovie.Deutsch.srt +MyMovie.English.srt +MyMovie.Français.srt+
Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the submenu. The submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.
+You can toggle the mode (ALT ENTER or F or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with (ALT H or a double right-click) or have it's window (ALT A).
+ +Playlists
+(ALT P) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.
+
+You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the menu you can or (DEL) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with (ALT T).
+Of course, you can a playlist and later it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.
+ +Settings
+There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:
+
+The first batch, , is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
+Next are different .
+You can opt to , which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.
+You can (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode.
+ if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.
+Then there are settings for and . They can be shown at the , which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or , which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at , at less confusing or quietly .
+ +Keyboard controls
+MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.
+| Z | Skip to previous track | |
| X | Play | |
| C | Pause | |
| V | Stop | |
| B | Skip to next track |
These keys are assigned to the functions of the control buttons. They are always the bottom left letter keys on the keyboard, i.e. they are used independently of your current keymapping. The above keys correspond to a standard US-american keymap.
+| ← / → | Seek backwards/forwards | |
| SHIFT ← / → | Jump backwards/forwards 10 seconds | |
| ALT ← / → | Jump backwards/forwards 30 seconds | |
| ↓ / ↑ | Decrease/Increase volume | |
| ALT ↓ / ↑ | Skip to next/previous Track | |
| Spacebar | Toggle play/pause | |
| ALT ENTER | Toggle full-screen mode (also done by double left-clicking the video area or pressing F or TAB) | |
| ALT SHIFT 0 / 1 / 2 / 3 | Changes aspect ratio to (how the video was encoded), (maps the pixels of the video 1:1 to the screen), , |
-
+
MidiPlayer
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/MidiPlayer | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/MidiPlayerSettings |
As the name suggests, MidiPlayer is used to playback MIDI music files. MIDI files are special, as they don't contain the actual digitized and in some way encoded music, but only a description of it: Hold this note for that long with this volume and use instrument X for it.
+While this keeps file sizes pretty small, it also follows that depending on the instrument library (the so-called "SoundFont") the results can differ hugely. Also, these SoundFonts tend to be quite large, increasingly so with the number and quality of the instrument samples.
Haiku releases include a small but relatively high quality SoundFont. People who use MIDI more seriously often already have very high quality or custom SoundFonts.
+To use other SoundFonts (that don't come installable via HaikuDepot as a HPKG), just copy the .sf file to e.g. ~/config/non-packaged/data/synth/. You can select the active SoundFont in the Media preferences under .
+MidiPlayer's interface is very simple. Just double-click or drag & drop a midi file and playback starts. You control the volume with the slider and add reverb effects from the pop-up menu. Activating the scope will show a visualization in form of an oscilloscope running at the top.
+ +LegacyPackageInstaller
+| Deskbar: | No entry, normally launched via +double-clicking a supported file. | |
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/LegacyPackageInstaller | |
| Pengaturan: | none |
LegacyPackageInstaller is an installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. It provides an easy-to-use GUI that helps in fast package installation in Haiku.
+It is being executed automatically when you try to open files with .pkg extension.
+
+The main window gives access to two configurations:
+-
+
After clicking Install the extraction and installation process will begin.
+
+At this point warnings and errors can appear saying which libraries and dependencies are missing in order to run the program. It might be required to install these packages before attempting to install desired program.
+When the installation is complete, package should appear in the Deskbar applications menu.
+ +Pe
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Pe/Pe | |
| Dokumentasi: | /boot/system/apps/Pe/Documentation/index.html | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/pe/* |
Pe is a sophisticated editor, with its syntax highlighting targeted mainly at programmers and HTML writers. Originally created by Maarten Hekkelmann, it's been open sourced and maintained by Haiku developers. A bugtracker and more information is available at the Pe project page.
+Find out more about Pe's features in its local documentation.
+ +People
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/People | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/People_data |
People is a simple contact database using the attributes of Haiku's filesystem to store addresses and other contact information. Every contact is saved as one Person file with its data in separate attributes. All are indexed and therefore searchable with a query.
+ +
+
+The Group attribute at the bottom allows assigning a person to one or more groups. Useful for "mass mailing" a number of people who, for example, work on a specific project. The pop-up menu offers all currently existing groups. If a person belongs to more than one group, the group names are delimited with a ",".
+ +These Person files are usually all saved in /boot/home/people/. To get a list of all your contacts, just open your people folder and display all attributes of interest. If you choose to organize your Person files in different folders, just use a query to display them all in one window.
+ +
+
+You can treat these files like any other: You can sort according to attributes (even a second sorting order by holding SHIFT while clicking) and of course delete, duplicate or rename Person files. Even the contact information can be edited directly: Clicking on an attribute (or ALT E) to edit works just like renaming a file. Once you're in edit mode, TAB and SHIFT TAB will jump from column to column.
+ +PoorMan
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/PoorMan | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/PoorMan Settings |
PoorMan is a nice little webserver that's extremely easy to set up. Naturally it doesn't offer any advanced features like other heavy duty server software, it's after all only a poor man's webserver.
+Upon its first launch, PoorMan asks for the folder that is about to be served to the web. If you go with the , a new folder /boot/home/public_html is created for you. As a start page a HTML file named by default index.html has to be present there.
+PoorMan presents itself with a simple console that logs its activity. Then, there's status information if the server is running, which folder is being served, and a hit counter. Settings are changed with : +
+
The settings panel is divided into three tabs:
+In you can select another folder to serve, enter another start page and have the option to send a file listing if the start page isn't present.
+ lets you de/activate logging to the console or optionally to a separate logfile.
+The tab holds the setting for the maximum simultaneous connections.
The menu items of the console window are all self-explanatory. With them you can e.g. save (parts) of the console output, clear the console or logging file and start/stop the server or clear the hit counter.
+ +Screenshot
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Screenshot +/bin/screenshot | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/screenshot |
Tangkapan layar diambil dengan memulai aplikasi Screenshot atau dengan menekan tombol PRINT,
+
Di panel Screenshot Anda dapat beralih antara mengambil seluruh layar atau hanya jendela aktif dan memutuskan apakah batas jendela dan penunjuk tetikus harus dimasukkan. Anda juga dapat memasukkan penundaan sebelum tangkapan layar diambil.
+Di bawahnya Anda menetapkan nama, format, dan lokasi untuk tangkapan layar yang akan digunakan ketika Anda mengklik . Alih-alih menyimpan file ke disk Anda juga dapat memutuskan untuk untuk dapat menempelkan bidikan langsung ke aplikasi lain, atau mengambil .
+Semua pengaturan diingat saat Anda mengambil tangkapan layar berikutnya, mengaktifkan pintasan keyboard yang nyaman ini:
+| Mengambil tangkapan layar tanpa penundaan dan meluncurkan panel Screenshot. | ||
| SHIFT PRINT | Mengambil tangkapan layar secara diam-diam (tanpa membuka panel), sambil tetap menghormati pengaturan yang terakhir digunakan. | |
| CTRL PRINT | Juga mengambil tangkapan layar secara diam-diam dengan pengaturan yang disimpan, tetapi alih-alih menyimpannya sebagai file, itu hanya disalin ke clipboard. |
+
+Mengambil tangkapan layar dari Terminal
+Ada aplikasi tangkapan layar khusus yang dapat digunakan dari Terminal atau skrip.
+ tangkapan layar --help menunjukkan opsi yang dikenal sebagai parameter:
~> screenshot --help + +screenshot [OPTIONS] [FILE] Creates a bitmap of the current screen + +FILE is the optional output path / filename used in silent mode. An exisiting +file with the same name will be overwritten without warning. If FILE is not +given the screenshot will be saved to a file with the default filename in the +user's home directory. + +OPTIONS + -m, --mouse-pointer Include the mouse pointer + -b, --border Include the window border + -w, --window Capture the active window instead of the entire screen + -d, --delay=seconds Take screenshot after the specified delay [in seconds] + -s, --silent Saves the screenshot without showing the application + window + -f, --format=image Give the image format you like to save as + [bmp], [gif], [jpg], [png], [ppm], [tga], [tif] + -c, --clipboard Copies the screenshot to the system clipboard without + showing the application window + +Note: OPTION -b, --border takes only effect when used with -w, --window ++ +
-
+
ShowImage
+| Deskbar: | No entry, normally launched via +double-clicking a supported file. | |
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/ShowImage | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings |
ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through DataTranslators. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebP images became available, for example.
+ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.
Viewing
+
+The menu offers to start a of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a from 2 to 20 seconds.
+Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):
+ shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.
+ shrinks the image back into the window frame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.
+ and move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.
Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:
+ applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.
+ will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.
Then there's a mode with an option to which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.
+Lastly, will show/hide the graphical controls:
+
+From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out.
+Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+Browsing
+
+After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
+There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
+Looking at the menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like and let you navigate those pages.
+Editing
+
+The menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.
+will open the Backgrounds preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.
+Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to from the menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding CTRL while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.
+ or ESC will remove the selection box.
The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.
+Saving and converting
+To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal item from the menu, select the format and choose a file name.
+Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.
+This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
+To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
+Keyboard shortcuts
+Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:
+| ← / ↑ | Previous image | |
| → / ↓ | Next image | |
| DEL | Move to Trash | |
| + | Zoom in | |
| - | Zoom out | |
| 0 | Original size (100% zoom) | |
| 1 | Fit to window | |
| ALT ENTER | Toggle full screen mode (also via doubleclick) | |
| CTRL | While holding CTRL you can create a selection frame without explicitly switching to selection mode. |
SoftwareUpdater
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/SoftwareUpdater | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/SoftwareUpdater_settings |
SoftwareUpdater memeriksa semua repositori aktif (lihat preferensi Repositori ) untuk pembaruan paket yang diinstal, termasuk pembaruan sistem ke Haiku sendiri. Ini mengunduh dan menginstal pembaruan yang tersedia dalam sekali jalan.
+
+Setelah diluncurkan, SoftwareUpdater memeriksa pembaruan paket dan menampilkannya dalam daftar dengan versi baru dan deskripsi singkat. Anda dapat memilih untuk untuk memasukkan nama repositori untuk setiap paket dan menunjukkan versi paket lama dan baru.
+akan memulai unduhan semua paket dan instalasi selanjutnya.
+Bergantung pada paket yang diperbarui, Anda mungkin harus me-reboot Haiku untuk benar-benar menyelesaikan proses pembaruan. Aplikasi yang diperbarui biasanya hanya perlu direstart, sementara perubahan ke Haiku sendiri mungkin memerlukan reboot sistem agar memberikan efek.
+-
+
SoundRecorder
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/SoundRecorder | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/??? |
Dokumentasi masih belum ada. Jika Anda ingin mengerjakannya, harap umumkan di milis Dokumentasi untuk menghindari duplikasi.
+ +StyledEdit
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/StyledEdit | |
| Pengaturan: | none |
StyledEdit is Haiku's simple text editor. Although it saves files in plain text format, additional attributes are written in order to have limited formatting capabilities when viewed with StyledEdit.
+
+If you're interested, this is what those additional attributes look like when examined in Terminal with listattr:
+~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt +File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt + Type Size Name +----------- --------- ------------------------------- + Int-32 4 "be:encoding" +MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE" + Int-32 4 "wrap" + Int-32 4 "alignment" + Raw Data 1048 "styles" + +1071 bytes total in attributes.+
As you can see, all the formatting options from StyledEdit's menu are present: line wrapping (on/off) and alignment (left/center/right), each in one attribute. Styles (font, size, color) of each letter mangled into another.
+In any case, it's a nice idea having the possibility of colored text in different fonts and sizes while still being a normal text file. A ReadMe.txt, for example, is therefore readable in a shell on any platform and still has a bit of style when viewed via double-click from Haiku.
+Actually using StyledEdit is so simple, we'll skip explaining every mundane menu item. Just write down your text then select the words you'd like to format and apply font, size and color from the menu. Line wrapping and alignment from the menu only work on the whole file.
+ +-
+
Terminal
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Terminal | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Terminal +~/config/settings/profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/settings/etc/profile +~/config/settings/inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc |
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
+Please refer to the topic on Scripting for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell and also have a look at Haiku's commandline applications. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.
+ +
+
+Windows and tabs
+You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALT N from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with ALT T.
+
++
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
+By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
+Via the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to , or, like double-clicking, .
+A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the menu. ALT ENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
+All the settings you change directly through the menu, like , , or are only kept for the current session. If you want to make permanent changes, you have to apply them in the panel.
+ +
+Settings
+opens a panel to configure the standard settings of a Terminal.
+
++
Most of the offered settings speak for themselves.
+Hover your mouse over the "formulas" for naming tab and window titles to get tooltips for the available variables.
+You can choose pre-defined color schema like or or create a one by selecting which color you want to change (, , etc.) and then use the color picker below.
A few more options follow: you can have a and choose to . The latter setting avoids the sometimes rather unsightly rendering of bold fonts in the Terminal.
+Activate the checkbox to and you'll be warned when trying to close a Terminal window while an app is still being executed.
| let's you save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you opened the settings panel. | ||
| resets everything to default values. |
+
+Keyboard shortcuts
+You'll find a list of useful shortcuts in Shortcuts and key combinations.
+Another nice feature that is more a key & mouse combination: When holding ALT a path or URL under the mouse pointer gets highlighted. A left-click opens the file/folder or website. A right-click opens a context menu to either or . Imagine you're in /MyData/source/haiku/ and have the path generated/objects/haiku/x86_gcc2/release/apps/stylededit/StyledEdit under the mouse pointer, the latter menu item will result in the combined, absolute path <deep breath>:
/MyData/source/haiku/generated/objects/haiku/x86_gcc2/release/apps/stylededit/StyledEdit.
If you hold down ALT SHIFT, only the path from beginning to where your mouse pointer sits will be highlighted.
+By the way, right-clicking into the Terminal window will insert the clipboard. In combination with copying parts of highlighted paths, this can be used for speedy navigation of deep folder hierarchies.
+ +
+
+Bash customization
+Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: profile and inputrc
+Both files can be created in the /boot/home/config/settings/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/settings/etc/.
profile
+The profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
+The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
+-
+
There are more, have a look.
+ +inputrc
+The inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
+ +
+
+Hints for working with the Terminal
+TextSearch
+| Deskbar: | No entry, normally launched via Tracker Add-on | |
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/TextSearch | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/TextSearch |
TextSearch looks for a string in text files. Typically it is invoked from Tracker's Add-on context menu on the selection of files or folders you want to search.
+ +
+
+You enter a search string in the text box on top and hit RETURN or click to start. If is checked, the hits are automatically expanded to show the lines of the file containing the search string.
+ +Only a few words on some of the otherwise self-explaining menu items:
+File menu | ||||
| ALT N | Opens a new window where you can enter another string and search through the same files/folders. + | |||
| ALT F | Lets you choose a new set of files and folders to search through. | |||
Action menu | ||||
| ALT T | Removes all entries from the list that are not currently selected. | |||
| ALT O | Opens the currently selected files with their preferred application (same as a double-click). If it's a text editor supporting it (like Pe), you can jump to the exact line the search string was found. | |||
| ALT K | Opens the location of the currently selected files in Tracker. | |||
| ALT B | Copies the current selection to the clipboard. | |||
Settings menu | ||||
| This is useful when working in a "unixy" environment, where often administrative files are hidden inside ".folders/". Source versioning systems like SVN and CVS are examples of applications using this and are also widely used in Haiku. | ||||
| TextSearch uses the command line tool grep. For it, special characters like '"*\$?! and spaces have to be escaped with a \. Deactivating this setting means you have to do this yourself, but in exchange grants you the power of regular expressions. | ||||
| TextSearch is currently only useful for finding strings in plain text files. Deactivating this setting will have it look through any kind of file anyway. | ||||
History menu | ||||
| Contains recently used search strings. | ||||
Encoding menu | ||||
| Lets you choose different character encodings if needed. | ||||
-
+
TV
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/TV | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/??? |
Dokumentasi masih belum ada. Jika Anda ingin mengerjakannya, harap umumkan di milis Dokumentasi untuk menghindari duplikasi.
+ +| Indeks |
|
+ Keyboard shortcuts + Built-in commands |
Vision
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Vision/Vision | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Vision/* |
Vision is an IRC client originally developed for the BeOS. More documentation and a bug tracker are available at the Vision homepage.
++The most frequented channel is the English speaking #haiku at irc.freenode.net.
Some advice, especially if you're new to IRC:
+-
+
+
+
+
+Keyboard shortcuts
+Vision provides a few handy keyboard shortcuts:
+| TAB | Tab-completion like in Terminal: After entering a few letters of a nickname, hitting TAB completes to the first matching nickname. | |
| ↑ / ↓ | When the input control has focus, this will cycle through your recently entered text. | |
| ALT ↑ / ↓ | Activates the window that appears above / below the currently active (selected) one in the "Window list" | |
| SHIFT ALT ↑ / ↓ | Similar to ALT ↑ / ↓, but with a twist. Instead of activating the window immedietly above / below the current one, it looks ahead. If there are any windows with higher status bits then the current window, it jumps to those. It jumps to the highest found status bit first. + +To understand this, you must know that Vision color codes windows in the list with different "status bits" depending on how its contents have changed since it last had focus: +
|
+
+Built-in commands
+Here's a list of built-in commands, taken with permission from Vision's website.
+The syntax:
+| /COMMAND | the command | |
| <required> | a required parameter | |
| [optional] | an optional parameter | |
| | | a logical OR | |
| ... | more parameters possible |
-
+
WebPositive
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/WebPositive | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Configuration files, cookies, cache and browsing history | |
| ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - All bookmarks as single files |
WebPositive, or Web+ for short, is Haiku's native web browser. One part of its name is a tip of the hat to BeOS' simple NetPositive, the other points to its modern foundation: the WebKit. This open source HTML rendering library is at the heart of other mainstream browsers as well, like Safari of Mac OS X and Google's Chrome. By using the ever evolving WebKit, Web+ will be able to keep up with new web technologies.
+
+WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.
+Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.
+Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.
+At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.
Settings
+From the menu you can open a panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.
+
+The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a , what's used as a , what is used for stuff you get from the net.
+Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.
+Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.
+Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.
In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.
+The last tab is used to configure a proxy server.
+Browsing
+If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.
+-
+
Bookmarks
+WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with .
+
+You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's menu, then select a file, press ALT E and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with TAB.
You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.
By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.
+Activating in Tracker's preferences, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more ↑ or ↓ to move the selection and pressing ENTER opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.
For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...
+Downloads
+opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:
+
+Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you and a download, or the file, or its entry from the list. The and buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.
+Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".
+Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.
Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with DiskProbe and have a look at its META:url attribute.
+Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.
Keyboard shortcuts
+Here are some useful keyboard shortcuts:
+| ALT T | Opens a new tab. | |
| ALT W | Closes the current tab. | |
| ALT N | Opens a new window. | |
| SHIFT ALT W | Closes the current window. | |
| ALT ENTER | Toggles full screen mode. | |
| ALT R or F5 | Refreshes the current page. | |
| ALT H | Opens the home page. | |
| ALT D | Shows/hides the Downloads window. | |
| ALT F | Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with ESC). | |
| ALT B | Bookmarks the current page. | |
| ALT M | Manage bookmarks, opening the Bookmarks folder. | |
| ALT ← | Previous page in the history. | |
| ALT → | Next page in the history. |
WonderBrush
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/WonderBrush/WonderBrush | |
| Dokumentasi: | /boot/system/apps/WonderBrush/Documentation en | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/WonderBrush |
WonderBrush is an editor for bitmap and vector graphics. Find more information and workshops at the YellowBites website and in the local documentation.
+ +Attributes
+ +Attributes are data fields that belong to a file but aren't part of that file, e.g. they are not computed into the file size and can be copied or changed without touching the file itself. The system uses these attributes to store e.g. file size, file type or date of the last modification. This is similar to other operating systems and their filesystems.
+What's different is that you can add any kind of attribute to any file and display it or make it editable in a Tracker window. You just have to define the kind of attribute you want to add to a file type (e.g. string, integer or time) and give it a name and description.
+The file itself doesn't even need any contents at all. Take a look at these People files for example:
+
++
As you can see, these are all 0-sized files with attached attributes, the E-mail attribute of "John Nox" being edited right in Tracker.
+If you index these attributes, as People, Email or audio files are by default, they are also searchable with Haiku's fast query system.
+ +
+
+Attributes in Tracker
+Attributes are displayed quite similar to a database or spreadsheet. Using Tracker you can choose which attributes to display (columns) and sort file listings (rows) accordingly.
+To do this, open a Tracker window, click on the menu, and select the attributes you want to display. Alternatively, simply right-click onto a column heading and mark the items in the context menu. You can rearrange the columns by a simple drag & drop of the column heading. Moving a column out of a window, is a fast way to get rid of columns you don't need.
+Double-click on the line between two attributes in the heading to automatically resize a column to its optimal width.
+Click on a column heading to toggle the sorting order from ascending to descending. You can establish a secondary sort order by pressing the SHIFT key while clicking on a column heading. You can sort your People files by company and within that order sort by contact name, for instance. See the above screenshot as an example. The secondary sort order is marked by a lighter colored indicator beside the heading.
+Editing these attributes is as simple as renaming a file: Either click on an entry or press ALT E and move between the attributes with TAB and SHIFT TAB. ESC leaves the editing mode without applying the changes.
+ +
+
+Attributes in Terminal
+If you prefer to use the commandline or plan to work with many files using scripting, there are several commands for controlling attributes from Terminal.
+
+
+listattr
+listattr lists a file's attributes, but doesn't show the contents of the attributes.
+usage: listattr 'filename' ['filename' ...]+
From our screenshot example above:
+~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters +File: Clara Botters + Type Size Name +----------- --------- ------------------------------- +MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE" + Text 14 "META:name" + Text 6 "META:nickname" + Text 1 "META:company" + + Text 18 "META:address" + Text 8 "META:city" + Text 1 "META:state" + Text 1 "META:zip" + Text 1 "META:country" + + Text 1 "META:hphone" + Text 13 "META:wphone" + Text 1 "META:fax" + Text 19 "META:email" + Text 1 "META:url" + + Text 5 "META:group" + Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le" + +131 bytes total in attributes.+
Besides all the "META:*" attributes that hold the contact's information, there are two attributes that are managed by the system:
+-
+
+
+catattr
+catattr displays the contents of a specific attribute of a file.
+usage: catattr [--raw|-r] attr_name file1 [file2...]+
Again our example:
+~/people ->catattr META:city Clara\ Botters +Clara Botters : string : Whelton+ +
+
+addattr
+addattr adds an attribute to a file and/or fills it with a value.
+usage: addattr [-t type] attr value file1 [file2...] + or: addattr [-f value-from-file] [-t type] attr file1 [file2...] + + Type is one of: + string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, icon, raw + or a numeric value (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...) + The default is "string"+
So, say dear Clara took a job with the multi-national Barkelbaer Inc., you fill the formerly empty "Company" attribute with that data (which is of type "string"):
+~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters+ +
+
+rmattr
+rmattr completely removes an attribute from a file.
+ +usage: rmattr [-p] attr filename1 [filename2...] + 'attr' is the name of an attribute of the file + If '-p' is specified, 'attr' is regarded as a pattern.+
Though in all practicality it would be enough to just not fill the "Fax" attribute, you can completely remove it from Clara's file by typing:
+~/people ->rmattr META:fax Clara\ Botters+ +
+
+copyattr
+copyattr copies attributes from one or more files to another. By default, the actual contents of the file is not copied.
+Usage: copyattr <options> <source> [ ... ] <destination>+ +
If you do want to copy the attributes plus the data of the file itself, you can add the option "-d" or "--data".
+ +More information on these commands and their options can be found by typing the command name followed by "-h" or "--help".
+ +Bash and Scripting
+ +"Scripting" is the technique of automating procedures by stringing together commands and saving it all as text files, so called "scripts". Every time you run such a script, the commands are processed one after the other just like they would if you entered them into the Terminal by hand.
+Scripts can range from simply executing a few commands in a specific order to sophisticated pieces of code that solve complex tasks.
+
+The Bash
+Since scripts rely naturally a lot on the shell they are interpreted by, you should first familiarize yourself with the BASH that's used by Haiku. There are many resources online as it's a widely used shell. One nice document is Johan Jansson's Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
+The Bash Reference Manual (PDF, 720 KiB) is a nice resource to get into the details.
+
+The Scripting Bible
+After you've learned a few basics about working in the shell, it's time to slowly ease yourself into the world of scripting. Again, you'll find loads of tutorials and reference material online as well as in bookstores. A very nice introduction that's practically tailor-made for Haiku is the online available Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900 KiB) of Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible.
+ +
+Scripts in Haiku
+Haiku used to have scripts for booting and shutting down. Today it uses the launch_daemon instead. However, the user can still augment this process with certain user scripts. +If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Otherwise simply add your commands where in the process you want them to be executed.
+ +
+
+The UserBootscript
+/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserBootscript will be executed after the system has finished its boot process. For example, you could launch a number of programs that would then be automatically started on every boot up:
+# Start LaunchBox +/boot/system/apps/LaunchBox & + +# Start Workspaces Applet +/boot/system/apps/Workspaces &+
Remember to end a command with an "&" to start it as a background process, or the script will halt until that command has finished (in this case: the launched app was closed).
+ +A simple alternative to the above for launching applications at boot up is to put links to them in the /boot/home/config/settings/boot/launch directory. This can be done simply by right-clicking on the application you wish to have started automatically, going to and then navigating to the above directory.
+ +
+The UserShutdownScript - not yet working
+/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserShutdownScript will be executed as the first step in the shutdown process. If the script returns a non-zero exit status, the shutdown is aborted.
+ +
+
+The UserShutdownFinishScript - not yet working
+/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript is executed as the last step in the shutdown process. Note, that most parts of the system have terminated by the time this script is executed.
+ +Boot Loader
+ +Haiku's Boot Loader Options can help when you experience hardware related problems or want to choose which Haiku installation to start, if you have more than one (maybe on an installation CD or USB stick). It's also handy if you have installed a software component that acts up and prevents you from booting Haiku, see Troubleshooting below.
+To enter the Boot Loader Options, you have to press and keep holding the SHIFT key before the beginning of Haiku's boot process. If there's a boot manager installed, you can start holding SHIFT before invoking the boot entry for Haiku. If Haiku is the only operating system on the machine, you can begin holding the key while still seeing boot messages from the BIOS.
+
+
+Boot Loader Options
+Once it's there, you're offered four menus:
+| Select boot volume | Choose which Haiku installation/state to start (see Troubleshooting below). | |
| Select safe mode options | There are several options to try in case of hardware related trouble or if the system becomes unstable or unbootable because of a misbehaving add-on. When moving the selection bar to an option, a short explanation appears at the bottom of the screen. | |
|
+
| ||
| Select debug options | Here you'll find several options that help with debugging or getting details for a bug report. Again, a short explanation for each option is displayed at the bottom. | |
|
+
| ||
| If is activated, a warm reboot after a crash shows these additional options: | ||
|
| ||
| Select screen resolution | Lets you force a certain screen resolution and color depth. |
+
+Troubleshooting
+If Haiku refuses to boot on your hardware from the get-go, try out setting different options under . Consider filing a bug report in any case.
+On the other hand, if Haiku only suddenly acts up after you have installed some software, especially hardware drivers, you have several options to get Haiku bootable again so you can uninstall the offending package:
+-
+
+
+Booting Haiku
+After activating one or more options, you return to the main menu and continue booting, which presents you with this boot screen:
+
+
+If everything works OK, one symbol after another quickly lights up.
+The different symbols roughly correspond to these boot stages:
| Atom | Initializing modules. | |
| Disk + magnifier | Creating rootfs (/) and mounting devfs (/dev). | |
| Plug-in card | Initializing device manager. | |
| Boot disk | Mounting boot disk. | |
| Chip | Loading CPU specific modules. | |
| Folder | Final initialization of subsystems. | |
| Rocket | Launch_daemon has started the system. |
Welcome to the Haiku User Guide
+ +Below, you'll find the documentation of the most important aspects of Haiku. Naturally, completing and extending the documentation is a continuing process (see the online version for updated pages and translations). If you find errors, would like to suggest topics or maybe even contribute yourself, please get in touch on the documentation mailing list. If you're interested in helping with translations, you'll find information on that at the i18n user guide wiki.
+| Boot Loader | +Set safe boot options to solve configuration problems. |
| Filesystem layout | +Understand the filesystem hierarchy and get familiar with important file locations and folders. |
| Haiku's GUI | +Learn about the basic elements of the graphical user interface. |
| Shortcuts and key combinations | +The most common shortcuts to speed up your workflow. |
| Workspaces | +Use virtual desktops for an uncluttered work environment. |
| Twitcher | +Switch between running applications. |
| Team Monitor | +Kill unresponsive applications or system components. |
| Tracker | +Learn all about navigating, working with files and folders and how to configure Haiku's file manager. |
| Deskbar | +Use and configure Haiku's version of the "Start" menu and taskbar. |
| Filetypes | +Set default applications, change file types and create your own. |
| Attributes | +One of Haiku's main features lets you manage and add any kind of data to any file. |
| Index | +Use indexing to be able to search for attributes. |
| Queries | +Use Haiku's lightning fast queries to quickly find what you're looking for. |
| Workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries | +Learn to use some of Haiku's key features by organizing your DVDs. |
| Workshop: Managing Email | +Learn to use Haiku's mail system with custom statuses and queries. |
| Workshop: Wireless networking | +Set up your open or encrypted wireless network. |
Applications
|
+ Learn how to un/install applications in general and how work with the ones that come with Haiku. |
Desktop Applets
+
|
+ Simple tools to install on your Desktop and Deskbar. |
Preferences
+
|
+ Configuring and setting up your system. |
| Bash and Scripting | +Learn of some interesting scripts used by the system and about online resources for working in the shell and scripting. |
| Indeks |
|
+ The Deskbar Menu + The Tray + The list of running programs + |
Deskbar
+ +The Deskbar is the little panel that by default is located in the upper right corner of the screen. It's Haiku's version of Windows' taskbar with its Start button. It contains the Deskbar menu from where you can start applications and preferences, a tray with a clock and other tools below that and a list of currently running programs at the bottom.
+
+You can move the Deskbar to any corner or as a bar along the upper or lower border of the screen by gripping the knobbly area on one side of the tray and drag & drop it into the new position. You can also fold it into a more compact layout by drag & dropping the knobbly area onto the Deskbar menu.
+By gripping the other knobbly widget of the tray, you can change the width of the Deskbar by dragging the mouse left or right:
+
+A wider Deskbar allows for more icons in the tray on a single row. It also truncates longer application names in the list of running programs less often, especially if you use larger icons.
+ +
+
+The Deskbar Menu
+A menu opens when you click on the Deskbar's top:
+
+-
+
+Deskbar Preferences
+
+The Deskbar preference panel is divided into three sections.
+ +Aplikasi
+The following settings don't apply to your installed applications, but to the behavior and visuals of the list of running applications.
+| Sorts the list of running programs alphabetically. | ||
| Even if you sort alphabetically, the Tracker entry always stays first in the list. | ||
| Provides a small widget to show/hide all windows of a program directly under its entry in the Deskbar. | ||
| Newly launched programs have their windows automatically expanded under their entry in the Deskbar. | ||
| Removes the text labels of running applications. | ||
| Adjusts the icon size of running applications. |
Menu
+While the first couple of menu items of the Deskbar are fixed, you can customized the ones below .
+Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.
+The button opens the folder ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are , , , and .
+You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.
Programs installed from a package automatically put an entry into the Deskbar. Depending on the number of packages you have installed, this can become a bit crowded. If you prefer to have total control, and only want to see applications you link there yourself (possibly in categorizing sub-folders), here's how to do it:
+You create a link of the menu folder in ~/config/settings/deskbar/ and rename to menu_entries. From Terminal that is achieved with:
ln -s ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu_entries
Window
+Finally, the preferences for the Deskbar window.
+| The Deskbar always stays above all other windows. | ||
| The Deskbar pops to the front if the mouse pointer touches it. | ||
| The Deskbar is reduced to only a few pixels and only pops up if the mouse pointer touches them. |
+
+The Tray
+
+Among other things, the tray is housing the clock. Hover the mouse over it to display the date in a tooltip. Left-click it to show a calendar. Right-click it to hide/show the clock or launch the Time preferences to set it.
+Any program can install an icon in the tray to provide an interface to the user. The email system, for instance, shows a different symbol when there's unread mail and offers a context menu to e.g. create or check for new mail. ProcessController is another example that uses its icon in the tray to provide information (CPU/memory usage) and to offer a context menu.
+ +
+
+The list of running programs
+
+You can change to a specific running application by clicking on its entry in the Deskbar and choosing (one of) its windows from the submenu. By right-clicking you can windows or and with them the entire application.
+A SHIFT CTRL click on an application hides all its windows, a CTRL click shows them again.
+If you activated Expanders in the Deskbar settings, you can expand/collapse the list of windows directly under an application's entry.
+In front of every application's windows is a symbol providing info on its state. A bright symbol means a window is visible, a dark one that it's minimized. Three lines in front of a symbol shows that it's not on the current workspace.
+ +Desktop Applets
+ +Haiku provides a few useful tools that can be installed on the Desktop or the Deskbar via their Replicants.
+ | LaunchBox | + | Shortcuts to your favorite applications. |
| NetworkStatus | + | Is your connection up? |
| PowerStatus | + | Shows the state of charge of your notebook's battery. |
| ProcessController | + | Monitor and control every running app and service. |
| Workspaces | + | A miniature version of all workspaces. |
-
+
LaunchBox
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/LaunchBox | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/LaunchBox/* |
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag & drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
+
+All options are reached from the context menu:
+| Adds an empty button. | |||
| Empties a button. | |||
| Removes a button. | |||
| Hovering the mouse over an icon shows a tooltip with the file's name and, in case of an application, its short description if it differs from its name (see topic FileTypes). With this menu item you can customize the description for this tooltip. | |||
+ + + + + + | +Aligns the buttons horizontally. +Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel. +Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click. +Shows the window border. +LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge. +Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace. | ||
+ + + | +Add a new pad. +Duplicate the current pad. +Close the current pad. | ||
+ | +Quits all LaunchBox pads. |
-
+
NetworkStatus
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/NetworkStatus | |
| Pengaturan: | none |
NetworkStatus shows the status of your network connections. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
+Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
+The first section contains all network devices' names and their state. Clicking on such an entry brings up a window showing its IP, broadcast and netmask address.
+Below is a list of all wireless networks found by the first wireless adapter and an indicator of their signal strength. Have a look at the Workshop: Wireless networking for more information on how to set up a connection.
+Lastly, you can to change your network configuration or the applet.
Status icons
+ | Ready | Link is established. | |
| Configuring | Connecting in progress. | |
| No stateful configuration | Some settings are missing (check IP configuration). | |
| No link | There is no physical connection (probably the network cable is not connected and wireless networks are unavailable). | |
| - | There are no network adapters available (if you are sure that at least one is connected, there are probably no drivers yet). |
-
+
PowerStatus
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/PowerStatus | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/PowerStatus settings |
PowerStatus shows information about the battery level, so it's only useful on mobile computers. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
+Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
Note: PowerStatus requires a working ACPI support.
+
+The context menu offers these options:
+| Shows battery level in percent or remaining time. | ||
| Shows icon of the applet. | ||
| Switch between showing battery level in percent or remaining time ( has to be active). | ||
| Shows the extended battery info window. | ||
| Shows the About window. | ||
| Quits the PowerStatus applet. |
When is active, the battery level is shown in brackets while charging.
+ +-
+
ProcessController
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/ProcessController | |
| Pengaturan: | none |
The primary task of the ProcessController applet is to show the activity of your CPU(s) and the amount of used memory. It allows monitoring of individual teams, change their priority, and kill them if the program freezes. In multiprocessor environments it allows you to disable individual processors/cores. When Tracker or Deskbar crash you can restart them from ProcessController's menu.
Indicators on the left show each CPU's usage, while the bar on the right shows the memory consumption. Remember that the number of indicators depend on the number of processors/cores in the computer.
+If not yet running, launching ProcessController asks if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you can resize the bar-display by resizing the window and then use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
+Wherever it's installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
+To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck in its context menu.
Quit an application
+
+To quit an application just choose its name from the menu. This is a clean way to close app, just like clicking its close button. Be careful not to quit system processes like servers or daemons, however. Your system may stop working reliably.
+Memory usage
+
+Monitoring memory usage can be rather inaccurate.
+This menu allows you to monitor memory usage of different teams in your system. Next to the team's name there are two columns: first with the amount reserved for writable memory, while the second shows all memory including read-only space (shared libraries for example).
+The first row System resources & caches... shows the total amount of memory used by the system and all applications. The length of the blue bar is based on the total physical memory in your computer. The next rows show memory used by each process. Note that the length of the bar is based only on the actually used part of the memory.
+| Memory used only by given application (with write access) | ||
| Memory including read-only space (can be shared with other applications) |
Threads and CPU usage
+This menu allows you to change thread priorities, kill teams or debug them.
+
+| Kernel code | ||
| User code | ||
| Idle thread |
At the first level you see team names. By clicking on one, you can kill the whole team. The dark-blue part of the bar is time spent in kernel code, the light-blue part in user code, the green part in the idle thread(s). A bar completely filled with blue means that the team is using all processoring power.
+The second level shows particular threads of a team. By clicking on one, you can debug or kill it. A bar completely filled with blue means that the thread is pegging one processor/core.
+The last level of the menu allows you to change a thread's priority. Be careful with that! As a rule of thumb the priority of a thread should be inverse its CPU usage. That is, the more it tries to claim CPU time, the lower should be it's priority. In general, don't mess with an app's priorities; contact its author, that's his business. +
+ +-
+
Workspaces
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/apps/Workspaces | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces +~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - Stores the panel's window position. |
+You find the Workspaces applet with the other in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.
+ will open the Screen preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag & drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold SHIFT while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.
+ +
+
+Moving windows between workspaces
+To move a window, you grab it in the Workspaces applet and simply drag it to another workspace. This has the advantage, that you can move it without leaving your current desktop. Of course, that only works well when there aren't too many windows in a workspace and your target isn't obscured by other windows. Another possibility is to grab a window by its tab and just holding on to it while switching workspaces with ALT Fx.
+For more information on workspaces in general and more keyboard shortcuts, see topic Workspaces.
++Now you can quickly summon the applet with a key combo and equally quickly dismiss it again with ESC.
+
+Special functionality
+The Workspaces applet provides some additional functionality when clicking on a window while holding certain modifier keys:
+| CTRL | Brings the window to the front. | |
| CTRL SHIFT | Minimizes the window. | |
| OPT | Sends the window to the back. |
-
+
Filesystem layout
+ +Haiku's filesystem layout is quite transparent, trying to always use non-cryptic names for files and folders, that don't leave the user guessing. Files and folders that are important for the system to function properly, are protected from accidental tempering by showing one of these alerts:
+
+
+The second alert pops up if you try to rename or delete something in the system hierarchy. Here, the "" button will only become clickable when you're holding down the SHIFT key.
+Generally, there are two separate branches springing from the root folder of the boot volume:
+| /boot/system/ | Contains system files and applications/packages shared by all users. | |
| /boot/home/ | This is your personal folder where you keep your data and settings and the applications/packages that are not shared by all users. |
As long as Haiku isn't multi-user, this distinction between shared and not-shared applications/packages has no apparent effect, as there's only one user with one home folder. But since there will be support for more users than one eventually, it makes sense to learn the right way from the start.
+ +
+
+The system folder - /boot/system/
+Under Haiku's predecessor BeOS, this folder was named /boot/beos/. You may still find it in some older documentation (e.g. in the original BeBook).
+Most of the folders inside /boot/system/ are read-only, which is sensible as they contain the files necessary for Haiku to function correctly and therefore have to be safe from (accidental) alteration. The only user-writable folders are:
| /boot/system/cache/ | Contains cached files and the temporary folder linked to /tmp/. | |
| /boot/system/non-packaged/ | Contains a hierarchy for files that aren't part of a .hpkg (probably from old BeOS archives). | |
| /boot/system/packages/ | Besides holding Haiku's system packages, you can add/remove packages shared by all users. | |
| /boot/system/settings/ | Contains system-wide settings. | |
| /boot/system/var/ | Contains logs like the syslog (important when troubleshooting) and is the default location for the swap file. |
For more information on the packages and non-packaged folders, see topic Applications.
+ +
+
+The home folder - /boot/home/
+This folder belongs to you. Here you can create and delete files and folders as you wish. (By the way, the tilde ("~") is a shortcut for your home folder, so you don't always have to write "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
+Files that you'd like to share with other users in a future multi-user environment have do be put outside /boot/home/. For example, you could create a folder /boot/all-users/ and put the stuff there.
| ~/Desktop/ | + | Holds the files of your desktop. Double-clicking won't open it, as it is already always visible. When your files happen to be obscured by open windows, just switch quickly to another Workspace. Of course, drilling down by right-clicking is also possible. |
| ~/mail/ | + | This is the default location for your mails. |
| ~/people/ | + | This is the default location for you contact files, see People. |
| ~/queries/ | + | Queries are stored here, by default temporarily for 7 days. |
The folder /boot/home/config/ is special: just like /boot/system/ it's mostly under the control of the package management and therefore read-only. It too contains these similar user-writable folders:
+ +| ~/config/packages/ | + | Here you can add/remove packages that are not shared by all users. |
| ~/config/non-packaged/ | + | Contains a hierarchy for files that aren't part of a .hpkg (probably from old BeOS archives) and are not shared by all users. |
| ~/config/settings/ | + | This folder contains the settings to all applications and a few configurations for the system. Some applications manage their settings in their own subfolders, others simply put their configuration file in there. |
For more information on the packages and non-packaged folders, see topic Applications.
+Here are some of the more interesting subfolders in ~/config/settings/:
+ +| boot/ | + | This folder is the place for User Scripts that are executed before or after the system boots up or shuts down. |
| boot/launch/ | + | Links to programs or documents in this folder are automatically launched on every boot-up. |
| beos_mime/ | + | In this MIME database Haiku keeps track of all the different filetypes and their settings. |
| deskbar/menu/ | + | Copied or linked to files/folders/queries in this folder appear in the Deskbar menu. |
| kernel/drivers/ | + | There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here! |
| Tracker/ | + + | Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders: |
| DefaultFolderTemplate/ | Show and arrange all attributes and the window size to your liking. Every new folder you create will use it as a template. | |
| DefaultQueryTemplates/ | You can define the layout of query result windows for certain filetypes. See topic Query: The result window. | |
| Go/ | Put links to your favorite locations in here to make them available e.g. in open and save panels. See topic Haiku's GUI: Favorites and recent folders. | |
| Tracker New Template/ | Add a template for any filetype that's then available from Tracker's menu. See topic Tracker: Working with files. |
Filetypes
+ +Other than Windows, Haiku doesn't rely on the 3-letter file extension for a file type (e.g. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). This method is only a last resort fallback. Haiku uses MIME types just like it's custom on the internet.
+
+Setting the filetype of a specific file
+You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the from the right-click context menu.
+
+
+
+
+The File Type
+The above is a PNG file, it's MIME string image/png. Let's say you definitely know that it's not a PNG but a GIF. You can change that either by entering the correct MIME string by hand or with one of the two buttons below the textbox:
+| shows a hierarchical list of filetypes where you navigate to image | GIF Image. | ||
| opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the filetype you're looking for. |
+
+The Preferred Application
+This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
+ +The is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons and which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
+ +
+
+The Icon
+If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype add-on of a file that contains an icon and drag & drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
+ +
+
+Special settings for applications
+If you invoke the Filetype add-on on an executable (here: StyledEdit), you'll get a different dialog:
+
+On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.
+Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:
+| Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side. | ||
| Many instances of the app can run simultaneously. | ||
| Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time. | ||
| Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages. | ||
| The app won't appear in Twitcher or the list of running apps of the Deskbar. |
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
+At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.
+ +
+
+Global settings with the FileTypes Preferences
+The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
+All filetypes and their configurations are stored in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Before you start experimenting, it may be prudent to make a backup of that folder...
+To learn more about the FileTypes preferences see the workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries.
+ +-
+
| Indeks |
|
+ Mudah memindah dan merubah-ukuran + Stack & Tile + Buka dan simpan panel + Replicants |
Antar Muka Haiku
+ +Antarmuka pengguna grafis Haiku adalah bagian integral dari sistem. Tidak seperti sistem operasi mirip Unix lainnya, tidak ada window manager yang terpisah dan mem-boot hanya ke shell "command-line" tidak dimungkinkan. Fokus Haiku adalah pada pengguna desktop, sehingga hal diatas tidak dianggap perlu.
+Karena Anda mungkin memiliki pengalaman dengan lingkungan grafis lainnya, mari lewati standar seperti menu, menu konteks klik kanan, seret & lepas dll. Mari kita lihat beberapa aspek unik GUI Haiku sebagai gantinya.
+
+Hanya ada beberapa hal di GUI Haiku yang tidak jelas dan pantas diberikan penjelasan.
+-
+
+
+A quick way to move or resize windows
+Moving and resizing windows is a large part of interacting with several concurrently running applications. Instead of aiming at the small yellow title tab or the even tinier window border, there's a more convenient way to move a window. Also, additionally to its small size, the resize corner has another limitation: It only allows resizing at and in the direction of the lower right corner.
Right-dragging a border for resizing works, but again you'll have to aim carefully.
To address these issues, Haiku provides a neat solution using the window management key combo CTRL ALT and the mouse. See also chapter Shortcuts and key combinations for more shortcuts concerning window management.
+
+Holding down CTRL ALT will highlight the window borders nearest to the mouse pointer. Move the mouse in the direction of another border to change the target. Click and dragging with the right mouse button will resize the window along the highlighted border(s).
+Hold down CTRL ALT and click and drag with the left mouse button anywhere in a window to move it around. A quick click with the right mouse button sends it to the back.
+ +
+
+Stack & Tile
+Haiku's user interface provides a unique feature that puts the fact that windows have a yellow tab instead of a full-width title bar to perfect use. It's called "Stack & Tile".
+In the example below, a Tracker window with bookmarks is tiled to the left of a WebPositive window, which itself is stacked with another Tracker window showing the source folder haiku. In this animation, the user clicks on the tabs of the stacked windows to alternately bring one or the other to the front.
+Connected like this, the group of windows can be moved and resized together - a nice arrangement to work in a more project centric environment. Instead of looking for the right browser window with documentation, editor and Tracker windows and maybe a related email concerning one project you are currently working on, just stack&tile them together.
+Doing the actual arranging of windows is easy: Hold down OPT while dragging a window by its tab close to another window's tab or border until it's highlighted and release the mouse button.
+Stack & Tile consists of two related parts.
+ | + | "Stacking" is putting windows on top of each other, automatically moving the yellow tabs into position. |
| + | "Tiling" means gluing windows horizontally or vertically together. |
Separation is done in the same way, by holding OPT while dragging a window by its tab out of the group.
+ +
+
+Open and save panels
+When opening or saving a file from any application, a panel like this opens:
+
+It has all the usual things: A list of files of the current folder to choose from, in case of a save panel, a text field to enter a filename and a pop-up menu for different file formats and their settings.
+You can enter parent folders with the pop-up menu above the file listing.
If you already have a Tracker window with the location for a file open, you can simply drag either any file or the folder-representation (i.e. the symbol to the far right in its menu bar) into the panel. This changes the panel to that new location.
+ +
+
+Keyboard shortcuts
+Many shortcuts in open and save panels are the same used in Tracker. Besides the commands that are also available through the menu, there are a few not that obvious:
+| ALT N | Creates a new folder. | |
| ALT E | Lets you rename the selected entry. | |
| ALT ↑ | Moves into the parent folder. | |
| ALT ↓ or ENTER | Moves into the selected folder. | |
| ALT D | Takes you to your Desktop. | |
| ALT H | Takes you to your Home folder. |
For keyboard shortcuts in Haiku in general, see chapter Shortcuts and key combinations.
+ +
+
+Favorites and recent folders
+The menu in open and save panels provides recently visited folders and favorite locations that you can set up yourself. As indicated by the little arrow, you can also use these locations to navigate further down the hierarchy via submenus.
+
+To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose . From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose and delete its entry.
+All Favorites are kept in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. So you might as well add and remove links to files and folders there directly.
+
+Replicants
+Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:
+
+The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag & drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.
+A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's window and to .
Examples for replicatable applications are the graphs of the ActivityMonitor, the Workspaces applet or DeskCalc.
+Indeks
+ +Attributes and Queries are key features of Haiku. While attributes are useful on their own, to display additional information on a file, for a query on them, they need to be indexed. It puts them into a lookup table, which in turn makes queries lightning fast.
+The index is part of the filesystem and is kept for every volume/partition separately.
+Indexing commands in Terminal
+There are several commands to manage the index:
+-
+
~ ->lsindex +BEOS:APP_SIG +MAIL:account +MAIL:cc +MAIL:chain +MAIL:draft +MAIL:flags +MAIL:from +MAIL:name +MAIL:pending_chain +MAIL:priority +MAIL:reply +MAIL:status +MAIL:subject +MAIL:thread +MAIL:to +MAIL:when +META:address +META:city +META:company +META:country +META:email +META:fax +META:group +META:hphone +META:name +META:nickname +META:state +META:url +META:wphone +META:zip +_signature +_status +_trk/qrylastchange +_trk/recentQuery +be:deskbar_item_status +last_modified +name +size ++
-
+
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute> +Creates a new index for the specified attribute. + + -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume to which the index will be added, + defaults to current volume. + -t, --type=TYPE the type of the attribute being indexed. One of "int", + "llong", "string", "float", or "double". + Defaults to "string". + --copy-from path to volume to copy the indexes from. + -v, --verbose print information about the index being created + ++
Only new files with that attribute come automatically into the index!
+Existing files have to be added manually by copying them and deleting the originals after that. Alternatively you can use the command reindex.
+
-
+
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories> + -r enter directories recursively + -v verbose output + -f create/update all indices from the source volume, + "attr" is the path to the source volume + ++
-
+
Usage: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME + +Removes the index named INDEX_NAME from a disk volume. Once this has been +done, it will no longer be possible to use the query system to search for +files with the INDEX_NAME attribute. + + -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume from which the index will be + removed + -h, --help display this help and exit + -p, --pattern INDEX_NAME is a pattern + -v, --verbose print information about the index being removed + +INDEX_NAME is the name of a file attribute. + +If no volume is specified, the volume of the current directory is assumed.+ +
Shortcuts and key combinations
+ +By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALT C and ALT V integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRL C quits the running process.
+In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
+If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
+ +
+
+General shortcuts
+Here's a table of many of the most commonly used shortcuts that are always available, even if there isn't a corresponding menu:
+| ALT Fx | Switches to Workspace X (Fx is the function key corresponding to that workspace). Take the active window with you by adding SHIFT | |
| CTRL ALT ← / → / ↑ / ↓ | Navigates spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. Add SHIFT to take the active window with you. | |
| OPT | Holding OPT while dragging a window near another window's tab or border will stack or tile them (see chapter GUI). | |
| OPT↑ / ↓ | Cycles through the open windows within the current workspace. | |
| CTRL ALT + left mouse | Click and drag with left mouse button to move a window (see chapter GUI). | |
| CTRL ALT + right mouse | Click and drag with right mouse button to resize a window (see chapter GUI). | |
| CTRL ALT Z | Zooms a window to an alternative size (maximum size for most applications). | |
| CTRL ALT M | Minimizes the active window. | |
| CTRL ALT H | Hides (minimizes) all windows of the active application. | |
| CTRL ALT F | Pulls the active window to the front (only applicable with the mouse setting Focus Follows Mouse). | |
| CTRL ALT B | Sends the active window to the back. | |
| CTRL TAB | Hold down to bring up the Twitcher. | |
| CTRL ALT DEL | Opens the Team Monitor. | |
| ALT ESC | Enters the menu bar (leave with ESC). | |
| ALT C | Copies the selection to the clipboard. | |
| ALT X | Cuts the selection to the clipboard. | |
| ALT V | Pastes the clipboard's contents. | |
| ALT W | Closes the active window. | |
| ALT Q | Quits an application. | |
| Mengambil tangkapan layar tanpa penundaan dan meluncurkan panel Screenshot . | ||
| SHIFT PRINT | Mengambil tangkapan layar secara diam-diam (tanpa membuka panel), sambil tetap menghormati pengaturan yang terakhir digunakan. | |
| CTRL PRINT | Juga mengambil tangkapan layar secara diam-diam dengan pengaturan yang disimpan, tetapi alih-alih menyimpannya sebagai file, itu hanya disalin ke clipboard. |
+
+Textediting shortcuts
+Whenever you edit text – be it when renaming a file in Tracker, editing a file in StyledEdit, or chatting in Vision – there are some universal shortcuts:
+| ALT ← / → or OPT ← / → | Jump word-wise through the text. (Note: It may be useful to get used to using the OPT combination. Then you're all set if some app already uses the ALT combination for another command.) | |
| ALT BACKSPACE or OPT BACKSPACE | Word-wise removing the text to the left of the cursor. | |
| ALT DEL or OPT DEL | Word-wise removing the text to the right of the cursor. | |
| HOME | Jumps to the beginning of the line. | |
| END | Jumps to the end of the line. | |
| ALT HOME | Jumps to the beginning of the document. | |
| ALT END | Jumps to the end of the document. |
Holding SHIFT additionally when using the above key combinations will select the text between the cursor jumps.
+ +
+
+Shortcuts for Tracker navigation
+Additionally to the general shortcuts, here are some more for navigating with Tracker:
+| ALT ↑ | Opens the parent folder. | |
| ALT ↓ or ENTER | Opens the selected folder. | |
| OPT | Holding it while opening a folder will automatically close the parent folder. This also works when navigating with the mouse. | |
| MENU | Opens the Deskbar menu (leave with ESC). | |
| ALT Z | Undo last action. The undo history is only limited by the available memory. Note, this only works for actions on the file itself, changed attributes and permission settings can't be undone with this. Also, once a file is removed from Trash it's gone for good. | |
| ALT SHIFT Z | Redo the action you just reverted with ALT Z. | |
| SHIFT + Mousewheel | When scrolling through a long list of files in a Tracker window or when you're drilling down submenus, this will speed things up by doing page-wise scrolling. |
+
+Shortcuts in Terminal
+| ALT N | Opens another Terminal session in a new window. | |
| ALT T | Opens another Terminal session in a new tab. | |
| ALT 1, 2, 3 ... | Switches to the corresponding tab. | |
| ALT TAB | Switches to the next Terminal window. | |
| SHIFT ← / → | Switches to the tab to the left/right. | |
| ALT SHIFT ← / → | Moves the current tab left/right. | |
| ALT + / - | Increase/Decrease font size. | |
| ALT ENTER | Enter/leave fullscreen mode. | |
| SHIFT ↑ / ↓ | Scrolls the Terminal output up/down one line. | |
| SHIFT Page↑ / Page↓ | Scrolls the Terminal output up/down one page. | |
| TAB | Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press TAB once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press TAB twice to have all matches listed. | |
| ↑ / ↓ | Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands. | |
| CTRL R | Bash history. All the commands you enter +are stored in the file ~/config/settings/bash_history. Press CTRL R and start to enter a command and you'll be provided with the first match from the bash history. Keep pressing CTRL R until you find the right command line and press ENTER to execute it. | |
| CTRL C | Stops the currently running command. | |
| CTRL D | Closes the current Terminal session. |
+
+Other key combinations
+You can add or remove items to/from a selection by holding down a modifier key while clicking on a entry (or file in case of Tracker).
+| SHIFT | This will select everything between the first selected item and the one you click on. | |
| ALT | Adds or removes the item you're clicking on from the selection. |
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
+The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
+Instead of jumping to the first occurrence of your search string, Tracker can be configured to filter out all non-matching files. See the topic on type-ahead filtering.
-
+
Preferensi
+ +Meskipun filosofi utama Haiku adalah mengurangi pilihan dan memiliki default yang masuk akal, ada beberapa hal yang harus dikonfigurasi atau dapat diatur ke preferensi individu. Anda menemukan semua panel di menu Deskbar.
+ | Penampilan | + | Konfigurasikan aspek tertentu dari antarmuka grafis. |
| Latarbelakang | + | Tetapkan warna atau gambar sebagai latar belakang Desktop atau folder lainnya. |
| DataTranslations | + | Pengaturan untuk semua format file yang didukung. |
| Deskbar | + | Configure the Deskbar. |
| + | Configure your email accounts. | |
| FileTypes | + | Add, remove and configure filetypes. |
| Keyboard | + | Configure repeat delay and rate. |
| Keymap | + | Set the mapping of your keyboard. |
| Locale | + | Set your system language and formatting. |
| Media | + | Audio and video settings like in/output devices and the system's audio mixer. |
| Mouse | + | Configure your mouse. |
| Network | + | Configure your network. |
| Printers | + | Add, remove and configure printers. [still missing] |
| Repositories | + | Manage software repositories. |
| Screen | + | Configure resolution, depth, refresh rate and number of used Workspaces. |
| ScreenSaver | + | Add, remove and configure a screen saver. |
| Shortcuts | + | Create your own shortcuts, e.g. to launch an application with a key combination. [still missing] |
| Sounds | + | Assign sounds to different system events. |
| Time | + | Set time, date and timezone. |
| Tracker | + | Configure Haiku's file manager. |
| Touchpad | + | Configure your touchpad. |
| VirtualMemory | + | Set the amount of swap space. |
-
+
Appearance
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Appearance | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/system/app_server/appearance +~/config/settings/system/app_server/fonts |
Preferensi Penampilan memungkinkan Anda mengubah beberapa aspek visual Haiku.
+ +
+
+Fonts
+
+Haiku mendefinisikan tiga font standar untuk tujuan yang berbeda. Anda mengatur jenis dan ukuran font biasa, tebal dan tetap yang akan digunakan di seluruh sistem. Selain itu, ada juga pengaturan terpisah untuk font yang digunakan dalam menu.
+ +
+
+Installing new fonts
+New fonts that don't come as part of a regular .hpkg package, can be installed by copying them into a subfolder according to the font type (psfonts or ttfonts) into their respective non-packaged folder (see topic Filesystem layout). For TrueType fonts that would be:
+| /boot/system/non-packaged/data/fonts/ttfonts/ | for fonts available to every user. | |
| /boot/home/config/non-packaged/data/fonts/ttfonts/ | for fonts only available to yourself. |
+
+Colors
+
+In the tab, you can change the colors of different parts of the user interface. The color well accepts drag & drops from other programs, letting you drag colors over from e.g. WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic or the Backgrounds panel.
+ +
+
+Window decorators
+
+Decorators determine the look and feel of windows and all GUI elements. Currently Haiku comes with only one default decorator. Should you find and install other decorators, you can choose a different one from the pop-up menu.
+Haiku's default decorator lets you set the arrow style of the scroll bar: either single arrows at the end of scrollbars to conserve a bit of space, or double arrows — the traditional BeOS way — potentially saving some mouse moving when scrolling up and down or left and right...
+ +
+
+Antialiasing
+
+The tab provides different settings for how things are rendered on screen.
+ +
+
+Glyph hinting
+An activated aligns all letters in such a way that their vertical and horizontal edges rest exactly between two pixels. The result is a perfect contrast, especially when dealing with black on white. Text appears crisper. There's also a setting for that's especially helpful with low resolution devices like netbooks. Small fonts can look pretty bad when hinting is turned on, but with this setting you still have the advantage of hinting for text editors and Terminal.
+See the difference hinting makes with these magnified screenshots:
+Hinting: off | Hinting: on |
It should be pointed out that all the Magnify windows on this page are of course rendered themselves with the different options as well. So, you get a real world impression of the settings by comparing, for example, the bold yellow tab title or the text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+ +
+
+Antialiasing type
+Another technique to improve rendering is Antialiasing, which supports all vector graphics as well as text. It smooths lines by changing the color of certain pixels. There are two methods for that:
+ changes the intensity of pixels at the edge.
+ does an even better job, especially with (high resolution) LCD monitors. Instead of the intensity of a pixel, it changes its color which moves an edge by a fraction of a pixel, because LCD displays produce every pixel with a red, green and blue component.
Again, the two different methods with magnified screenshots:
+Grayscale, Hinting: off | LCD subpixel, Hinting: off |
Subpixel based antialiasing adds a slight colored shine to objects. Something not everyone tolerates. In Haiku you can mix the two antialiasing methods and find the right setting for you by using a slider.
+If you do activate hinting plus LCD subpixel rendering by changing the source and recompiling, this is how it looks compared to hinting with Grayscale:
+Grayscale, Hinting: on | LCD subpixel, Hinting: on |
At the bottom of the panel are two buttons:
+| resets everything to default values. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the Appearance preferences. |
-
+
Backgrounds
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Backgrounds | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces +~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - stores the panel's window position |
You can set a color or an image as background for every folder and the Desktop for every workspace.
+
+The top menu specifies if your changes are applied to the current workspace only, all workspaces, a specific folder or as default for every new folder.
+Below that you can assign an image or select if you want simply a colored background. Images can also be drag & dropped onto the preview to the left.
+If you are using an image, you have to decide on the placement:
+| lets you specify the coordinates. You can drag the picture around in the preview to the left or enter X and Y manually. | ||
| centers the picture in the middle of the screen. | ||
| enlarges the picture with no regard to its aspect ratio until it fills the screen. | ||
| fills the screen by repeating the picture. |
Activating puts a thin contour around icon labels.
+Whether an icon label's actual text is black or white depends on the setting of the color picker. A dark color sets the text to white, a light color to black. So, if you assign a very bright image to the background, you should also set the color picker to a bright color in order to have icon labels readable in black. (Or use the outline option above.)
+The selected color is also reflected in the Workspaces applet, which ignores images as backgrounds.
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the Backgrounds preferences. | ||
| sets your changes. |
-
+
DataTranslations
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/DataTranslations | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/* - Every Translator creates its own settings file here after you've changes its defaults. +~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Stores the panel's window position. |
Every application has the ability to open and save every file format for which there's a Translator installed. The settings for these Translators are configured in the DataTranslations preferences.
+
+Depending on its capabilities, each Translator offers different settings. At least you'll get an button that opens a window with the credits and the installation path.
+The following table gives an overview of the default Translators and their most useful options.
| Valid image sizes are 16, 32, 48, 128, 256, 512, 1024 (RGB32 and RGBA32) | |
| 24bit, uncompressed, no transparency | |
| ILM's high dynamic-range (HDR) format | |
| 8bit, lossless compression, transparency +You can reduce the filesize by limiting the number of used colors and the palette. +You can write images with transparency, either by automatically using the alpha channel or by setting the RGB value that will be transparent by hand. | |
| Translator for Haiku's vector icon format | |
| 24bit, compressed, no transparency +Here, you normally only care about the output quality. | |
| 24bit, compressed, no transparency +Besides the output quality you can also set a smoothing that will lessen compression artefacts but can blur the picture a little. | |
| 24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, PC Paintbrush Exchange format | |
| 32bit, lossless compression, transparency +The translator reduces all layers to one bitmap layer. | |
| 32bit, lossless compression, transparency | |
| 24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, Portable PixMap format | |
| up to 48bit, uncompressed, no transparency | |
| Formatted text | |
| 24bit, optional lossless compression, transparency | |
| Plain text with formatting stored in attibutes | |
| 32bit, optional lossless compression, transparency | |
| 24bit, optional lossless compression, layers, transparency | |
| 8-bit YUV 4:2:0 image format, compressed, no transparency | |
| Valid image sizes are 16, 32, 48 | |
| 32bit, layers, transparency, vector/pixel data |
-
+
Deskbar
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Deskbar | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Deskbar_settings +~/config/settings/Deskbar_security_code |
The Deskbar preference panel is also available from the Deskbar. Its settings are discussed in the topic on Deskbar.
+ +| Indeks |
|
+ Creating a new e-mail account + Account settings + Setting up incoming e-mail + Setting up outgoing e-mail + Notifications and e-mail filters + Setting up the Mail Service + |
E-mail
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/E-mail | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Mail/* |
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
+The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
+
+Creating a new e-mail account
+Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
+You start by clicking the button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
+First, you set how you get your mail, via or .
+Now you enter your E-mail address, Login name and Password, give an Account name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real name.
+If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses. If that is not the case, clicking will open another window to enter this information by hand:
+
+You first set the Server name, Login type and Connection type for the incoming mail, below that for the outgoing mail. You should find the necessary information on your email provider's website.
+See below for more info about the various settings and additional options.
+
+Account settings
+By selecting the name of an account in the left list, you can change some general settings:
+
+The Account name is the name that's shown for example in the list of accounts in the E-mail preferences. Real name is the name someone sees when she gets mail from you. Return address is the email address that is used when someone replies to your mail. Normally that is the same address you've sent your email from.
+If you'd like to use an email account to only send or only receive email, you can de/activate that usage by right-clicking the account's name in the leftside list to set the checkmarks accordingly.
+ +
+
+More on setting up incoming e-mail
+Click on under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.
+
+First is the address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+Then you enter your login information, Login name and Password, and if necessary change the Login type from the default to for authentication.
+If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to and only locally.
+If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to locally. You can specify to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
+Also, you can opt to only a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
+You can change the Destination of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
+ + +
+
+More on setting up outgoing e-mail
+Click on under your account's name to set up how e-mails are sent.
+
+First is the SMTP server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+If you need to login, you change the Login Type to and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with for identification.
+As with incoming mail, you can also change the Destination of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
+ +
+
+Notifications and other e-mail filters
+Notifications for newly arrived email and methods to sort and filter emails are found in under an account's name. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other and rearrange them by drag & dropping them to their new position.
+Currently there are three you can add. After adding a filter, you have to select it to see its options.
+
+Spam filter (AGMS Bayesian)
+
+The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
+You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
+Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
Together with the following , you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+ +
+
+Rule filter
+
+This filter compares the mail header to a search pattern and performs some action according to the rules you set up.
+ With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are available:
| + | the name of the sender | |
| + | the e-mail address of the sender | |
| + | your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account) | |
| + | the e-mail address replies are sent to | |
| + | the date and time the mail was received | |
| + | the subject line | |
| + | addresses of anyone receiving a carbon copy (Cc) | |
| + | the name of the e-mail's account | |
| + | The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail. | |
| + | is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent") | |
| + | essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd: | |
| + | depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam" | |
| + | this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065. |
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
+With the pop-up menu below it, you assign an action when the pattern matches. You can move or delete a mail, set the status to "Read" or anything else or set the e-mail account you'll reply with.
+ +
+
+New mails notification
+
+There are several ways you can choose to be notified of newly arrived email. Under you find a number of options that can be combined as well:
+| + | No notification | |
| + | Plays the sound file of the "New E-mail" event set in the Sounds preferences for every new email | |
| + | Shows an alert window for every new email | |
| + | Blinks some LEDs like the caps-lock indicator | |
| + | Shows one alert window for all new mails | |
| + | Plays the sound file of the "New E-mail" event set in the Sounds preferences once for new mail | |
| + | Shows the log window |
+
+Outgoing Mail Filters
+At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
+
It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
+
+Setting up the Mail Service
+Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
+
+Under Mail checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
+If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that and also to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up , , or .
+Make sure to or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
+will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
+From that menu, you can also , or edit .
+If you hold down SHIFT when invoking the context menu, you'll get additional commands:
+| + | Offers a submenu to check only one specific account | |
| + | Allows you to send pending mails without also checking for new mails | |
| + | Quits the whole email infrastructure (mail_daemon) |
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
+ +FileTypes
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/FileTypes | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/FileTypes settings +~/config/settings/beos_mime/* - Stores all MIME types as folders. |
Please refer to topic Filetypes and the workshop Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries that explains most of this preference panel.
+ +Keyboard
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Keyboard | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Keyboard_settings |
+Set the repeat rate, and the delay until a held down key starts to repeat. You can test your settings in the text field at the bottom.
+| resets everything to default values. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the Keyboard preferences. |
Keymap
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Keymap | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Location of user modified keymaps. +~/config/settings/Key_map |
+To the right, the Keymap window shows a representation of your keyboard. When you press a key, the corresponding key is darkened and the assigned symbol is entered into the Sample and Clipboard text field at the bottom. From there you can also copy and paste it into a document.
+Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but are also useful when looking for a special symbol used in other languages. For example, you can switch the keymap to "French", find the "ç" and copy it into your mail to François. (Though you'll find the "cedil" also in other keymaps...)
Pressing modifier keys like SHIFT, CONTROL or OPTION changes the displayed keyboard accordingly.
+Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
+Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+| for setting the above mentioned blue keys. | ||
| for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT). |
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap in the keyboard representation: drag & drop one key on another and they switch places.
+Alternatively to this drag & dropping of keys, there's the menu that opens this window:
+
+Here, you can assign keys to their respective roles or even completely disable the role of a key. You can even assign the same key to different roles, though that's not a good idea most of the time and you'll be warned by a small exclamation mark beside the pop-up menus if you do that.
+Pressing applies your changes and closes the window.
When you're done you can save the result from the menu . Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via .
+To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the menu.
+The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
+Finally, there's a button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
+ +
+
+Advanced keymap manipulation
+There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
+You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
+keymap -d > MyKeymap+
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
+At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use the Shortcuts preferences.
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+keymap -s < MyKeymap+
If you'd like to import this keymap into the Keymap panel, you have to compile it first to a binary format:
+keymap -c < MyKeymap+
This will produce a file keymap.out which you can load into Keymap via its menu. By the way, the keymap command is able to load this binary format as well: keymap -l < keymap.out
+This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
+ +#!/bin/keymap -s
+#
+# Raw key numbering for 101 keyboard...
+#
+#
+# [esc] [ f1] [ f2] [ f3] [ f4] [ f5] [ f6] [ f7] [ f8] [ f9] [f10] [f11] [f12]
+# 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0a 0x0b 0x0c 0x0d
+#
+# [ ` ] [ 1 ] [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] [ 5 ] [ 6 ] [ 7 ] [ 8 ] [ 9 ] [ 0 ] [ - ] [ = ] [bck]
+# 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1a 0x1b 0x1c 0x1d 0x1e
+#
+# [tab] [ q ] [ w ] [ e ] [ r ] [ t ] [ y ] [ u ] [ i ] [ o ] [ p ] [ [ ] [ ] ] [ \ ]
+# 0x26 0x27 0x28 0x29 0x2a 0x2b 0x2c 0x2d 0x2e 0x2f 0x30 0x31 0x32 0x33
+#
+# [cap] [ a ] [ s ] [ d ] [ f ] [ g ] [ h ] [ j ] [ k ] [ l ] [ ; ] [ ' ] [ enter ]
+# 0x3b 0x3c 0x3d 0x3e 0x3f 0x40 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x45 0x46 0x47
+#
+# [shift] [ z ] [ x ] [ c ] [ v ] [ b ] [ n ] [ m ] [ , ] [ . ] [ / ] [shift]
+# 0x4b 0x4c 0x4d 0x4e 0x4f 0x50 0x51 0x52 0x53 0x54 0x55 0x56
+#
+# [ctr] [cmd] [ space ] [cmd] [ctr]
+# 0x5c 0x5d 0x5e 0x5f 0x60
+#
+# NOTE: On a Microsoft Natural Keyboard:
+# left option = 0x66
+# right option = 0x67
+# menu key = 0x68
+# NOTE: On an Apple Extended Keyboard:
+# left option = 0x66
+# right option = 0x67
+# keypad '=' = 0x6a
+# power key = 0x6b
+Version = 3
+CapsLock = 0x3b
+ScrollLock = 0x0f
+NumLock = 0x22
+LShift = 0x4b
+RShift = 0x56
+LCommand = 0x5d
+RCommand = 0x60
+LControl = 0x5c
+RControl = 0x00
+LOption = 0x66
+ROption = 0x5f
+Menu = 0x68
+#
+# Lock settings
+# To set NumLock, do the following:
+# LockSettings = NumLock
+#
+# To set everything, do the following:
+# LockSettings = CapsLock NumLock ScrollLock
+#
+LockSettings =
+# Legend:
+# n = Normal
+# s = Shift
+# c = Control
+# C = CapsLock
+# o = Option
+# Key n s c o os C Cs Co Cos
+Key 0x00 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x01 = 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b 0x1b
+Key 0x02 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x03 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x04 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x05 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x06 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x07 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x08 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x09 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0a = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0b = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0c = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0d = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0e = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x0f = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x10 = 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10 0x10
+Key 0x11 = '^' 0xc2b0 '' ' ' '' '^' 0xc2b0 ' ' ''
+Key 0x12 = '1' '!' '' ' ' '' '!' '1' ' ' ''
+Key 0x13 = '2' '"' '' 0xc2b2 '' '"' '2' 0xc2b2 ''
+Key 0x14 = '3' 0xc2a7 '' 0xc2b3 '' 0xc2a7 '3' 0xc2b3 ''
+Key 0x15 = '4' '$' '' ' ' '' '$' '4' ' ' ''
+Key 0x16 = '5' '%' '' ' ' '' '%' '5' ' ' ''
+Key 0x17 = '6' '&' '' ' ' '' '&' '6' ' ' ''
+Key 0x18 = '7' '/' '' '{' '' '/' '7' '{' ''
+Key 0x19 = '8' '(' '' '[' '' '(' '8' '[' ''
+Key 0x1a = '9' ')' '' ']' '' ')' '9' ']' ''
+Key 0x1b = '0' '=' '' '}' '' '=' '0' '}' ''
+Key 0x1c = 0xc39f '?' '' '\\' '' '?' 0xc39f '\\' ''
+Key 0x1d = 0xc2b4 '`' '' ' ' '' 0xc2b4 '`' ' ' ''
+Key 0x1e = 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x08
+Key 0x1f = 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05 0x05
+Key 0x20 = 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01
+Key 0x21 = 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b 0x0b
+Key 0x22 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x23 = '/' '/' '/' '/' '/' '/' '/' '/' '/'
+Key 0x24 = '*' '*' '*' '*' '*' '*' '*' '*' '*'
+Key 0x25 = '-' '-' '-' '-' '-' '-' '-' '-' '-'
+Key 0x26 = 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09 0x09
+Key 0x27 = 'q' 'Q' 0x11 '@' '' 'Q' 'q' '@' ''
+Key 0x28 = 'w' 'W' 0x17 ' ' '' 'W' 'w' ' ' ''
+Key 0x29 = 'e' 'E' 0x05 0xe282ac '' 'E' 'e' 0xe282ac ''
+Key 0x2a = 'r' 'R' 0x12 ' ' '' 'R' 'r' ' ' ''
+Key 0x2b = 't' 'T' 0x14 ' ' '' 'T' 't' ' ' ''
+Key 0x2c = 'z' 'Z' 0x1a ' ' '' 'Z' 'z' ' ' ''
+Key 0x2d = 'u' 'U' 0x15 ' ' '' 'U' 'u' ' ' ''
+Key 0x2e = 'i' 'I' 0x09 ' ' '' 'I' 'i' ' ' ''
+Key 0x2f = 'o' 'O' 0x0f ' ' '' 'O' 'o' ' ' ''
+Key 0x30 = 'p' 'P' 0x10 ' ' '' 'P' 'p' ' ' ''
+Key 0x31 = 0xc3bc 0xc39c 0x1b ' ' '' 0xc39c 0xc3bc ' ' ''
+Key 0x32 = ' ' '*' 0x1d '~' '' '*' ' ' '~' ''
+Key 0x33 = '#' '\'' 0x1c ' ' '' '\'' '#' ' ' ''
+Key 0x34 = 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f 0x7f
+Key 0x35 = 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04
+Key 0x36 = 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c 0x0c
+Key 0x37 = 0x01 '7' 0x01 0x01 '7' 0x01 '7' 0x01 '7'
+Key 0x38 = 0x1e '8' 0x1e 0x1e '8' 0x1e '8' 0x1e '8'
+Key 0x39 = 0x0b '9' 0x0b 0x0b '9' 0x0b '9' 0x0b '9'
+Key 0x3a = ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
+Key 0x3b = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x3c = 'a' 'A' 0x01 ' ' '' 'A' 'a' ' ' ''
+Key 0x3d = 's' 'S' 0x13 ' ' '' 'S' 's' ' ' ''
+Key 0x3e = 'd' 'D' 0x04 ' ' '' 'D' 'd' ' ' ''
+Key 0x3f = 'f' 'F' 0x06 ' ' '' 'F' 'f' ' ' ''
+Key 0x40 = 'g' 'G' 0x07 ' ' '' 'G' 'g' ' ' ''
+Key 0x41 = 'h' 'H' 0x08 ' ' '' 'H' 'h' ' ' ''
+Key 0x42 = 'j' 'J' 0x0a ' ' '' 'J' 'j' ' ' ''
+Key 0x43 = 'k' 'K' 0x0b ' ' '' 'K' 'k' ' ' ''
+Key 0x44 = 'l' 'L' 0x0c ' ' '' 'L' 'l' ' ' ''
+Key 0x45 = 0xc3b6 0xc396 '' ' ' '' 0xc396 0xc3b6 ' ' ''
+Key 0x46 = 0xc3a4 0xc384 '' ' ' '' 0xc384 0xc3a4 ' ' ''
+Key 0x47 = 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a
+Key 0x48 = 0x1c '4' 0x1c 0x1c '4' 0x1c '4' 0x1c '4'
+Key 0x49 = '' '5' '' '' '5' '' '5' '' '5'
+Key 0x4a = 0x1d '6' 0x1d 0x1d '6' 0x1d '6' 0x1d '6'
+Key 0x4b = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x4c = 'y' 'Y' 0x19 ' ' '' 'Y' 'y' ' ' ''
+Key 0x4d = 'x' 'X' 0x18 ' ' '' 'X' 'x' ' ' ''
+Key 0x4e = 'c' 'C' 0x03 ' ' '' 'C' 'c' ' ' ''
+Key 0x4f = 'v' 'V' 0x16 ' ' '' 'V' 'v' ' ' ''
+Key 0x50 = 'b' 'B' 0x02 ' ' '' 'B' 'b' ' ' ''
+Key 0x51 = 'n' 'N' 0x0e ' ' '' 'N' 'n' ' ' ''
+Key 0x52 = 'm' 'M' 0x0d 0xc2b5 '' 'M' 'm' 0xc2b5 ''
+Key 0x53 = ',' ';' ',' ' ' '' ';' ',' ' ' ''
+Key 0x54 = '.' ':' '.' ' ' '' ':' '.' ' ' ''
+Key 0x55 = '-' '_' '' ' ' '' '-' '_' ' ' ''
+Key 0x56 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x57 = 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e 0x1e
+Key 0x58 = 0x04 '1' 0x04 0x04 '1' 0x04 '1' 0x04 '1'
+Key 0x59 = 0x1f '2' 0x1f 0x1f '2' 0x1f '2' 0x1f '2'
+Key 0x5a = 0x0c '3' 0x0c 0x0c '3' 0x0c '3' 0x0c '3'
+Key 0x5b = 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a 0x0a
+Key 0x5c = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x5d = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x5e = ' ' ' ' 0x00 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
+Key 0x5f = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x60 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x61 = 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c 0x1c
+Key 0x62 = 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f
+Key 0x63 = 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d 0x1d
+Key 0x64 = 0x05 '0' 0x05 0x05 '0' 0x05 '0' 0x05 '0'
+Key 0x65 = 0x7f ',' 0x7f 0x7f ',' 0x7f ',' 0x7f ','
+Key 0x66 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x67 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x68 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x69 = '<' '>' '' '|' '' '<' '>' '|' ''
+Key 0x6a = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x6b = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x6c = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x6d = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x6e = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x6f = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x70 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x71 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x72 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x73 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x74 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x75 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x76 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x77 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x78 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x79 = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7a = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7b = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7c = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7d = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7e = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Key 0x7f = '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''
+Acute ' ' = 0xc2b4
+Acute 'A' = 0xc381
+Acute 'E' = 0xc389
+Acute 'I' = 0xc38d
+Acute 'O' = 0xc393
+Acute 'U' = 0xc39a
+Acute 'Y' = 0xc39d
+Acute 'a' = 0xc3a1
+Acute 'e' = 0xc3a9
+Acute 'i' = 0xc3ad
+Acute 'o' = 0xc3b3
+Acute 'u' = 0xc3ba
+Acute 'y' = 0xc3bd
+Acute '' = ''
+Acute '' = ''
+Acute '' = ''
+AcuteTab = Normal Shift Option Option-Shift CapsLock CapsLock-Shift CapsLock-Option CapsLock-Option-Shift
+Grave ' ' = '`'
+Grave 'A' = 0xc380
+Grave 'E' = 0xc388
+Grave 'I' = 0xc38c
+Grave 'O' = 0xc392
+Grave 'U' = 0xc399
+Grave 'a' = 0xc3a0
+Grave 'e' = 0xc3a8
+Grave 'i' = 0xc3ac
+Grave 'o' = 0xc3b2
+Grave 'u' = 0xc3b9
+Grave '' = ''
+Grave '' = ''
+Grave '' = ''
+Grave '' = ''
+Grave '' = ''
+GraveTab = Normal Shift Option Option-Shift CapsLock CapsLock-Shift CapsLock-Option CapsLock-Option-Shift
+Circumflex ' ' = '^'
+Circumflex 'A' = 0xc382
+Circumflex 'E' = 0xc38a
+Circumflex 'I' = 0xc38e
+Circumflex 'O' = 0xc394
+Circumflex 'U' = 0xc39b
+Circumflex 'a' = 0xc3a2
+Circumflex 'e' = 0xc3aa
+Circumflex 'i' = 0xc3ae
+Circumflex 'o' = 0xc3b4
+Circumflex 'u' = 0xc3bb
+Circumflex '' = ''
+Circumflex '' = ''
+Circumflex '' = ''
+Circumflex '' = ''
+Circumflex '' = ''
+CircumflexTab = Normal Shift Option Option-Shift CapsLock CapsLock-Shift CapsLock-Option CapsLock-Option-Shift
+Diaeresis ' ' = 0xc2a8
+Diaeresis 'A' = 0xc384
+Diaeresis 'E' = 0xc38b
+Diaeresis 'I' = 0xc38f
+Diaeresis 'O' = 0xc396
+Diaeresis 'U' = 0xc39c
+Diaeresis 'Y' = 0xc5b8
+Diaeresis 'a' = 0xc3a4
+Diaeresis 'e' = 0xc3ab
+Diaeresis 'i' = 0xc3af
+Diaeresis 'o' = 0xc3b6
+Diaeresis 'u' = 0xc3bc
+Diaeresis 'y' = 0xc3bf
+Diaeresis '' = ''
+Diaeresis '' = ''
+Diaeresis '' = ''
+DiaeresisTab = Normal Shift Option Option-Shift CapsLock CapsLock-Shift CapsLock-Option CapsLock-Option-Shift
+Tilde ' ' = '~'
+Tilde 'A' = 0xc383
+Tilde 'O' = 0xc395
+Tilde 'N' = 0xc391
+Tilde 'a' = 0xc3a3
+Tilde 'o' = 0xc3b5
+Tilde 'n' = 0xc3b1
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+Tilde '' = ''
+TildeTab = Normal Shift Option Option-Shift CapsLock CapsLock-Shift CapsLock-Option CapsLock-Option-Shift
+
+Locale
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Locale | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Locale settings |
Haiku's localization system does not only include replacing texts with their translations, but also more complex tasks such as formatting numbers, dates, and times in a way that matches your Locale preferences.
+
+Language
+Haiku has been translated to dozens of languages, unfortunately some translations are not complete yet. For that reason, you can choose more than one language as “Preferred languages”. If some text is missing in a translation, it's replaced with the words of the next preferred language. English is the default fallback (also when not listed).
+
+In this example, the preferred language is set to Spanish. The first fallback is Italian, and if the text is missing there too, it's back to default English.
+As you can see, expanding a language entry on the left side reveals sub-entries for specific variations or dialects of a language (if available).
+Formatting
+On the tab you can set up the formatting of date, time, number and currency formats independently from the settings of your preferred language.
+
+You may be a Spanish fellow located in the Italian speaking part of Switzerland. So, you'd prefer your system in Spanish, but numbers and currency formatted like at work: Swiss/Italian.
+If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of the modified dates of files, for example), you can override this time-specific formatting with the checkbox at the top to .
Granted, the above example is maybe not the most common scenario, but it demonstrates the flexibility of the system.
+
+Options
+The last tab provides an option that will . Disable the checkbox if you prefer the graphical interface localized, while retaining the original English names for preference panels, applications and standard folder names.
+
Changes are applied immediately, though currently running applications may require to be closed and restarted before showing the new setting.
+| resets everything to default values. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the Locale preferences. |
Media
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Media | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Media/* +~/config/settings/System Audio Mixer +~/config/settings/MediaPrefs Settings - Stores the panel's window position. |
Dokumentasi masih belum ada. Jika Anda ingin mengerjakannya, harap umumkan di milis Dokumentasi untuk menghindari duplikasi.
+ +Mouse
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Mouse | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Mouse_settings |
+First you set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRL ALT and a left-click.
+You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration. The test area below the mouse graphics can be used to check if the double-click speed meets your taste: if double-clicking a word doesn't select it, it's set too fast (or you'll have to get used to clicking quicker...).
+There are three that determine how windows react to clicks:
+| This is the default setting: you click a window and it gets focus and is raised to the top. | ||
| Clicking a window only gives it the focus, but won't raise it automatically. To do that, you'd have to either click on its title tab or border or click anywhere while holding the window management keys CTRL ALT. | ||
| The window under the mouse pointer automatically gets the focus. Actually raising it, is done as described in the |
Activating relieves you of having to first put the focus on an inactive window in order to trigger widgets like a button or menu. This bears the risk of unintentionally closing a window, for example, by accidentally hitting the close button when aiming for the window tab. On the other hand it speeds up your workflow considerably.
+All settings are immediately applied.
+| resets everything to default values. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences. |
Network
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Network | |
| Pengaturan: | /boot/system/settings/network/ |
The Network preference is the one-stop panel to configure all available network devices and services. To the left is a collapsible list of your devices and services, the right has information or settings for the selected entry.
+At the bottom you find a checkbox to . brings back the settings that were active when you've started the panel.
Devices
+
+
+Here we see the wireless device, using the iprowifi4965 driver. From the pop-up menu you select the WLAN to connect to. After every WLAN name in the menu, you're shown a little icon representing the signal strength.
+Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every bootup. Select and it'll try to connect to the WLAN with the best signal around.
If you're connecting to a protected network, you'll be asked for the password and if to either allow that connection only once, or always, which will save the password so you won't be bothered to enter it in the future.
+The buttons below let you the device, or the connection.
+ +Beneath a device you find a list of the available protocols, IPv4 and IPv6:
+
+
+From the pop-up menu you set the mode to assign the vital network parameters , and . You can choose to dynamically get the configuration from your network (router etc.), or specify them yourself by selecting and pressing when finished.
+ +The settings for a tethered device are similar, without the WLAN connecting pop-up menu, obviously.
+ +Services
+DNS settings
+
+
+If you're using DHCP the IP address for a DNS server and the domain are provided by you network (router etc.). You can add and remove other DNS servers and adjust their priorities by moving them up and down in the list with the buttons to the right of it.
+ will activate your new settings.
FTP, SSH, Telnet
+ +
+
+Haiku provides a few servers that you can or . On the right side of the window, you'll find information on that particular server that you should heed: The FTP and the Telnet server are insecure and unencrypted. By default they're turned off and should only be turned on, if you're aware of the security risks.
+ +Settings files
+ +The network settings are found in the folder /system/settings/network/. Normally you don't have to care about those, other than maybe having to delete them to begin with a clean slate after things have gone terribly wrong...
+One file however can be really useful, especially when working from the Terminal. The hosts file lets you define aliases to specific IP addresses in the network. For example:
+127.0.0.1 localhost #loopback +192.168.178.3 NAS #Synology +192.168.178.102 XIOS #Mediaplayer+
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember it's IP address, but can simply enter:
+ftp NAS+ +
-
+
Printers
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Printers | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/printers/* |
Dokumentasi masih belum ada. Jika Anda ingin mengerjakannya, harap umumkan di milis Dokumentasi untuk menghindari duplikasi.
+ +Repositories
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Repositories | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Repositories_settings |
Repositories are collections of software packages. Set up by default, there's the Haiku repo with all of the operating system's packages and HaikuPorts, which provides a large number of ported and native Haiku software. There are several more repositories, curated by members of the Haiku community. Checkout Software Sites on the website.
+This is the preference panel to manage your respositories (you can open it also from HaikuDepot's menu):
+
+The first column in the list of known repositories shows if a repo is currently enabled. If it doesn't have a checkmark, it will not be queried by HaikuDepot or pkgman from the command line. Use the buttons to or the selected repositories, or double-click a repo to toggle the status.
+Depending on the size of the repository and the speed of the internet connection, enabling a repository may take a few seconds. If it takes longer, you're informed of pending tasks in the little text box above the buttons. If it takes unusually long, you'll be asked to either cancel or retry.
+To be able to remove a repository completely with the "" button, it has to be disabled.
+You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel:
+To add a new repository, just paste its URL into the text field. It'll be named "Unknown" until you enable it.
+-
+
Screen
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Screen | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces +~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode. +~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position. |
Each of your workspaces can have its own resolution, color depth and refresh rate.
+
+The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other menus contain all supported resolution, color depth and refresh rate settings.
+After clicking on , the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
+There's a key combination that always works, not only when the Screen preferences are open: SHIFT CTRL ALT ESC sets a fall-back video safe mode. Handy if your monitor doesn't report its capabilities correctly and your settings result in a distorted or black screen. Here too, an alert pops up and if you do nothing for 12 seconds or press ESC you'll revert back.
+On the left side of the window, you see a representation of your screen with the manufacturer and model it reports and it's resolution in dots per inch (dpi). It also shows the name of graphics card if it's supported by a driver. Otherwise it says "VESA", the quick fallback solution that works with pretty much every hardware.
+brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
+To the bottom left you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
+ScreenSaver
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Screensaver | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/ScreenSaver_settings |
The panel of the ScreenSaver preferences is split into two tabs: +
+ +
+
+General
+
++
The top checkbox enables/disables the screen saver.
+With the slider below it, you control after how long an idle time the screen saver kicks in.
+
The next two sliders are only usable after you activated their checkboxes:
+One slider determines after how many minutes the screen is powered off.
+The other, after how many minutes you need a password to unlock your machine.
+
By clicking into different corners of the two screens at the bottom, you tell the system when to immediately start the screen saver or when to prevent it from kicking in when you rest the mouse in the indicated corner. Click in the middle of the screens to disable that feature again. +
+ +
+
+Screensavers
+
++
The second tab shows a list of all installed screen savers and their individual settings. You can test your settings with the button below the list.
+New screen savers that don't come as part of a regular .hpkg package, can be installed by copying them into their respective non-packaged folder (see topic Filesystem layout):
| /boot/system/non-packaged/add-ons/Screen Savers/ | for screen savers available to every user. | |
| /boot/home/config/non-packaged/add-ons/Screen Savers/ | for screen savers only available to yourself. |
-
+
Shortcuts
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Shortcuts | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/shortcuts_settings +~/config/settings/Shortcuts_window_settings + |
Dokumentasi masih belum ada. Jika Anda ingin mengerjakannya, harap umumkan di milis Dokumentasi untuk menghindari duplikasi.
+ +Sounds
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Sounds | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Media/MediaFiles |
+Anda dapat menetapkan suara untuk peristiwa-peristiwa tertentu dalam sistem. Cukup pilih acara dari daftar dan pilih suara dari menu pop-up di bawah ini.
+| akan membungkam suatu event. | ||
| akan membuka panel file untuk menemukan suara baru yang belum ada dalam menu. |
Anda dapat menggunakan format apa pun yang didukung oleh sistem. Jika MediaPlayer dapat mengatasinya, demikian juga dengan program lain.
+Anda dapat mendengar cuplikan suara event dengan memilihnya dan menggunakan tombol dan tombol .
Time
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Time | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/networktime settings - Semua pengaturan yang berkaitan dengan waktu melalui jaringan +~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings - Pengaturan perangkat kasar jam (lokal atau GMT) +~/config/settings/Time settings - Pengaturan zona waktu +~/config/settings/Time_preflet_window - The panel's window position etc. + |
Panel preferensi Waktu dibagi menjadi empat tab:
+ +
+
+Tanggal dan waktu
+
+Di sebelah kiri, Anda dapat mengatur hari dalam sebulan hanya dengan mengkliknya di kalender. Anda mengubah bulan dan tahun dengan mengkliknya dan menggunakan panah atas/bawah ke kanan atau tombol kursor pada keyboard Anda.
+Demikian pula, Anda mengatur waktu di sebelah kanan. Atau cukup gerakkan tangan jam secara langsung.
+ +
+
+Zona waktu
+
+Simply find and choose your country in the list of continents and press . For countries with more than one time zone you'll have to expand one level deeper.
+To the right you'll find the time of the currently set time zone and the preview time of the the zone you've chosen.
Also on the right side is a setting for the hardware clock of your computer. There are two modes for the clock:
+| to display your local time, which you normally want if you dual-boot into Windows. | ||
| to display Greenwich Mean Time, which is the UNIX compatible setting. |
+
+Network time
+Setting date and time manually is pretty much obsolete if you're connected to the internet. There are public servers that supply very exact time signals.
+
+With the / buttons you can add/remove NTP-servers to/from the list.
+The checkboxes below tell the system to when synchronizing, not only the currently selected one, and to , so you can be sure you're clock always shows the correct time.
+You can if you accidentally deleted working NTP-servers and your clock manually. The synchronization can be achieved from the command line (or a script) as well:
+Time --update+ +
+
+Clock
+
+The last tab shows the options of the clock displayed in the Deskbar. You can disable the clock there completely with the top checkbox. The rest are equally self-explanatory.
+In every tab is a button that brings back the settings that were active when you started the Time preferences.
+ +-
+
Touchpad
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Touchpad | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Touchpad_settings |
This panel offers several touchpad related settings that are interesting when you're running on a notebook.
+ +
+
+By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
+The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best if with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
+If you feel comfortable using this feature, you can dispense with setting scroll areas and instead use the whole pad for normal navigation.
At the bottom is another slider to set the tap click sensitivity. If your taps keep getting ignored, increase the sensitivity. If the system registers clicks all the time, while all you want is to move the mouse pointer, try decreasing it.
+| resets everything to default values. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the Touchpad preferences. |
Here is a tip that's not related to the Touchpad preferences, but fits the general topic:
+Did you know that you can do a drag and drop just by using the touchpad, i.e. not using the buttons? Just do a double click without lifting the finger after the second click. The picked up icon will stick to the mouse pointer and you can drag it around by moving your finger. Lifting your finger will drop the icon.
If your finger reaches a border of the touchpad while dragging an icon, but the mouse pointer hasn't yet reached the screen edge, how can you keep on dragging your icon? As soon as you lift your finger, the icon would be dropped.
+Depending on your hardware, there's a nifty feature: just leave your finger without lifting at the touchpad edge. The mouse pointer will keep on moving on auto-pilot.
Tracker
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/Tracker | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/Tracker/TrackerSettings |
The Tracker preference panel is also available from every Tracker window with the menu .
+Its functions are discussed in the topic on Tracker.
VirtualMemory
+| Deskbar: | ||
| Lokasi: | /boot/system/preferences/VirtualMemory | |
| Pengaturan: | ~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory +~/config/settings/VM_data - Stores the panel's window position. |
Virtual memory let's the system swap out memory to harddisk, if the RAM can be used more sensibly for other things. So, even if you have lots of RAM, providing virtual memory is never a bad idea.
+
+You can set the size to even more than your physical memory size if needed. With today's huge harddisks, assigning the physical memory size shouldn't be a problem. Still, you can quickly adjust the size if your free space ever runs low. In that case you should also have a look at DiskUsage to find out what's eating up your diskspace.
+Normally, the swap file's written to your boot partition. If you often run into disk thrashing due to the virtual memory system swapping memory in and out, you can try to use a separate harddisk for you swap file. Simply another partition on the same harddisk with your system/data won't help.
+Upgrading your RAM is of course the most effective way to go...
| resets everything to default values. | ||
| brings back the settings that were active when you started the VirtualMemory preferences. |
| Indeks |
|
+ The Find window + Basic queries - "by name" + Advanced queries - "by attribute" + Even more advanced queries - "by formula" + The result window + Query templates + |
Queries
+ +A query is a file search based on file attributes and can be performed within Tracker or in Terminal. Queries are saved in /boot/home/queries/ and by default last seven days before being purged. Note, these aren't static result lists of your search, but are the query formulas which trigger a new search whenever you open them.
+Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can drill down a saved query just like any folder by right-clicking on it and navigating through the submenus.
+
+The Find window
+You start a query by invoking the menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is ALT F. You're presented with the Find window:
+
+-
+
+
+Basic queries - "by name"
+If you simply want to find all files and folders on your mounted disks that match a certain pattern, simply leave the search method at , enter the search term into the text box and press ENTER.
+ +
+
+Advanced queries - "by attribute"
+You can create more advanced queries by searching within the attributes of specific file types. For that to work, these attributes have to be indexed.
+
+You start by setting the filetype from to, for example, and change the search method to .
+This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons and under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With and you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
+Let's do an email query as an example:
+
+This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Oswald has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "sufflé" or "impossible".
+As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
+A good way to cut down the number of search results.
+
+Even more advanced queries - "by formula"
+Typing in a formula query by hand is daunting and really quite unpractical. It still has its uses.
+Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
+
+Once more as text, edited for readability:
+(((((MAIL:from=="*[cC][lL][aA][rR][aA] [oO][sS][wW][aA][lL][dD]*") + &&(MAIL:when>=%2 months%)) + &&(MAIL:subject=="*[sS][uU][fF][fF][lL][éÉ]*")) + ||(MAIL:subject=="*[iI][mM][pP][oO][sS][sS][iI][bB][lL][eE]*")) + &&(BEOS:TYPE=="text/x-email"))+
What's the use?
+-
+
+
+The result window
+After you start a search, the Find window will be replaced by a result window. Here is an example that queried for "server":
+
+Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:
+-
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with .
+Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with .
+ + +
+
+Query templates
+If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
+By using the menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag & dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
+Team Monitor
+ +With CTRL ALT DEL you invoke the Team Monitor which lists all currently running programs.
+
+Programs that were launched by the system are blue, those started by the user black.
+Applications that are unresponsive, which is often a sign the program has crashed, are marked red. You can try to quit a program by selecting it and pressing (or either DEL or Q). If that doesn't work, try (or SHIFT DEL or K) instead.
You can summon a Terminal with OPT ALT T.
+If your Tracker or Deskbar crashed or froze, a new button appears (you may have to kill the offending team first): will restart Tracker and/or Deskbar for you.
+ +Tracker Add-Ons
+ +Applications can install add-ons so they can be invoked easily on a selection of files from Tracker. Only the add-ons that can handle a specific filetype are presented under from the context menu or the menu of a Tracker window. Some add-ons don't necessarily need a file to work on and are thus always present.
+New Tracker add-ons that don't come as part of a regular .hpkg package, can be installed by copying them into their respective non-packaged folder (see topic Filesystem layout):
+| /boot/system/non-packaged/add-ons/Tracker/ | for add-ons available to every user. | |
| /boot/home/config/non-packaged/add-ons/Tracker/ | for add-ons only available to yourself. |
The file name of an add-on can be suffixed with a dash and capital letter, and is then available via keyboard shortcut. For example, Open Target Folder-O opens with ALT OPT O.
+Of course, you have to take care of possible shortcut collisions when deciding on a shortcut. You can't have the same for different add-ons.
Haiku's Tracker Add-Ons
+These Tracker Add-Ons come with every Haiku installation:
+| Background-B | +Opens the Background preferences to change the color or image of the Desktop or any folder. Invoked on an image file the Background panel is launched with that image already loaded as a potential background. |
| DiskUsage-I | +Starts the DiskUsage application with the according folder as basis. |
| FileType-F | +Invoked on a file, opens its specific FileType panel, otherwise the general FileTypes preferences are launched. |
| Open Target Folder-O | +Can only be used on a linked file and opens the folder that file lives in. |
| TextSearch-G | +Starts the TextSearch application to look for a string in the selected folder (and its subfolders). |
| ZipOMatic-Z | +A selection of files will be added to a zip archive, invoked without a selection opens a panel to create an archive via drag & drop. |
-
+
| Indeks |
|
+ Mounting volumes + Navigating + Appearance + Tracker preferences + Working with files + Transaction status + |
Tracker
+ +The Tracker is the graphical interface to all your files. It lets you create new files and folders or find, launch or rename as well as copy or delete existing ones.
+Being an application like any other (the Desktop with its icons is really just a fullscreen window in the background), Tracker appears with its windows in the Deskbar and can be quit and restarted. The easiest way to quit and restart a crashed or frozen Tracker (or a wayward Deskbar) is to call the Team Monitor.
+ +
+
+Mounting Volumes
+In order to access a harddisk, CD, USB stick etc., you first have to mount the volume, that is, let the system know it's there. This is done with a right-click on the Desktop or an already mounted volume (like the boot disk) and choosing the volume from the submenu. You find the same menu in the Deskbar.
+
+There are also so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.
+The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.
+
+Navigating
+By default, when you double-click a folder, Tracker opens a new window while leaving the parent window open. This can quickly lead to an overcrowded desktop.
+You can prevent that by holding down the OPT key, which automatically closes the parent window.
+This is also true for keyboard navigation. For more on that, see topic Shortcuts and key combinations.
Moving through your folders is one of Trackers main purposes, just like the file managers on other platforms. Haiku's Tracker has some unique features that will help you doing that efficiently.
+ +
+Drilling down the submenus
+Instead of double-clicking your way down folder after folder, there's a better way to drill down:
+
+
+Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/home/config/.
+If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
A similar method can be used from any Tracker window:
+
+Click on the area in the lower left, where the number of items is listed, and you'll get submenus for every level above your current location. From there you can drill down through the folders as usual.
+Note, that the Desktop is always the topmost level as that is where Tracker shows mounted volumes. So, if you want to go to another disk, you first have to navigate to the top (Desktop) and cross over to your other disk from there.
+
You'll get the same submenu-navigating when you drag a file over a folder. After a short while of hovering, a submenu pops up and you can drill down to your destination. If you initiated the drag with the right mousebutton, you can choose between copying, moving or linking the file when you release the mouse.
+ +
+
+Jumping to files with type-ahead
+You may be familiar with the concept from file managers of other operating systems: typing the first few letters of a filename will jump to the first file matching these starting characters. Haiku took the idea a step further. If there isn't a file starting with those letters it will jump to the first file including the string anywhere in its name. And if there's nothing with the string in its filename, the attributes are searched next.
+
+In the above example, there are many files starting with "Haiku logo", rendering simpler approaches to typing ahead quite useless. In Haiku however, typing "web" jumps right to its first occurence in "Haiku logo - website". The characters you enter appear in the bottom left corner where you normally find the item count of all files in the folder. A second after entering a character, the display jumps back to normal and you're ready for a new type ahead search.
+
+
+Type-ahead filtering
+Instead of jumping to a file while typing, there's also the option to filter out all files not matching your type-ahead string. This can improve clarity dramatically, especially when dealing with crowded folders. By using SHIFT SPACE as delimiter, you can even filter on multiple strings.
+Contrary to type-ahead jumping, the filtering will stick until you press ESC or close the window (or leave the folder if you're using Single Window Navigation).
+This type-ahead filtering is set in the Tracker preferences.
+
+Appearance
+
+Tracker windows offer three different viewing modes from the menu:
+-
+
The menu offers a number of other functions:
+-
+
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete (ALT K). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
+The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.
+ +
+
+Tracker preferences
+ opens a panel that offers a number of settings that, where not obvious, should become clear once tried out. Since all settings are applied live, you'll immediately see the changes.
+
So, in short, the not so obvious settings:
-
+
This panel, by the way, is also available as Tracker from Deskbar's .
+ +
+
+Working with files
+When invoked on a selected file, most of the menu commands are also offered in the context menu by right-clicking that file.
+As usual the commands are pretty clear.
+-
+
+
+Transaction status
+When you copy, move or delete files, Tracker shows its progress with a status window. If you initiate more than one transaction, each job gets its own status display.
+
+To the right are two buttons to pause or stop a transaction entirely. Sometimes it can be useful to temporarily pause a large transaction. For example, you may need to quickly launch a large application. Copying large amounts of data chokes your harddisk's IO bandwidth and thus delays your workflow.
+ +-
+
Twitcher
+ +The Twitcher is a task switcher to jump between running applications and their windows.
+
+Just tap CTRL TAB to switch between the current and the last application/window. Tapping CTRL TAB very quickly will switch between all applications. Or press and hold CTRL TAB to go through all running applications by repeatedly hitting TAB or ←/→. If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as described and then go through its open windows with the ↑/↓ keys.
+You cycle through all an applications visible windows on the current workspace with CTRL ~ (which, depending on the keymap you're using, is the key below ESC).
+It's also possible to invoke the Twitcher with CTRL TAB and then use the mouse to choose the application/window you'll jump to when releasing the CTRL key.
+The Twitcher also offers a few more advanced keyboard shortcuts:
+| ESC | Aborts the twitching and returns to the formerly active window. | |
| Q | Quits the selected application. | |
| H | Hides all windows of the selected application. |
| Indeks |
|
+ Haiku's mail system + Using custom statuses + Using queries + More tips + |
Workshop: Managing Email
+ +This workshop takes a look on how to manage email under Haiku. It assumes that the email services are correctly configured with the E-Mail preferences and you're familiar with the basic features of the Mail application.
+ +
+
+Haiku's mail system
+If you come to Haiku from other operating systems, you're probably used to big applications like MS Outlook or Mozilla's Thunderbird. You have to configure them by entering all the info on mail server addresses etc. and they use their own contacts database. They take care of sending and fetching email and store them in some big special file.
+Changing you email client can be a hassle with quite some ex/importing and converting going on. Using more than one client in parallel to check out what else is available is also not without the occasional kerfuffle.
Haiku's mail system is different. It breaks down into smaller separate modules.
+There's the mail_daemon that takes care of the communication with your mail servers. The E-Mail preferences is the one central point to configure your email accounts and how often they're checked, for example.
+Every message that is fetched or sent is saved as one single email file, with its header information (like sender, subject, date) and status (like New, Replied, Sent) in BFS attributes. This enables searching/filtering them with Haiku's fast queries.
+
+With every email being in a separate file, viewing them becomes just as easy as browsing through a folder (or query result) of images with ShowImage. Leaving the Tracker window open, you'll see the moving selection of the currently viewed file while you use the previous/next button to move through them.
+As they are independent files, using a viewer other than Haiku's Mail causes no problems whatsoever.
Similarly, creating a new message results in just another file that is handed to the mail_daemon that takes care of sending it off. Contact management is deferred to the People application.
+In a nutshell, where other mail clients do everything, from communicating with the mail servers to providing a view with all your mails and tools to search and filter them, Haiku uses a chain of smaller tools and general file management:
+-
+
Especially using Tracker and queries to manage emails is a powerful idea. The experience you gain can be transferred to any other problem that is dealing with files. Be it images, music, video, contacts or any other documents, using Tracker is at the core of all file managing.
+Also, improvements in any of these system areas benefit not just emailing, but all applications that make use of them.
+
+Using custom statuses
+When you browse through your newly arrived email, you may want to come back to some of them later to think about it in more depth. While you could use Mail's menu to keep them in your "New messages" query, things tend to pile up that way...
+One solution is of course to just start a reply and save it as draft. But if you don't expect to write a reply and just want to re-read the mail later, that isn't ideal.
+
+Better use to create a new status and use that to categorize your mail. For example, you could call the status "Later", and then query for that when you find more time.
+Or you use different statuses for specific projects. For example, I created a status "HUG" (for "Haiku user guide") under which I collect every mail that may influence the contents of the user guide, like commit messages about code changes that alter or introduce some feature or anything else I feel could improve the user guide.
+In any case, try to keep the status name short. That way it always fits in a normally wide "Status" column in Tracker.
You don't have to open an email with the Mail application to set its status. With the Tracker add-ons Mark as Read and Mark as... you can select some email files and set their status in one go.
+ +
+
+Using queries
+Sure, you specify a folder to store all your email, you can open it et voilà, there's all you mail. But over time the folder becomes crowded and showing all will take longer and longer as thousands of files and their attributes have to be parsed and sorted. Also, most of the time you don't really care about two year old emails of Nigerian princes and their inheritory trouble ...
+Queries, to the rescue!
+By using queries, you can narrow down the view of your mails. Actually, the mailbox icon in the Deskbar uses queries.
+
+The submenu does a query for the status "Draft", which is set by Mail when you save a message.
+and are just links to regular folders (and not very useful in my opinion).
+The submenu is populated by a query for email with the status "New" (that same query is used to change the mailbox icon to show some letters in it, by the way).
+ +You can add your own queries (or folders, applications, scripts etc.) to that context menu too, by putting them or links to them into ~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links.
+
+
+Query examples
+Here are a few examples of useful queries:
++This finds all mails with the custom status "Later". |
++This finds all mails of the past 2 days. |
+This finds all mails by Ingo Weinhold of the past 2 weeks. |
++This finds all posts from the Haiku commit list of the past 12 hours. |
+
+More tips
+-
+
| Indeks |
|
+ Preparations + Creating a custom filetype + Icon + File recognition + Description + Preferred Application + Extra Attributes + Indexing + Filling in the data + Querying the database + |
Workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries
+ +This is a workshop to show the use of Attributes, Queries, the Index and custom Filetypes. As an example, we build a database to keep track of our DVD library.
+ +
+
+Preparations
+Let's first decide what filetype and attributes would serve our needs. Originally, I planned to use a bookmark file with a link to the movie's IMdB page, but since Haiku didn't have a "bookmarkable" browser like BeOS' NetPositive at that time, I came up with this: The file itself will be a JPEG image for the movie cover.
+With WebPositive, Haiku now has a browser using bookmark files again, so you could as well use a bookmark file instead of an image as basic filetype for our database files.
+In any case, to these files we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to query it later (then we have to add it to the index) and if so, what type of attribute it should be. Numbers (int, float) can be evaluated differently than text (</=/> vs. is/contains/starts with).
Here are the attributes I'd like to see for my DVDs:
+-
+
+
+Creating a custom filetype
+Start the Filetypes preferences, and click on the button below the hierarchical list on the left. A small dialog opens and you specify in which MIME Group your new filetype will reside. You can also create a completely new group. Let's put it into "applications" and set the "Internal name" to DVDdb.
+
+Now, a panel for your new DVDdb filetype opens:
+
+
+
+
+Icon
+Double-click the icon well to open Icon-O-Matic to design an icon for your filetype. You can also drag & drop an icon from the icon well of another type, maybe as starting point for a modified version.
+ +
+
+File recognition
+You can add suffixes like .txt, .jpg, .mp3 to recognize files by their extention. Useful when working with files from systems without MIME typing. We don't need that for our example.
+ +
+
+Description
+-
+
+
+Preferred application
+This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked.
+| opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover. | ||
| opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for. |
+
+Extra attributes
+Here we enter all the custom attributes we decided on in our preparations. Clicking the button opens a panel to enter all the data for the new attribute. You can edit an existing attribute with a double-click.
+
+-
+
-
+
Now, insert all the info for our attributes:
+| Internal Name | Attribute type | indexed? | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| DVDdb:title | text | yes | Movie title |
| DVDdb:genre | text | yes | Genre |
| DVDdb:url | text | no | URL |
| DVDdb:cast | text | yes | Director/Cast |
| DVDdb:plot | text | no | Plot |
| DVDdb:rating | int-32 | yes | Rating 1 to 10 |
| DVDdb:coord | text | no | Shelf |
| DVDdb:lent | text | yes | Lent to |
+
+Indexing
+Before we start entering data in our little DVD database, we should add certain attributes to the Index. Only indexed attributes can use Haiku's fast Queries.
+So, what will we be searching in the future? We probably won't ask "What's in the B4 coordinate in my shelf?" or "Does the IMdB URL or the plot of the movie contain the word 'pope-shenooda'?".
This leaves these attributes:
+| Internal Name | Attribute type |
|---|---|
| DVDdb:title | text |
| DVDdb:genre | text |
| DVDdb:cast | text |
| DVDdb:rating | int-32 |
To index them, we open a Terminal and simply add one attribute after the other:
+mkindex -t string DVDdb:title +mkindex -t string DVDdb:genre +mkindex -t string DVDdb:cast +mkindex -t int DVDdb:rating+
The -t option defines the type of attribute, which is "string" for all but the rating, which is an integer number.
+ +
+
+Filling in the data
+Now, everything's set and we can begin putting some data into our base.
+Since our basic file is a cover image, we go to some online resource like IMdB, look for our first movie and save the cover or movie poster in a new folder where we want to keep our DVDdb files.
Opening that folder we see a typical Tracker window with one JPEG in it. Right-clicking it, we change its filetype to application/DVDdb with the Filetype Addon. There's more info on this in the Filetypes document.
+Now, we activate all our DVDdb attributes from the menu of the Tracker window and rearrange the columns to our taste:
+
+By clicking on a yet empty attribute (or pressing ALT E) we enter editing mode and fill each attribute. With TAB and SHIFT TAB you can navigate between attributes.
+In our example, we usually start with a downloaded JPG cover and change its type to applications/DVDdb. There's another elegant way to produce a file to work with. Just copy an empty file of our filetype to /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates and rename it to DVDdb.
+Right-clicking into a Tracker window, you'll find a new entry under besides the default "New folder".
+ +
+
+Querying the database
+Several hours of grunt work later, we have a nice little database that you can query to find all your Christina Ricci movies that have a 7+ rating... :)
+You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.
+Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with .
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder and rename it to group/filetype, replacing slashes with underscores; in our case "applications_DVDdb".
+Open the new folder and paste in the layout with . Voilà:
+
+
+-
+
| Indeks |
|
+ Joining a wireless network + Joining from the command line + Getting supported hardware to work + Tips + |
Workshop: Wireless networking
+ +Getting the networking to run is essential in today's need for permanent internet connection. As keeping up to date with all the different and ever changing hardware and drivers is quite impossible for a small project, Haiku relies on a FreeBSD compatibility layer for its networking drivers.
+This ensures a massive amount of supported hardware, though probably not 100% of what's out there. See FreeBSD 12.0's release hardware notes for a list of supported models.
+PCMCIA, CardBus, ExpressCard, USB and ISA devices still need more work to become functional.
+
+Joining a wireless network
+By default, Haiku will join the first unencrypted wireless network it finds after booting up. To connect to a specific network, you use the Desktop applet NetworkStatus.
+Right-click on its icon in the Deskbar and choose the network's public name (which is the "SSID" it broadcasts) from the context menu.
+
+A window opens where you enter the type of authentication (probably WPA/WPA2, WEP is not a secure encryption anymore!) and the password for that wireless network. Click to start the login process.
Depending on your hardware and network configuration this may take a while. You'll be kept informed of the progress by notifications:
+Once it reads "Ready" and the NetworkStatus icon in the Deskbar shows a green round light, the connection is established. If the notifications end in "No link" and a yellow triangle, something went wrong, probably an incorrect password.
+ +
+
+Joining from the command line
+If you prefer to use the command line or would like to use scripting or the ~/config/settings/boot/UserBootscript to automate things to join a specific network on bootup, there's the command ifconfig.
+Start a Terminal and enter the first line to scan for available wireless networks:
+ifconfig /dev/net/iprowifi3945/0 scan +name address signal auth +haiku-top 01:d0:19:a6:88:42 30 WPA +ArcorInternet123 00:20:12:a4:29:e1 15 WPA+
The path to your wireless network adapter has to be adjusted, of course.
+The output shows the public name (SSID), MAC address, signal strength and authentication method of all found networks.
To join a network, use this line and insert the respective public name (SSID) and password:
+ifconfig /dev/net/iprowifi3945/0 join {SSID} {password}
+Make sure the initial configuration of the wireless network adapter after booting up has finished, before issuing ifconfig commands or they might be ignored. Depending on your hardware and network configuration that may take a while. Watch those notifications...
+ +
+
+Getting supported hardware to work
+All supported modern wireless hardware works out of the box.
+ +A few quite old chipsets (Intel 2100/2200/2225/2915, Broadcom 43xx, Marvell 88w8335) require binary firmware modules that Haiku cannot include due to licensing issues, though. To get these wireless cards to work, a simple script is included which will retrieve and install all of the needed proprietary bits for you.
+Open a Terminal and type:
+install-wifi-firmwares.sh+
Now review the licenses and accept them to install all of the available firmware files.
+ +If you cannot obtain the binary firmware files via the install-wifi-firmwares.sh script (for example due to lack of internet connection within Haiku), you can also download this shell script, and run it from another OS that has wget and zip installed.
+Windows users need to have wget and zip for Windows installed in their default locations and use this batch script.
+The script will download the needed files and create a zip file that is to be extracted to Haiku's /boot. Once unpacked, open a Terminal and type:
install-wifi-firmwares.sh+
Review the licenses and accept them to install all of the now available firmware files.
+ +-
+
Workspaces
+ +Workspaces are virtual desktops, complete with their own resolution, color depth and background. Up to 32 of these workspaces can be set from the Screen preferences.
+ +
+
+
+
+Switching workspaces
+You switch between workspaces by either clicking into the Workspaces applet (which is seen in the above image) or by using the keyboard shortcut ALT Fx, where "x" is the workspace number. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
+Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send you to the workspace it's in.
Another very convenient way is to use CTRL ALT ←/→/↑/↓ to navigate spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. If you additionally hold down SHIFT, the active window will move with you to the new workspace.
+You can switch back and forth between two workspaces with ALT ` (the actual key depends on the keymap you're using - it is the key below ESC). Again, holding SHIFT will take the active window with you.
+ +The package command is used to manage HPKG packages. Have a look at the article Installing applications to learn the very basics. Usually the tool haikuporter is used to automatically create packages from so-called recipes.
pkgman is used to search, install, update and uninstall packages. Package repositories can be added, dropped and their package lists refreshed. A special kind of update is invoked with the parameter full-sync: it is more aggressive and also downgrades or removes packages, if necessary.
-For more details on a parameter, append "--help", e.g. pkgman search --help.
Comandi utili per lo scripting
diff --git a/userguide/it/applications/codycam.html b/userguide/it/applications/codycam.html
index 1b6a0586..a9abaeb1 100644
--- a/userguide/it/applications/codycam.html
+++ b/userguide/it/applications/codycam.html
@@ -32,11 +32,13 @@
パッケージからインストールされたプログラムは、自動的に Deskbar メニュー内に項目を作成します。パッケージをインストールするにつれて、それは少し込み入ってくるでしょう。もしユーザーが総合的に管理するのが好きで、自分自身でリンクした (たぶんサブフォルダーに分類された) アプリケーションを見たいだけなら、以下がそのやり方です。
menu フォルダーのリンクを、~/config/settings/deskbar/ 内に作成し、それを menu_entries にリネームします。以上は、ターミナルから以下のように実現できます。
ウィンドウを移動するには、ワークスペースアプレット中でウィンドウを掴んで、別のワークスペースへドラッグするだけです。これは、現在のデスクトップを去ることなくウィンドウを移動できるという長所があります。もちろん、それはワークスペース中にウィンドウが多すぎない場合で、かつ目的のウィンドウがほかのウィンドウによって隠されていない場合にのみうまく働きます。もうひとつのオプションとして、ウィンドウのタブを掴んで、ワークスペースを切り替える間、ALT Fx を押し続けることでも移動できます。
ワークスペース一般についてさらに詳しい情報、およびさらに多くのキーボードショートカットについては、ワークスペースの章を見てください。
-+
たった今、アプレットをキーコンボで素早く呼び出せるようになります。また、同様に ESC で再び素早く閉じることができます。
diff --git a/userguide/jp/filesystem-layout.html b/userguide/jp/filesystem-layout.html
index 8e0528e9..2cf049b5 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/filesystem-layout.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/filesystem-layout.html
@@ -33,11 +33,13 @@
インデックス
- 簡単なウィンドウの移動とリサイズ
- Stack & Tile
+ ウィンドウを素早く移動 / リサイズする方法
+ スタック & タイル
読み込み / 保存パネル
レプリカント
@@ -89,7 +91,7 @@
-簡単なウィンドウの移動とリサイズ
+ウィンドウを素早く移動 / リサイズする方法
ウィンドウの移動やリサイズは、同時に実行している複数のアプリケーションを取り扱う操作の大部分を占めます。黄色の小さいタイトルタブや、さらに細いウィンドウの枠をポイントする代わりに、より簡単にウィンドウを動かす方法があります。また、リサイズコーナーは小さい上に、右下の角からその方向にしかリサイズできないという制約があります。
ウィンドウ枠の右クリックでリサイズできますが、慎重にポイントしなければなりません。
こうした問題に対処するために、Haiku は CTRL ALT (ウィンドウを管理するキーの組み合わせ) とマウスを使ったすばらしい解決策を提供しています。ウィンドウ管理に関連するさらに多くのショートカットについては、ショートカットとキーの組み合わせの章も参照してください。
@@ -98,27 +100,27 @@
-Stack & Tile (スタック＆タイル)
-Haiku のユーザーインターフェースは、ウィンドウがフルサイズのタイトルバーの代わりに黄色のタブを備えているという事実を、完璧に使いこなすユニークな特徴を提供します。それは、"Stack & Tile (スタック＆タイル)" と呼ばれます。
+スタック＆タイル
+
Haiku のユーザーインターフェースは、ウィンドウがフルサイズのタイトルバーの代わりに黄色のタブを備えているという事実を、完璧に使いこなすユニークな特徴を提供します。それは、"スタック＆タイル (Stack & Tile)" と呼ばれます。
以下の例で、ブックマークを表示した Tracker ウィンドウが、WebPositive ウィンドウの左側にタイル (Tile) します。WebPositive ウィンドウ自体は、ソースフォルダー haiku を表示する別の Tracker ウィンドウとスタック (Stack) しています。このアニメーションでは、ユーザーがスタックしたウィンドウのタブをクリックすると、交互にどちらか一方を前面に移動します。
-このようにつながっているので、ウィンドウのグループは同時に移動およびリサイズできます。それは、よりプロジェクト中心の環境で作業するよい配置です。右側のドキュメントと web ブラウザーウィンドウの代わりに、エディターと Tracker ウィンドウ、そしておそらく作業中のプロジェクトに関する関連するメールを、それらと一緒に stack&tile できます。
+このようにつながっているので、ウィンドウのグループは同時に移動およびリサイズできます。それは、よりプロジェクト中心の環境で作業するよい配置です。右側のドキュメントと web ブラウザーウィンドウの代わりに、エディターと Tracker ウィンドウ、そしておそらく作業中のプロジェクトに関する関連するメールを、それらと一緒に スタック & タイルできます。
ウィンドウを実際に配置することは容易です。別のウィンドウのタブか枠の近くまでウィンドウをタブでドラッグしながら、ウィンドウが強調されるまで、OPT を押してください。それからマウスボタンを離します。
-Stack & Tile は、2 つの関連する部分から成ります。
+スタック & タイル は、2 つの関連する部分から成ります。
"Stacking (スタック)" は、ウィンドウを互いに重なり合わせて置くことです。黄色のタブは自動的に所定の位置に移動します。
+
"スタック (Stacking)" は、ウィンドウを互いに重なり合わせて置くことです。黄色のタブは自動的に所定の位置に移動します。
OPT を押しながらタブを重ねると、色が変わります。次に、ウィンドウにドロップして、スタックします。
"Tiling (タイル)" は、ウィンドウを水平方向、または垂直方向にくっつけることです。
+
"タイル (Tiling)" は、ウィンドウを水平方向、または垂直方向にくっつけることです。
先と同様に、OPT を押しながら、ウィンドウを互いに近づけたとき、色が変化したウィンドウをドロップすれば、ウィンドウ枠は互いにくっつくでしょう。
分離は同じように行えます。ウィンドウをタブでドラッグ中に OPT を押せば、グループの外に出ます。
読み込み / 保存パネル
-どのようなアプリケーションでも、ファイルを開くか保存する際は以下のようなパネルが開きます。
+どのようなアプリケーションでも、ファイルを開く / 保存する際は以下のようなパネルが開きます。
パネルは一般的な要素をすべて備えています。現在のフォルダー下のファイル選択リスト、保存パネルではファイル名を入力するテキストフィールドと、異なるファイル形式のためのポップアップメニュー、そしてその設定です。
ファイル選択リストの上にあるポップアップメニューで親フォルダーに移動できます。
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup-create.png b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup-create.png
index d91486de..7e4989f8 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup-create.png and b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup-create.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup-initialize.png b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup-initialize.png
index 8c02ea1b..f1827b18 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup-initialize.png and b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup-initialize.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup.png b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup.png
index f14d571b..0a4a7eed 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup.png and b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/drivesetup.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/magnify.png b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/magnify.png
index 6fea1ac2..9dd072ab 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/magnify.png and b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/magnify.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/mail-query.png b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/mail-query.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0be3203f
Binary files /dev/null and b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/mail-query.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/mail_query.png b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/mail_query.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0be3203f
Binary files /dev/null and b/userguide/jp/images/apps-images/mail_query.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/attributes-images/people.png b/userguide/jp/images/attributes-images/people.png
index df7892c6..3d0ff272 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/attributes-images/people.png and b/userguide/jp/images/attributes-images/people.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/deskbar-images/prefs-deskbar.png b/userguide/jp/images/deskbar-images/prefs-deskbar.png
index 73c40737..d4bab047 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/deskbar-images/prefs-deskbar.png and b/userguide/jp/images/deskbar-images/prefs-deskbar.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/basic-query.png b/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/basic-query.png
index 4fb4306d..7d4e069e 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/basic-query.png and b/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/basic-query.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/formula-query.png b/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/formula-query.png
index 23f94c79..b7e01577 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/formula-query.png and b/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/formula-query.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/query-window-filled.png b/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/query-window-filled.png
index a11ac495..5a0c501e 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/query-window-filled.png and b/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/query-window-filled.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/query-window.png b/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/query-window.png
index 6d38e807..ec4a1900 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/query-window.png and b/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/query-window.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/result-window.png b/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/result-window.png
index a45f9a70..7fad7130 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/result-window.png and b/userguide/jp/images/queries-images/result-window.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/tracker-images/mount-settings.png b/userguide/jp/images/tracker-images/mount-settings.png
index fbf85dd2..b9fa7dd2 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/tracker-images/mount-settings.png and b/userguide/jp/images/tracker-images/mount-settings.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/images/tracker-images/window-menu.png b/userguide/jp/images/tracker-images/window-menu.png
index cffa41cd..3d96daa4 100644
Binary files a/userguide/jp/images/tracker-images/window-menu.png and b/userguide/jp/images/tracker-images/window-menu.png differ
diff --git a/userguide/jp/index.html b/userguide/jp/index.html
index b67c0e40..babc50ed 100644
--- a/userguide/jp/index.html
+++ b/userguide/jp/index.html
@@ -33,11 +33,13 @@
@@ -64,38 +69,64 @@
Ustawienia: ~/config/settings/DriveSetup
| インデックス |
|
- 簡単なウィンドウの移動とリサイズ - Stack & Tile + ウィンドウを素早く移動 / リサイズする方法 + スタック & タイル 読み込み / 保存パネル レプリカント |
-簡単なウィンドウの移動とリサイズ
+ウィンドウを素早く移動 / リサイズする方法
ウィンドウの移動やリサイズは、同時に実行している複数のアプリケーションを取り扱う操作の大部分を占めます。黄色の小さいタイトルタブや、さらに細いウィンドウの枠をポイントする代わりに、より簡単にウィンドウを動かす方法があります。また、リサイズコーナーは小さい上に、右下の角からその方向にしかリサイズできないという制約があります。
ウィンドウ枠の右クリックでリサイズできますが、慎重にポイントしなければなりません。
こうした問題に対処するために、Haiku は CTRL ALT (ウィンドウを管理するキーの組み合わせ) とマウスを使ったすばらしい解決策を提供しています。ウィンドウ管理に関連するさらに多くのショートカットについては、ショートカットとキーの組み合わせの章も参照してください。
@@ -98,27 +100,27 @@
-Stack & Tile (スタック＆タイル)
-Haiku のユーザーインターフェースは、ウィンドウがフルサイズのタイトルバーの代わりに黄色のタブを備えているという事実を、完璧に使いこなすユニークな特徴を提供します。それは、"Stack & Tile (スタック＆タイル)" と呼ばれます。
+スタック＆タイル
+
Haiku のユーザーインターフェースは、ウィンドウがフルサイズのタイトルバーの代わりに黄色のタブを備えているという事実を、完璧に使いこなすユニークな特徴を提供します。それは、"スタック＆タイル (Stack & Tile)" と呼ばれます。
以下の例で、ブックマークを表示した Tracker ウィンドウが、WebPositive ウィンドウの左側にタイル (Tile) します。WebPositive ウィンドウ自体は、ソースフォルダー haiku を表示する別の Tracker ウィンドウとスタック (Stack) しています。このアニメーションでは、ユーザーがスタックしたウィンドウのタブをクリックすると、交互にどちらか一方を前面に移動します。
-このようにつながっているので、ウィンドウのグループは同時に移動およびリサイズできます。それは、よりプロジェクト中心の環境で作業するよい配置です。右側のドキュメントと web ブラウザーウィンドウの代わりに、エディターと Tracker ウィンドウ、そしておそらく作業中のプロジェクトに関する関連するメールを、それらと一緒に stack&tile できます。
+このようにつながっているので、ウィンドウのグループは同時に移動およびリサイズできます。それは、よりプロジェクト中心の環境で作業するよい配置です。右側のドキュメントと web ブラウザーウィンドウの代わりに、エディターと Tracker ウィンドウ、そしておそらく作業中のプロジェクトに関する関連するメールを、それらと一緒に スタック & タイルできます。
ウィンドウを実際に配置することは容易です。別のウィンドウのタブか枠の近くまでウィンドウをタブでドラッグしながら、ウィンドウが強調されるまで、OPT を押してください。それからマウスボタンを離します。
-Stack & Tile は、2 つの関連する部分から成ります。
+スタック & タイル は、2 つの関連する部分から成ります。
| - | "Stacking (スタック)" は、ウィンドウを互いに重なり合わせて置くことです。黄色のタブは自動的に所定の位置に移動します。 | "スタック (Stacking)" は、ウィンドウを互いに重なり合わせて置くことです。黄色のタブは自動的に所定の位置に移動します。 |
| - | "Tiling (タイル)" は、ウィンドウを水平方向、または垂直方向にくっつけることです。 | "タイル (Tiling)" は、ウィンドウを水平方向、または垂直方向にくっつけることです。 |
分離は同じように行えます。ウィンドウをタブでドラッグ中に OPT を押せば、グループの外に出ます。
読み込み / 保存パネル
-どのようなアプリケーションでも、ファイルを開くか保存する際は以下のようなパネルが開きます。
+どのようなアプリケーションでも、ファイルを開く / 保存する際は以下のようなパネルが開きます。
パネルは一般的な要素をすべて備えています。現在のフォルダー下のファイル選択リスト、保存パネルではファイル名を入力するテキストフィールドと、異なるファイル形式のためのポップアップメニュー、そしてその設定です。
ファイル選択リストの上にあるポップアップメニューで親フォルダーに移動できます。
DriveSetup is a tool to create, delete and initialize partitions. At this time it can't resize or move existing partitions, so that you'll either need an unpartitioned volume (perhaps an external USB drive or another harddisk) or do the initial setup with a tool like the GParted LiveCD to provide the space for another partition.
+DriveSetup jest narzędziem do tworzenia, usuwania i formatowania partycji. Obecnie nie potrafi przesuwać partycji ani zmieniać ich rozmiaru, więc do pracy potrzebny jest nierozpartycjonowany nośnik (np. zewnętrzny napęd USB lub inny dysk twardy). W innym razie należy użyć narzędzia takiego jak GParted LiveCD, aby przygotować miejsce dla kolejnej partycji.
-At the top is a graphical representation of all partitions inside the device chosen in the list below it. Besides a maximum of 4 primary partitions, each of those can contain a number of extended/logical partitions. You may have to expand such a list with the +/- widget that appears in that case in front of that device to see the details of every logical partition.
-You can select a partition from the list and mount and unmount them with the commands in the menu or by pressing ALT M or ALT U.
-You can also completely delete a partition with .
-Which brings us to this:
At the top is a graphical representation of all partitions inside the device chosen in the list below it. Each device, by default, can hold a maximum of 4 primary partitions. This limit can be removed by making one of those an extended partition, which in turn can hold theoretically an unlimited number of logical partitions (practical limitations depend on, for example, other OSes installed).
+You may have to expand such a list with the +/- widget that appears in that case in front of that device to see the details of every logical partition.
Colors and icons provide some more information about the available volumes and partitions.
+Besides the familiar icons for harddisks, CD drives and USB sticks etc., there are a few that indicate a their mount mode:
| + | The /boot partition |
| + | An encrypted partition |
| + | A partition shared through SMB/NFS etc. |
| + | A partition that was mounted read-only |
| + | A mounted image file (see also the diskimage command) |
When mounted, a colored bar shows the used space of a partition. The color depends on the kind of partition:
+| A BFS formatted partition | ||
| A non-BFS formatted partition | ||
| A read-only partition | ||
| An encrypted partition |
You can select a partition and choose various commands from the context or menu, like /, or to .
+You can also or completely a partition.
+
-Creating a new partition
-When you found unformatted space on a drive, like the above <empty>, you can create a new partition in this space with (ALT C).
+Initializing a disk +If you don't plan to use just one of the partitions of a larger disk, but the entire drive as one partition, e.g. a USB stick or a Compact Flash card, you'll have to initialize the disk first.
+You do this by selecting the raw disk from list of devices and choose a partition map from the menu. The is the right choice for classical booting via a BIOS.
+
+
+Tworzenie nowej partycji
+Kiedy już znajdziesz niesformatowane miejsce na dysku, takie jak powyższe <puste>, możesz stworzyć nową partycję korzystając z (ALT C).
-You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.
-If you have created a primary partition instead of just another extended/logical partition within one, the above dialog also displays an checkbox. You'll have to check that, if you'll use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.
-Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be initialized with a filesystem.
+Zostanie otwarte powyższe okno dialogowe, które pozwala dostosować rozmiar oraz typ partycji. Wybierz jeśli chcesz użyć partycji do zainstalowania Haiku lub chcesz używać na niej wszystkich ciekawych funkcjonalności systemu, takich jak zapytania i atrybuty. Pamiętaj że inne systemy operacyjne mogą nie mieć dostępu do takich partycji.
+The checkbox is only available if you have created a primary partition instead of just another logical partition within an extended one. You'll have to tick that checkbox if you plan to use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.
+Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be formatted with a filesystem.
-Initializing a partition
-Only unmounted partitions can be initialized by using the menu.
+Formatting a partition +Only unmounted partitions can be formatted by choosing a filesystem from the sub-menu of . The (BFS) is mandatory for a Haiku boot partition and recommended for data partitions to be used with Haiku. Only BFS formatted partitions can be queried and fully support Haiku's file attributes.
-Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
-Initializing will destroy all data on that partition!
Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. The blocksize is the space in bytes that a file will allocate at minimum. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
+If the future data on your partition won't need any querying, you can uncheck to save a bit of overhead for managing the index.